CONTENTS

1.1 General

1.2 Site Conditions.

1.3 Design Philosophy.

1.4 Operating Conditions.

1.5 Ratings.

1.6 Protection Devices.

1.7 Numerical Relays.

1.8 Standards.

1.9 Construction of Panels.

1.10 Types of Relay Panels for 500 / 220 / 132 KV System.

1.11 Circuit Breaker Tripping Circuits.

1.12 Operating Characteristics.

1.13 Equipment Details for 500 KV System.

1.14 Equipment Details for 220 KV System.

1.15 Equipment Details for 132 KV System.

1.16 Testing and Inspection.

1.17 Factory Tests.

1.18 Drawings and Documentation.

1.19 Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1.20 For Turnkey Projects.

1.21 Relay Settings and CTs Sizing Calculations.

1.22 Relay Panels Technical Schedule.

Revised on 01.09.2009:
1
SECTION – I PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR 500/220 KV
NETWORK INCLUDING LINE & TRANSFORMER
PROTECTIONS.

1.1 GENERAL

1.1.1 These Specifications cover the requirements of design, manufacture and supply
of protection system that comprises protective relays for 500 / 220 KV System.
The relays and protection system shall conform to the applicable requirements of
IEC 60255 as well as to Specifications described herein.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall supply all necessary auxiliary relays, boards, wiring
terminals etc., install the necessary equipment and commission it in accordance
with requirements of these specifications. Types and manufacturer for all relays
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer of NTDC.
1.1.3 The design shall facilitate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair of
components.
1.1.4 Panels shall be supplied by the respective panel builders, equipment fully
assembled and tested under their close supervision and shall be fully responsible
for design and Engineering of protection and control system, schematic diagrams
and mature performance.
1.1.5 Testing of protection functions, including the full schemes involving control,
communication supervision etc., shall be carried out at the factory of the panel
manufacturer prior to dispatch to the site.
1.1.6 The exact types and ranges of the relays and/or scheme to be used shall be
subject to approval by NTDC. All offered relays have at least three (3) years
service experience in a world reputed utility.

1.2 SITE CONDITIONS.

1.2.1 The equipment shall be suitable in all respects for the site conditions through out
Pakistan.
1.2.2 All equipment shall have a proven track record of minimum three years in
successful operation in similar environmental conditions as in Pakistan.

1.3 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY.

1.3.1 For 500 KV and 220 KV, two sets of distance protection, labeled Set-I and
Set-II, shall be provided for the transmission lines. Distance protection Set-I and
Set-II shall be of numerical design. Each distance protection shall operate
independently and in parallel to act as duplicate. The two sets of protection shall
not have any common components, cables or routing of the control cables.
2
 These shall be in accordance with the single line protection drawings of the
substation. Set-I and Set-II distance relays shall have different operating
algorithms and shall be of different makes and types.
1.3.2 There shall be separately MCB protected DC and CCVT/CVT circuits for each
protection. DC supply for line protection Set-I be normally supplied from one
battery and Set-II from the other battery. Independent CT Cores shall be
provided for each protection. Duplicate trip coils of the circuit breakers shall be
provided with DC supplies from separate batteries. Each protection, main and
back-up shall trip both the trip coils.
1.3.3 The 220 / 132 KV autotransformers shall be equipped with two sets of
protection:
- Set-I shall consist of main differential, restricted earth fault, H.V. over current
and earth fault, L.V. over current and earth fault, over excitation and thermal
over load, T/F buchhloz, winding temperature, oil temperature.
- Set-II shall consist of rough balance, H.V. connection, L.V. connection, tertiary
over current, neutral earth fault, tap-changer buchhloz, pressure relief.
For 500 / 220 KV auto transformer protection, in addition to above, over voltage
protection shall be included in Set-II.
1.3.4 For 500 KV and 220 KV side transformers, circuit breaker failure protection
shall be provided to detect failure of a circuit breaker to trip on fault following a
trip initiation from the protective relays and will trip the “next-in-line” local
breakers and remote breaker (s).
1.3.5 Over current and earth fault relays shall form back-up protection.
1.3.6 500 KV and 220 KV bus bar protection shall be suitable for breaker-and-a-half
scheme or double bus bar arrangement, which one is applicable.
1.3.7 The circuit shall be designed for necessary interface with the protection signaling
equipment (PSE) for coordinated operation of both line ends of the protection
scheme.
1.3.8 The protection shall be stable during system transients and it shall operate
correctly during system faults within the protected zones for the range of fault
levels.
1.3.9 Each trip circuit, alongwith each breaker trip coil shall be monitored by
supervisory relays to give audible and visual alarm for open and closed circuits.
The trip circuits shall be supervised in both open and close condition of the
circuit breaker. An alarm shall be initiated, if trip circuit supervision itself fails.
1.3.10 Each protection set shall have separately protected and continuously supervised
DC supply circuit. The DC supply protection shall be properly coordinated for
discriminate isolation of the faulty section.
1.3.11 DC power supplies and trip outputs shall be routed through test blocks.
1.3.12 Before taking up the schematic diagrams, the Contractor / Supplier shall prepare
trip and alarm logic tables and single line diagrams with as much detail as
possible for Engineer‟s review and approval.

3
1.3.13 Reliability analysis for relays and their components shall be provided. The
Contractor / Supplier shall also provide mean time between failures (MTBF) for
each type of relay.
1.3.14 Tripping supplies for each bay shall be engineered directly from DC distribution
board. Any interruption of DC supply to relays shall initiate alarm.
1.3.15 Facilities shall include user interface (both front and rear ports), serial
communication and diagnostic/self supervision etc.
1.3.16 Function elements in numeric relays shall have LED and LCD Indications on the
front panel to enable identification of their operation, faulted phases, zones,
hardware and software status etc.
1.3.17 Any protection relay output contact shall be coordinated with station
requirements. However, if not specified, minimum contact ratings shall be as
follows:
Switching Voltage = 250 V
Contact rating = 1250 W/VA
Making Current = 30 A AC or DC for 3 Sec.
Breaking Current (Power) = 30 W/VA (L/R) < 40 ms
Typical Pick-up time. ≤ 10 ms

1.3.18 As block-close facilities (lock out relays) are specified, these relays shall be
arranged to prevent closing of any associated circuit breakers until it has been
reset. Local and remote resetting shall be possible. An operation indicator shall
be provided which resets when the block-close relay is reset.
1.3.19(a) All necessary equipment to communicate with the numerical devices such as
laptops, PCs and peripheral devices including printers shall be provided.
Licensed working software for communicating with the devices shall be part of
the supply. Software shall be suitable for windows environment.
(b) Numerical relays shall have serial/fiber optic interfaces and standard protocols,
compliant with IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 to facilitate data
communication with station control system / NPCC.
1.3.20 It shall be possible to upgrade the operating software of the numerical devices as
it is further developed by the manufacturer.
1.3.21 The numerical devices offered under this contract shall be of latest version, of
proven design, having minimum of three years operating experience in a well
reputed power utility power systems of voltage level 500 KV and above.
However, the latest version of the same should be offered / quoted.
Authenticated record of satisfactory operation of the offered devices shall be
submitted with the bid.
1.3.22 The devices to be supplied under this contract / purchase order including the
numerical and static relays shall have only industry class components.
Separate and independent relays shall be provided for each protection function
except where it is specified that built-in function of a relay shall be used.

4
1.3.23 In addition to built-in test blocks and sockets in the protective devices which
may need special test plugs, external test blocks shall be provided in adequate
numbers to enable testing the device with standard test plugs and test blocks and
without affecting the other devices and protection functions. Moreover, test
blocks shall be wired in such a manner that trip and alarm from the device and
DC supplies to the device are interrupted upon insertion of the test plug. The CT
and CCVT/CVT circuits to each protective device shall be routed through the
test blocks.
1.3.24 LEDs and LCDs shall be used for targets showing visual indication of the
protection status. Retrieval of fault Data/Alarms should be made available in
numerical relays.
1.3.25 The relays panels shall have front door with glass window. Rear doors shall be
of double leaf type. All panels shall be constructed according to protection class
IP51.
1.3.26 In order to prevent condensation assemblies in the panel, hygrostat shall be
employed to regulate the heater limitation of surface temperature via positive
thermal co-efficient. Semi conductor heater shall be 60 watt: The finish shall be
black anodized extruded.
1.3.27 All panels shall have door operated strip light for interior illumination. Three pin
single phase, 230 V AC receptacles shall be provided in each panel. There shall
be separate MCBs for lighting and power receptacles. MCBs shall be equipped
with normally closed contact for alarm.
1.3.28 The trip circuit supervision relays shall be such that in event of a fault in any one
component, it shall not be possible to inadvertently trip the circuit breaker. The
trip circuit supervision relays shall initiate a delayed alarm in the station. This
alarm shall operate for loss of trip supply and for any interruption in the trip
circuit wiring.
1.3.29 Test blocks shall be provided to facilitate tests by secondary injection of all
major fault measuring relays without disconnecting any wire or permanent
connection. The test block shall permit direct of currents and voltages into the
individual relays.
1.3.30 Test blocks shall isolate the trip contacts of main protection relays on both sides.
Injection Sockets shall be arranged so that it shall not possible to open circuit the
current transformer secondary circuits when inserting test plugs.
The trip function, if not interrupted by a test switch, shall be blocked when
inserting the test plugs.
1.3.31 Four spare test plugs of each type shall be supplied.
1.3.32 Selector switches should not be introduced in protection current transformers.
1.3.33 All tripping and inter tripping relays shall be of high speed, high burden,
drawout and flush mounted type.
1.3.34 Where with draw able type relays are used, there shall be designed so that when
in the withdrawal position, associated current transformers shall be short
circuited.

5
1.3.35 The protection schemes shall include all hardware and software to remote
setting/interrogation/fault evaluation.
1.3.36 Wiring of CT and VT circuits and cores shall be in separate multi-core cables
carefully segregated and screened. The CT neutral shall be earthed via air
isolation link.
1.3.37 The minimum cross section of CT circuits inside the protection panels/control
panels shall not be less than 4.0 mm. Whereas, for the inter panel / field cabling,
it shall not be less than 6.0 mm².
1.3.38 CT/VT field cables shall have the colour code of Red, Yellow, Blue and Black.
1.3.39 Current transformer requirements shall be determined to ensure high protection
performance. The bidder / contractor shall submit comprehensive technical
report that includes the required CT burden and knee point voltage calculations.
The report shall confirm that CTs will be designed to ensure a saturation free
performance under both transient and steady fault conditions, taking due account
of system X/R ratios, system fault levels and remanant flux conditions in the CT
core.
1.3.40 The design life of numerical protection relays shall be greater than 25 years.
1.3.41 For overall letter integration via the communication facilities, the numerical
protection relays shall support IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850.
1.3.42 Separate sets of MCBs with normally closed contact shall be provided for:
(a) Each protection scheme.
(b) Fault recorder.
(c) Metering.
(d) Synchronizing.
1.3.43 Control panel shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for
the safe and satisfactory operation of the plant and equipments.
1.3.44 The arrangement and mounting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays
and other apparatus shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1.3.45 All possible precautions shall be taken to ensure that direct current operated
relays which perform a tripping function are not liable to maloperation. For this
reason, the following measures shall be taken:-
(a) The total capacitance to earth of all connections to the negative pole of
the tripping battery shall not exceed 10 microfarad.
(b) If the positive side of a relay coil is connected to wiring external to the
relay cubicle then the relay shall not operate if a capacitor of 10
microfarad charged to (110%) of rated voltage is discharged through
the relay.
(c) The current at operation shall be greater than 100 milliamps.
1.3.46 The maximum a.c. fault voltage across any two points of a current circuit shall
not exceed 3000 volt peak and non linear resistors shall be included if
necessary to achieve this limitation.

6
1.3.47 Each relay which initiates tripping shall be provided with a trip isolation facility
which should be integral with the relay such that the tripping has to be isolated
prior to with draw able of the relay from its case.
1.3.48 The supplier/contractor shall install only protection relays and equipment which
are supported by guaranteed works, test certificates issued by the
manufacturers.
1.3.49 The supplier/contractor shall provide electrical protection relay schedules to
include manufacturer, type designation characteristic details and ranges and
actual protection settings to be used, on a per circuit basis in case of turn key
project.
1.3.50 All calculations to determine relay settings and adequacy of CT and VT rating
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. In the event that the rating of
the CCVT/CVT or CT proposed is insufficient to accommodate the connected
burden in accordance with this specification, the Contractor shall supply the CT
and CVT/CCVT with the necessary increased capacity at no extra cost in case
of turn key project.
1.3.51 All relays offered shall have been fully type tested in accordance with the IEC
standards and shall have had satisfactory operational service. Full data relating
to these requirements shall be submitted with the tender. Unless otherwise
stated, it will be assumed that relay equipment offered, has been type tested, or
if not tested, that the tendered price includes for such tests.
1.3.52 It shall be possible to test the setting and function of any AC actuated relay by
secondary injection without disconnecting any wire connection. These tests
shall be carried out by injecting directly into the individual relay or into a
specially provided test terminal block. The test terminal block shall be subject
to approval by the Employer/Engineer. Injection sockets shall be arranged so
that it is not possible to open circuit current transformer secondary when
inserting test plugs.
1.3.53 All relays shall be contained in dustproof cases. All metal bases and frames of
relays shall be earthed except where the latter must be insulated for special
requirements. All principal protective relays shall be mounted on the front of
relay panels. Where auxiliary relays are accommodated internally, they shall be
so mounted as to be accessible for inspection and wiring. Relays shall be flush
mounted and draw out type. Hand reset operation indicator is required
mandatory.
1.3.54 Microprocessor based relays wherever specified shall be of modular design and
modular sub racks shall have standard width of 19″. The hardware design shall
use latest state of art technology based on LSI/VLSI microprocessor technology
and shall perform satisfactorily under highly noisy electrical environment.
Microprocessor relays shall be complete with inbuilt self monitoring/self-
checking or auto testing features.
1.3.55 Relays shall be of approved construction, flush mounted, draw out type, and
shall be arranged so that adjustments, testing and replacement can be effected
with the minimum of time and labour. Relays of the hand reset type shall be
capable of being reset without opening the case.
1.3.56 All devices must be clearly labeled.
7
1.3.57 Relay terminal arrangements shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Snap on
type terminations will be accepted only if adequate termination locking features
are available, which will prevent inadvertent/accidental disconnection of
terminations.
1.3.58 Electrically reset tripping relays shall be provided where necessitated by the
system of control.
1.3.59 Unless otherwise specified, tripping shall always be directly from the relevant
measuring relay and through the tripping relay operated from the respective
main relays.
1.3.60 Relays, where appropriate, shall be provided with flag indicators, phase
identified where applicable. Flag indicators shall be of the hand reset pattern
and shall be capable of being reset without opening the case. Where two or
more phase elements are included in one case separate indicators shall be
provided for each element.
1.3.61 Relays which rely for their operation on an external D.C. supply shall have it
monitored at the relay and an alarm provided in event of failure.
1.3.62 Relays with provision for manual operation from outside the case, other than
for resetting, will not be accepted and time delay relays shall not be of the
dashpot type.
1.3.63 Relays, whether mounted on panels or not, shall be provided with clearly
inscribed labels describing their application and rating in addition to the general
purpose labels. Dymo type labels or similar will not be accepted.
1.3.64 Attention is particularly drawn to the climatic conditions specified and relay
designs should be entirely suitable for duty under these conditions.
1.3.65 To minimize the effect of electrolysis, relay coils operating on D.C. shall be so
connected that the coils are not continuously energized from the positive pole
of the battery.
1.3.66 Control and relay circuits, current and voltage transformer, secondary circuit,
battery and auxiliary power supply wiring, supervisory, alarm and
communication circuits shall be protected against conductive, electrostatic and
electromagnetic influences.
1.3.67 Every panel shall have at the top left hand corner easily visible lamp to indicate
that DC supply in the panel is off.
1.3.68 The test terminals shall isolate the trip contacts of main protection relays on
both the sides. Injection sockets shall be arranged so that it shall not possible to
open the current transformer secondary circuits when inserting test plugs.
1.3.69 All equipment as well as the terminals of the cubicles shall be easily accessible.
1.3.70 All protections and associated equipment shall be of standard construction from
experienced, reliable and well reputed manufacturers.
1.3.71 Terminal boards for CT connections shall have shorting, testing and
disconnecting facilities which allow tests to be conducted with the circuit on
load and which may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring.

8
1.3.72 Tripping interface shall be provided such that for transformer faults, operation
of any protection relay shall trip both the high voltage and low-voltage circuit
breaker.
1.3.73 Over current and earth fault relay shall be employed for the following
protection functions:
a. Line over current and earth fault protection.
b. Transformer HV side over current and earth fault protection.
c. Transformer LV side over current and earth fault protection.
d. Bus coupler over current and earth fault protection.
e. Tertiary Over Current and Earth Fault Protection / Transformer Neutral
over current Protection.
f. Shunt reactor protection.
1.3.74 All necessary additional devices, plug connections, conversional and short
copper or fiber optic connection shall be part of supply.
1.3.75 All protective relays shall be immune to D.C failure. They shall never operate
on loss of D.C.
1.3.76 The following contacts and / or signals shall be provided, as minimum, in the
output of relay sets:
i. Annunciation.
ii. Sequence of Events. Alarm
iii. SCADA functions.
iv. Station fault Recorder (Oscillographs fault trigger).
v. Reclose initiation.
vi. Reclose blocking.
vii. Breaker failure initiation.
viii. Optical fiber signaling and other communication signaling.

1.4 OPERATING CONDITIONS.

1.4.1 All relays shall be tropicalized and shall be suitable for satisfactory operation at
an ambient having maximum value of 55 degree C and 24 hours average value
of 45 degree C, and humidity reaching to 95%.

1.5 RATINGS.

1.5.1 System frequency is 50 Hz.

1.5.2 All control and indicating devices, relays and instruments operating on 220V
DC for 500 KV and 220 KV system and 110V D.C. for 132 system shall have a
minimum tolerance of + 20% and – 15% for variation in voltage.
9
1.5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the current circuit for the relays shall be suitable for
1A, 50Hz and voltage circuit shall be rated for 63.5V, 50Hz (Ph-N) or 110V,
50Hz (Ph-Ph).
1.5.4 Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the whole of the relay
mechanism shall be as far as possible unaffected by vibration or external
magnetic fields. The minimum contact ratings shall be as follows:-
Switched voltage = 250 V
Contact rating = 1250 VA
Making current. = 30 A for 3 Sec.
Continuous making current = 5A
Breaking capacity (L/R) < 40 msec. = 30 W / VA.
Typical pickup time ≤ 10 ms.
Tripping contacts shall be capable of making and carrying 30 A for at least
1000 operations in a duty cycle.
1.5.5 The temperature rise of coils when tested at continuous rating shall not exceed
the values given below. The values shall be determined by resistance method at
rated frequency and at rated current or voltage or the setting current or voltage
which ever is lower:
Insulation Class Maximum Temperature rise deg. C
105 50
130 75
180 125
The classification of insulating materials is according to IEC Standards.
1.5.6 Relays shall be capable of withstanding for one minute a low frequency test of
the following value:
(a) Insulation to ground and between circuits. Minimum 2.0 KV rms.
(b) Across normally open contacts. Minimum 1500 volts rms.
1.5.7 The accuracy class of all relays shall conform to the applicable requirements of
approved international standards.

1.6 PROTECTION DEVICES.

1.6.1 The application, performance and testing of protective devices shall be in

accordance with the relevant IEC and BS standards. If the section in the
specifications relating to site testing is in conflict with the relevant section of
the Standards, the specifications shall take precedence.
1.6.2 The protection equipment shall be suitable for protection of 500 / 220 KV,
220 / 132 KV systems.

10
1.6.3 Current transformers, where possible, are to be located so as to include the
associated circuit breaker within the protected zone and shall be located
generally as indicated on schematic drawings.
1.6.4 All protection, control and measurement devices and components shall be
approved by NTDC.

1.7 NUMERICAL RELAYS.

1.7.1 Relays shall be of approved types complying with IEC 60255 (British Standard
142), shall have approved characteristics, be flush mounted in dust and
moisture proof cases and shall comply with BS 2011 test classification
20/40/04. The components of each relay shall be suitable for operation under
the local climatic conditions.
1.7.2 The relays should have been type tested in accordance with the latest IEC
standards, with particular attention to the EMI immunity.
1.7.3 All protection relays shall be of numerical type with communication facility
with a protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850. The protection
schemes shall include all hardware and software to permit remote
setting/interrogation/fault evaluation from the engineering work station of the
control room. These relays are of a family of hardware known as intelligent
Electronic Devices (IED‟s). Auxiliary relays, repeat relays, trip relays and any
other simple auxiliary or contact multiplication function may be based on
standard attracted armature or other electromechanical techniques. Numerical
relays should offer instrumentation, disturbance recording and event logging
functions in addition to providing the principal protection function. Access to
these functions shall be available locally at the relay as well as remotely as
described below. Routine test requirements shall be limited to basic function
testing through the provision of comprehensive, continuous self-monitoring
alarm and diagnostic functions.
1.7.4 In case protection relays of the numerical type (IED‟s) should be integrated to
the PCMS. Numerical relays and schemes provided shall all be suitable for
connection to a local communications network to allow the complete relay
scheme to be interfaced to a central computer work station. The
communications bus, necessary modems and interface units and all associated
software should be provided as part of the contract. With the resulting system it
shall be possible to interrogate all numerical relays and schemes to monitor and
extract recorded data (including settings, measurement parameters, and
disturbance records). It shall also be possible to enable remote adjustment of
relay settings if required.
1.7.5 The numerical relays provided shall have following features:-
i. Shall be based on digital signal processing and algorithmic based
functions using multiple CPUs.
ii. Programmable scheme logic.
iii. Remote setting/interrogation.

11
 iv. Measured quantities displayed.
v. Shall be of compact design and modular software.
vi. Shall have continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic features or
shall have automatic relay and circuitry testing features.
vii. Shall have selection functions from protection software library and
shall be complete with Menu-driven use interface program.
viii. Shall have serial interfaces (redundant ports) for on-line and off-line
transmission of relay operation data, feeder load data, sequential
event and fault recording, remote setting etc.
ix. Time-tagged events/disturbance record. Shall have facility of
historic fault information of at least five system faults and on
demand shall display relay operations, fault recording, fault location,
protection operating times, feeder load data prior to fault etc. from
each system disturbance.
x. Shall have a shall have both front and rear serial-port for further data
exploitation, equipment parameterization, retrieval of fault records,
etc. A laptop PC and peripheral devices including Printer, applicable
software shall be supplied without an additional cost.
xi. Shall be suitable for operation based on 220 V D.C. auxiliary power
sources as specified.
1.7.6 Modern numeric relays with at least three years proven field experience shall be
offered. The design should be hardened against transient surge and over
voltages caused by the CT/VT and dc circuits and associated field devices. The
routing of cables shall be such as to limit interference to a minimum. Any
auxiliary supplies necessary to power solid state circuits shall be derived from
the main station battery and not from batteries built into the relay. Continuously
energized relays including those with economy resistors will not be accepted
for any application.
1.7.7 Storage facility for fault information for at least five latest system faults, giving
on demand operations, operating times, line load data etc.
1.7.8 Numerical relays shall also be provided with a local communications port to
allow direct interfacing to a lap-top PC, to facilitate local interrogation,
setting-up and recorded data extraction. Individual protection units shall be
provided with an integral user interface to facilitate setting changes and
observation of indications without the use of remote communications.
1.7.9 Numeric/Static relays shall comply with the impulse Withstand and High
Frequency disturbance tests specified in Appendix E of IEC Publication
60255-4, and Type Test reports covering these tests for all these relays shall be
provided. Relays shall be CE marked in accordance with European Union
requirements related to Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage
Equipment safety. Equipment complying with other national standards may be
accepted at NTDC‟s discretion and where the vendor provides copies of the
relevant standards

12
1.7.10 Numeric / Static relays shall also remain stable under conditions of Radio
Interference. Radio Interference tests acceptable to the Engineer shall have been
carried out by the Manufacturer and in this case RFI test reports shall be
submitted for the Engineers approval. If such tests shave not been carried out,
the contractor shall carry out RFI tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
submit test report for approval.
1.7.11 Hardware and Software shall be checked by software sub-routine continuously.
Important components supervised shall include:
i. CPU‟s and associated Memory (ROM, RAM, EEPROM).
ii. Input signal validity (A/D converter).
iii. O.S. Software.
iv. Protection function software.
v. Watchdog and self monitoring software.
vi. Output signal integrity.
vii. Algorithm execution / logic performance.
viii. Digital input conversion system.
ix. I/O logic points.
x. Power Supply Noise/Failure.
xi. Internal Clock.
1.7.12 Functional elements in numeric relays shall have LED indicators on the front
panels to enable identification of their operation, faulted phases, zones,
hardware and software status etc.
1.7.13 All numerical data communication shall comply with IEC-60870-5-103 and
IEC-61850 protocol.

Operator Interface.
1.7.14 All numerical protection systems shall be provided with an integral local user
interface, to enable communication with the relay without the use of external
equipment. Any facilities provided for connection to an external computer shall
be an additional feature to the local user interface. No exceptions to this
requirement shall be permitted.
1.7.15 Relay serial communication facilities should allow all information which is
available locally at the relay front panel to be accessed remotely. It should also
be possible to carry out bulk transfer of settings and fault record information
using appropriate licensed PC based software. The necessary software for
communication with each relay type shall be provided as part of the contract.

13
 Identification.
1.7.16 Each protection relay shall have a unique identifier that is clearly visible. The
software reference and issue level shall be identified. The marking of all relays
shall comply with Clause 12 of IEC 60255-6 (1988).
1.7.17 Each protection relay shall be provided with LCD display facilities on which
shall be shown:
● The current transformer ratio (if applicable), including all ratios of multi
ratio transformers and the ratio selected.
● Voltage transformer ratio (if applicable).

Settings.
1.7.18 Each protection relay shall provide a means by which the user can easily apply
the required settings, which is also secure from inadvertent operation. A display
of the selected settings shall be provided on the protection relay.

1.8 STANDARDS.

1.8.1 Performance Requirements.

1.8.1.1 Environmental Requirements.
1.8.1.1.1 Atmospheric Environment.

a. Temperature.
The standard nominal range of ambient temperature shall be
-10ºC to +55ºC. The protection system shall operate satisfactorily when
tested to the following requirements:-
IEC 60068-2-1 with severity class -10ºC, 96 hours.
IEC 60068-2-2 with severity class +55ºC, 96 hours.
The protection system shall be able to withstand the temperature
requirements for storage and transportation with severity class -25ºC to
70ºC, 96 hours.
b. Relative Humidity.
The protection system shall operate correctly with relative humidity
conditions prevailing at site of 93% - 95% and shall have been tested to
IEC 60069-2-3 with severity class 56 days. The contractor shall
demonstrate the suitability.
c. Enclosure.
The protection relays shall meet the requirements of the tests detailed in
IEC 60529 with classification IP 51 (dust protected) for housing and IP21
for terminals.

14
 It shall be projected against vertically falling drops of water in 4 fixed
positions of 15º tilt with flow rate of 3mm / minute for 2.5 minutes.

1.8.1.1.2 Mechanical Environment.

a. Vibration (Sinusoidal)
Cross over frequency – 58 to 60 Hz.
The protection system shall meet the requirements of the tests detailed in
IEC 60255-21-2 with severity class 1.
b. Shock and Bump.
The protection system shall meet the requirement of the tests detailed in
IEC 60255-21-2 with severity class-I.

Peak No. of pulses

Severity Duration of
Type of Test. Acceleration in each
Class. pulse (ms)
(gn) direction.
Shock 2 10 11 3
response.
Shock with 1 15 11 3
Stand
Bump 1 10 10 1000
c. Seismic.
The protection System shall meet the requirements of the tests detailed in
IEC 60255-21-3

Cross over frequency = 8 to 9 Hz

X = horizontal axis, Y = vertical axis.
Peak Peak Acceleration No. of Frequency
Displacement above cross over sweepey class range.
Severity Class below cross over frequency (gn) in each axis
2 frequency (mm)
X Y X Y

2 7.5 3.5 2.0 1.0 1 1-35

1.8.1.1.3 A. C. IMMUNITY.
a. AC/DC Auxiliary Energizing.
The protection system shall be capable of being energized from a D.C
auxiliary energizing voltage of 220 V (normal).

15
 The protection system or its associated power supply for use in 220 V
(nominal) dc supply system shall operate correctly over a voltage range
+20% and -15%.
The static protection system shall meet the requirements of IEC Standard
60255-11 with interruptions to dc auxiliary energizing quantity of 10 m sec.
AC 100 Hz ripple on DC supply, the relays shall with stand 12% A.C ripple
on the c/c supply.
Performance Criteria Class-A.
b. Frequency.
The standard frequency shall be 50 Hz. The nominal range of frequency
shall be -5 percent to +5 percent.

1.8.1.1.4 INSULATION.
a. Rated Insulation Voltage.
The rated insulation of circuits connected to current transformers of high
impedance relays shall be 1000 V. All other circuits shall have an insulation
voltage of 250 V.
All open contacts of the protection system shall withstand a voltage of
1000 V.
b. Dielectric Tests.
The protection system shall comply with the dielectric test requirements of
IEC 60255-5:-
i. 2.0 KV rms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.
ii. 2.0 KV rms for one minute between all terminals of each
independent circuit grouped together, and all other terminals.
iii. 1.5 KV rms for one minute across dedicated normally open
contacts of output relays.
iv. 1.0 KV rms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of
charge over and watch dog output relays.
c. Impulse Withstand.
The protection system shall comply with the impulse test requirements of
IEC publication 60255-5 of 5 KV peak 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 j across.
i. Each independent circuit and the case with terminals of each
independent circuit together.
ii. Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent
circuit connected together.
iii. Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic
contacts.

16
1.8.1.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility.
The requirements of this section of the specification are applicable to electronic
protection systems whether these are based on analogue, digital or numerical
design techniques. These requirements may also be applied to electro mechanical
relays that radiate electromagnetic interference during their operation.
High frequency Disturbance.
The protection system shall comply with the requirements of IEC publication
60255-22-1 with severity class-III.
1MHZ burst disturbance test.
2.5 KV Common Mode.
Power supply, CTs, PTs, opto inputs, output contacts, terminal block,
communication.
1 KV differential Mode.
Power supply, flied voltage, CTs, PTs, opto inputs and outputs contacts.
Performance Criteria Class-A.

1.8.1.1.6 Fast Transients.

The protection system shall comply with the requirements of IEC publication
60255-22-4 with severity level III and IV
2 KV, 5 KHZ (Class-III) and 4 KV 2.5 KHZ (Class-IV) Power Supply, field
voltage, opto inputs, outputs contacts, CTs, VTs.
2 KV, 5 KHZ (Class III) and 4 KV, 2.5 KHZ (Class-IV) Capacitive Coupling.
Terminal Block communication connections.

1.8.1.1.7 CONDUCTED / RADIATED EMISSIONS.

1.8.1.1.7.1 Conducted Emission.

The protection system shall comply with the requirements of EN55011 (Class
A) and EN 52022 (Class B)
0.15 – 0.5 MHz, 79 dBµV (quasipeak) 66 dBµV (average)
0.5 – 30 MHz, 73 dBµV (quasipeak) 60 dBµV (average)

1.8.1.1.7.2 Radiated Emission.

The protection system shall comply with the requirements of EN 55011 (Class
A) and EN 55022 (Class A).
30 – 230 MHz, 40 dBµV/m at 10 m measurement distance.
230 – 1000 MHz, 47 dBµV/m at 10 m measurement distance.

17
 Electro static Discharge.
The protection system shall comply with the requirements of IEC publication
60255-22-3 with severity class-III and class-IV.
Class 4 : 15 KV air discharge.
Class 3 : 6 KV contact discharge.
Test carried out both with and without cover fitted

1.8.1.1.8 CONDUCTED / RADIATED IMMUNITY.

1.8.1.1.8.1 Conducted Immunity.

EN 61000 4 – 6 (level 3)
10 Vemf @ 1 KHZ 80% am, 150 KHZ to 80 MHZ
Spot tests at 27 MHZ, 68 MHZ.

1.8.1.1.8.2 Radiated Immunity.

The protection system shall comply with the requirements of IEC publication
60255 – 22 – 3 with severity Class-III.
10 V/m 80 MHZ – 1G HZ @ 1 KHZ 80% am.
Spot tests at 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 450 MHz and 900 MHz.
Performance Criteria Class A.
1.8.1.1.8.3 Radiated Immunity from digital radio telephones. The protection system shall
comply with the requirements of EN 50204
10 V/m 900 MHZ + 5 MHZ and 1.89 GHZ + 5 MHZ,
200 HZ rep. Freq; 50% duty cycle, pulse modulated
Performance Criteria Class A

1.9 CONSTRUCTION OF PANELS.

1.9.1 Panel Design.

1.9.1.1 Each Panel shall be constructed of sheet steel not less than 2.5 mm unless
otherwise approved.
1.9.1.2 Panels shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall provide for bottom entry of
cable via vermin proof plate.
1.9.1.3 The size of relay panel shall not be less than 800 x 800 x 2200 mm. The size
of control panel for one and half breaker dia shall not be less than
1000 x 800 x 2200 mm.

18
1.9.1.4 The clearance between apparatus mounted on the panel side shall not be less than
that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and apparatus
mounted on the panels.
1.9.1.5 Indoor panels shall be of IP51 protective category and all outdoor
cubicles/marshalling kiosks / local control cubicles / C.T. box / V.T. box shall be
at least of IP55 with sun / rain shades.
1.9.1.6 Mounting plates inside the cabinets of sheet steel with at least 3mm thickness and
assembly system used shall be of standard design and construction. Rails,
brackets etc. shall fit to the pitch system of the basic support frame.
1.9.1.7. Ten percent spare amount of all types of terminals used in the panels/cubicles
shall be provided.
1.9.1.8 Floor plates of panels/cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cables
terminations, but spare, removable gland plates shall be provided within the
panels/cubicles, located so as to provide adequate clearances for terminating the
cables.
1.9.1.9 Marshalling kiosks, local control cubicles etc. Shall be made of stainless steel /
galvanized steel of a quality which shall be treated and painted in an approved
manner.
1.9.1.10 Each door shall be fitted with earth strap of at 16mm² highly flexible stranded
copper with insulation in green-yellow colour.
1.9.1.12 All panels/cubicles shall have two leaf rear doors with locking arrangement.
1.9.1.12 Doors are to be arranged so that every individual door or frame can be opened
without moving doors of adjacent panels/cubicles, equipped with minimum 150º
hinges.
1.9.1.13 The front door shall have glass front of sufficient mechanical strength. The
vertical center line of the window cutout shall be congruent with the one of the
19″ rack.
1.9.1.14 The panels/cubicles are to be supplied with all locks, cable land boxes with floor
fixing kit and anchoring devices, gland plates, bus bar, internal wiring, terminal
boards, and accessories such as well brackets and angles as well as eye bolts
complete with reinforcement plates and like used.
1.9.1.15 Mounded gaskets of non ageing materials shall be used to provide close sealing.
1.9.1.16 The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a light coloured painted Anti
condensation heater controlled by hygrostat shall also be fitted in each
panel/cubicle which shall be well ventilated through vermin proof louvers fitted
with braze gauze screens subject to approval of the Engineer of NTDC.
1.9.1.17 The arrangement and mounting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays
and other equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer of NTDC.
1.9.1.18 Protection system components shall be accommodated in 19″ rack.
1.9.1.19 The exterior finish and colour of panels / cubicles shall be to the approval of
Engineer of NTDC.
1.9.1.20 Every relay panel shall have at the top left hand corner one easy visible lamp to
indicate absence of main D.C. supply in the panel.
19
1.9.1.21 Circuit labels shall be provided on the front and back of the panels.
1.9.1.22 A strip light shall be fitted inside the each panel/cubicle and so arranged that all
wiring is illuminated as early as possible without dazzle. The strip light shall be
controlled by electrical ON/OFF switch in addition to a door switch.
1.9.1.23 Heater and panel illumination shall have separate MCBs/Links in each panel.
1.9.1.24 Device references of the relays and other components shall be according to
IEEE/ANSI standard. Devices related to particular protection shall be identified
with the respective protection device numbers. Device reference/number and
function (Dist, O/C etc) shall be shown on a permanent label on the
panel/cubicle.
1.9.2 Testing Facilities.
1.9.2.1 Separate testing facilities shall be provided for each current and voltage
transformer secondary circuit so that as to give access for testing protection
relays and metering system and associated circuits. These shall consist of test
block mounted adjacent to relay, or any other testing arrangement approved by
the Engineer of NTDC
1.9.2.2 Test facilities shall be provided for testing of the protection/signaling schemes
between substations. These facilities shall include all features necessary to permit
testing with line in service with minimum risk of unwanted tripping.
1.9.2.3 Test facilities for testing of the relays on relay panels such that :
a. The outputs of current transformers can be short circuited to neutral and
disconnection from relay circuits.
b. The output of voltage transformers can be disconnected from relay
circuits.
c. Currents and voltages can be applied to relays free from any connections
to the current or voltage transformers.
d. Current and voltage earth connections shall not be disturbed by use of
testing devices.
e. Whilst in service, the currents and voltages can be measured without
interrupting relay inputs.
f. It shall be possible to test the setting and function of any A.C. actuated
relay by secondary injection without disconnecting any wire or permanent
connection.
1.9.2.4 Separate testing devices should be provided for each measuring relay.
1.9.2.5 Each current transformer shall be earthed through a removable link at one point
only.
1.9.2.6 Withdraw able type isolation links are to be provided for all the bays for isolation
facilities of operation of trip relays and circuit breaker tripping individually for
maintenance / testing purposes.
1.9.2.7 Four test plugs of each type of testing plug installed under the contract/purchase
order shall be supplied and handed over to NTDC

20
1.9.3 Panel Wiring.
1.9.3.1 All internal wiring shall be made in accordance with IEC standards with
annealed copper, thermoplastic insulated with an overall flame retardant braid.
1.9.3.2 All cables and wires shall continuously carry their rated currents under the worst
temperature conditions which prevail in summer and also withstand maximum
fault currents without damage or deterioration. Wiring shall neatly run in PVC
rigid plastic wire-ways, clear of any metal panels and not filled with more than
60% or bundle with no bunch containing more than 12 wires. The bare ends of
stranded shall be provided with squeeze sleeve.
1.9.3.3 Wiring between terminals of various devices shall be point to point (no splicing
or T connection shall be allowed).
1.9.3.4 Groups of exposed wires shall be run straight, horizontally or vertically with
short right angle bends. Each wire shall be properly protected where it bears a
channel or duct.
1.9.3.5 Both ends of every wire core and all necessary panel wiring shall be filled with
numbered slip-on ferrules of moisture and oil resisting insulation material having
a glossy finish and with their identification numbers (local and remote) clearly
engraved, each being the same as for the relevant number. Ferrules shall be fitted
in such a way that they cannot become detached when the wire is removed from
the terminal. The colour and type of ferrules shall be approved by the Engineer of
NTDC.
1.9.3.6 Outgoing wiring shall be connected to terminal blocks suitable for connection to
multi conductor twisted pair cables. Generally one wire but not more than two
wires shall be connected to any device terminal or terminal block.
1.9.3.7 All secondary copper wiring within panels, racks, boards etc. shall be in
accordance with the relevant IEC standard, will be carried out for the fully rated
distribution voltage (2 KV AC/min, test voltage).
1.9.3.7 Wiring and DC supply for main-I and main-II set of relays shall be totally
independent and segregated.
1.9.3.8 Wiring of CT and VT circuits shall be in separate multi core cables (coloured
wires Red, Yellow and Blue for phases and black for neutral carefully segregated
and screened.
1.9.3.10 Conductor of DC circuits shall be coloured grey.
1.9.3.11 Cables for DC power shall be provided with the following colour code:
a. RED for positive.
b. Black for negative.
1.9.3.12 All wires forming part of trip circuit shall be provided with an additional red,
ferrule marked Trip in Black.
1.9.3.13 Minimum 10% spare terminal blocks shall be available for future use.

21
1.9.4 Terminal Blocks
1.9.4.1 Poly carbonate terminals are not acceptable.
1.9.4.2 Terminal blocks shall consist of single insertion type terminals of non tracking,
no inflammable synthetic plastics. Polyamide terminals may also be accepted to
the approval of the Engineer of NTDC.
1.9.4.3 All terminals shall have two separate clamping plates suitable for connection of
incoming and outgoing stranded or solid conductors, respectively, however, only
one wire per terminal will be accepted. Terminals with clamping screws in direct
contact with conductor are not acceptable.
1.9.4.5. Terminal blocks shall be designed and manufactured according to adequate
rating requirements and IEC standards.
1.9.4.6 Provision shall be made to terminate and ground the over all copper shields of
incoming cables.
1.9.4.7 Cabling for indicating instruments using transducers outputs shall be by means of
individually shielded wires and one extra stud shall be provided per pair of
terminals for grounding of the shield.

1.9.5 Size of Control Cables.

1.9.5.1 The inter panel wiring used for protection C.T. connection shall be of minimum 4
Sq. mm. Size and that used for protection VT connection shall be of minimum of
2.5 Sq. mm size. Metering C.T. shall be of 4.0 Sq. mm size. Metering V.T. shall
be of 2.5 Sq. mm size. Annunciation scada and control etc. shall be of 1.5 Sq.
mm size. Protection schemes shall be based on the use of 2.5 Sq. mm Size.

1.9.6 Earthing.
1.9.6.1 Each control or relay panel shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less
than 120 mm² and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels can be joined
together to form a common bus.
1.9.6.2 The common earthing bus bar of control and relay panels shall be connected to
the main station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than
120 mm².
1.9.6.3 All panel doors shall be earthed through flexible braided wires of proper size.

1.9.7 Earth Links.

1.9.7.1 Each current and voltage transformer circuit shall be earthed through a
removable link at one point only. Links shall be clearly labeled and mounted in
accessible position.

1.9.8 Miniature circuit breaker.

1.9.8.1 Each MCB shall be equipped with normally a closed contact for alarm function.

22
1.9.8.2 D.C. miniature circuit breakers shall be employed for DC applications. AC
MCBs shall not be acceptable in place of DC MCBs.
1.9.8.3 The miniature circuit breakers shall be designed for continuous duty and shall
carry the rated current continuously without exceeding the specified temperature
rise.
1.9.8.4 Each D.C. MCB shall have magnet on its contacts.

1.10. TYPES OF RELAY PANELS FOR 500 / 220 / 132 KV SYSTEM.

1.10.1 Relay Panels for 500 KV System.

The details about types of relay panels are given below:
Sr. No. Description. Type
i. Distance Protection relay Panel – (Set-I). R11
ii. Distance Protection relay panel – (Set-II). R12
iii. Transformer Protection relay panel – (Set-I). R13
iv. Transformer Protection relay panel – (Set-II). R14
v. Breaker failure protection relay panel for R15
three breakers.
vi. Trip circuit supervision relay panel for three R16
breakers.
vii. Bus Bar protection relay panel. R17
viii. Bus Coupler Protection Relay Panel for R18
double bus bar and single breaker
arrangement.
ix. Bus Sectionalizer Protection Relay Panel. R19
x. Shunt reactor protection panel. R20

1.10.2 Relay Panels for 220 KV System.

The details about types of relay panels are given below:
Sr. No. Description. Type
i. Distance Protection relay Panel – (Set-I). R1
ii. Distance Protection relay panel – (Set-II). R2
iii. Transformer Protection relay panel – (Set-I). R3
iv. Transformer Protection relay panel – (Set-II). R4
v. Breaker failure protection relay panel for R5
three breakers.
vi. Trip circuit supervision relay panel for three R6
breakers.
vii. Bus Bar protection relay panel. R7
23
 viii. Bus Coupler Panel for double bus bar and R8
single breaker arrangement.
ix. Bus Sectionalizer Protection Relay Panel. R9
x. Breaker Failure Protection, Trip Circuit R10
Supervision for one 220 KV circuit breaker
and one 132 KV breaker.

1.10.3 Relay Panels for 132 KV System.

Relay Panels for 132 KV System are detailed below:
Sr. No. Description. Type
i. Bus Coupler Panel. RP1
ii. Bus Sectionalizer Panel. RP2
iii. Distance Protection Panel. RP3
iv. 132 / 11 KV Transformer Protection Panel. RP4
v. 132 / 66 / 11 KV Transformer Protection RP5
Panel.
vi. 132 KV Bus Bar Protection Panel. RP7
NOTE: For 500 KV / 220 / 132 KV Cable protection
and short lines. Numerical line differential
relay shall be employed in place of distance
protection set-I.

1.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPING CIRCUITS.

1.11.1 Two independent tripping coils shall be fitted to each controlling breaker, either
of which can trip the circuit breaker. The first trip coil shall be associated with
first supply and the first tripping system and the second trip coil shall be
connected with the second supply and the second tripping system. Trip outputs of
each protection shall be connected to both the trip coils of its associated
controlling breaker.
1.11.2 Each circuit breaker trip coil supply, associated auxiliary switches and wiring
shall be fully supervised. The supervision is effective whether the circuit breaker
is open or close and whether trip signal is present or not.

1.12 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS.

1.12.1 Numerical Line Distance Relay, Protection Set-I:

The transmission line protection relay shall be modern, numerical, high speed,
fully micro-processor based, distance type relay suitable for single and multi-pole
tripping of long and heavily loaded lines as well as short lines.

24
 Final selection of the relay shall be subjected to approval of the “Engineer”.
1.12.1.1 The numerical distance relay shall have as a minimum following features:
a. Self Diagnostic and on line test features zone.
b. Mutual compensation for parallel lines.
c. Fault Locator.
d. Thermal over loading.
e. Full scheme (non switched) type with separate measuring elements:-
i. Minimum four zones.
ii. For all three phases, phase to phase and phase to ground faults.
iii. Without switching in any zone of any voltage or current.
iv. Shall detect and Clear all types of faults.
f. Fault recording, events recording and disturbance recording.
g. Stub protection.
h. Echo and weak-in feed features.
i. CCVT fuse failure supervision.
j. Detect broken conductor.
k. Power swing detection/blocking.
i. Under voltage / over voltage features.
m. Adjustable characteristic angle.
n. High Resistance fault detection.
o. Variable residual compensation for all zones.
p. Delta directional comparison.
q. CT Supervision / PT supervision.
r. CCVT transient detection.
s. Breaker contact wear monitor.
t. Residual voltage protection.
u. GPS time synchronizing.
v. Switch on-to-fault facility.
w. Easy setting mode.
x. Programmable LEDs.
1.12.1.2 The distance relays shall have provision for operating in any of the following
modes of operation via power line carrier communication system:
i. Permissive under-reach transfer trip scheme.
ii. Permissive over-reach transfer trip scheme.
iii. Stage acceleration.

25
 iv. Blocking scheme.
v. Unblocking scheme.
1.12.1.3 High resistance earth faults are difficult to detect using distance relays if they
were to set to operate for such a fault, there would be danger of operation due to
load currents. For this reason, the distance protection shall incorporate or be
associated with facilities for detection of such faults using sensitive directional
earth fault (DEF) elements.
1.12.1.4 Directional comparison earth fault scheme shall be integrated with the distance
protection and capable of using the same power line carrier protection signaling
command as the associated distance protection. The scheme shall be in-operative
during the single pole auto-reclose dead time.
1.12.1.5 When permissive over-reach signaling is selected, the distance protection and
directional comparison earth fault protection shall include a signal echo scheme
with re-transmits the received signal, if the line isolator or both circuit breakers
are open.
1.12.1.6 It shall be possible to extend the first zone step to 120% of the basic length of the
protected section during protection signaling system (PLC) failure or when
charging a dead line. During the autoreclose dead time, the first step shall
automatically be set back to normal first zone setting of the line impedance.
1.12.1.7 The characteristics of measuring elements for all types of faults shall be
directional impedance and shall have Mho type, quadrilateral or another suitably
shaped high performance characteristics features to best suit various fault
conditions under phase-to ground and inter-phase faults. Measures shall be taken
to avoid undesired tripping due to current reversals during switching operations.
Phase and ground fault compensation features shall be incorporated to ensure
accurate distance measurement for all types of faults.
1.12.1.8 The scheme shall be suitable for operation when connected with capacitor
voltage transformers.
1.12.1.9 The scheme shall be capable of functioning in conjunction with auto reclosing
relays described in and shall be capable of actuating single and three phase
tripping of the faulted phase (s). Moreover, provisions shall be made to initiate
three pole tripping if either single phase tripping order is given after time delay
or another phase of the protected line becomes faulted after one pole has been
tripped. Provision shall also be made to ensure three phase tripping when breaker
at either end of the line is closed manually onto fault on the protected line with
the line previously de-energized. In this case the auto-recloser shall be blocked.
1.12.1.10 The relays shall operate with correct directional sense for zero voltage three
phase faults, based on the normal voltage existing at the relay terminals prior to
the faults by a memory unit/module. Provision shall be made to prevent false
operation of the unit and to give annunciation for loss of voltage due to fault on
the secondary side of the CCVTs / CVTs. The blocking of false operation shall
be faster than minimum first zone operating time of the relay.
1.12.1.11 Power swing blocking function shall be included in the distance protection
scheme with a convenient arrangement to render it out of service if necessary.
Indication of power swing blocking will be provided. The power swing blocking

26
 shall be provided with selection features to select any of the following blocking
zones/modes:
i) Blocking of all zones.
ii) Blocking of zone-3.
iii) Blocking of zone-2, zone-3.
iv) Blocking of zone-1 only.
v) Unblocking of any of selected modes.
1.12.1.12 The relay shall be able to detect all kinds of fault during power swing and
provision be provided for the removal of blocking of the relay during a power
swing on the detection of fault.
1.12.1.13 In addition to feeding the system parameter and desired relay settings with a PC,
it shall also be possible to make all relay settings manually, through man
machine interface unit provided at the front of the relay.
1.12.1.14 The correct measurement shall be unaffected by heavy load transfer, line
charging currents, disturbed primary line currents and voltages, external
switching and sudden power reversal.
1.12.1.15 Close-onto-fault logic shall be provided on the main protections in order to trip
instantaneously for close-onto-fault situation and lockout the auto-reclose
equipment to prevent further reclosure. Since, with remote end, blocked distance
protection will not be receiving information from remote end, tripping for a
close-onto-fault situation will not be delayed. An accelerated distance protection,
however, will normally only trip instantaneously for faults within first zone.
1.12.1.16 Correct distance protection is critically dependent on voltage transformer
supplies and it two distance protection schemes are provided, then each shall be
fed from separate VT‟s cores. If voltage transformer supplies to a distance
protection are lost, then incorrect tripping could result on current only.
Consequently, voltage for transformer supervision facilities shall be provided for
all distance protections which shall instantaneously inhibit tripping from the
distance protection and initiate an alarm after a time delay of at least 200ms. The
trip inhibit from loss of voltage transformer voltage supplies shall not be
operational unless the line has been energized for a short time in order to avoid
defeating the close-onto-fault logic. A voltage transformer supervision scheme
which is capable of detecting the loss of any voltage and of all phase voltages is
required
1.12.1.17 The relay shall be suitable for adjusting its reach during transient conditions to
avoid mal-operation.
1.12.1.18 The relay shall be suitable for series compensated lines to deal with the
conditions in which the impedance seen by the relay is reduced than the actual
impedance due to the leading VARS.
1.12.1.19 The operating time of the relay in the ideal conditions of location for fault i.e
near to relay and high values of system impedance ratio (S.I.R) shall be 20ms.
Contour curves giving the reach and time operating performance for all types of
faults at different Zs/ZL ratios shall be submitted with the proposal.

27
1.12.1.20 The claim for operating time of the relay shall be supported by the Typical
Isochronic Operation Time Characteristics curves.
1.12.1.21 The relay shall be able to operate correctly in heavy load conditions on long
lines.
1.12.1.22 The relay shall be able to behave accurately in two ends feeding source for a fault
on a transmission line.
1.12.1.23 The distance relays shall incorporate indications to show the zone in which the
relay tripped and phase or phases faulted, whether relay operation was due to
carrier aided trip, switch on to fault, power swing blocking, VT fuse fail or
directional earth fault if appropriate, Indication must not be lost in event of a
supply failure.
1.12.1.24 The scheme shall be provided with sufficient contacts for wiring to the remote
Annunciator and Events Recorder. The scheme shall be insensitive to the
specified range of frequency changes and to the DC component in the fault
current.
1.12.1.25 The scheme shall provide at least 4-zone directional of all inter-phase faults and
ground faults. The first zone of the relay shall normally be set to cover 85-90%
of the line length and shall operate well within one cycle for all phase and ground
faults respectively, within the first zone setting. Individually adjustable timing
relays shall be provided for second, third and fourth zones time delayed tripping.
1.12.1.26 Phase and earth fault compensation features shall be incorporated to ensure
accurate distance measurement for all types of faults and to allow for the
variation in the path of earth faults on the system.
1.12.1.27 The operating time of each zone shall be substantially independent of fault
current magnitude.
1.12.1.28 To protect the zone between the line circuit breakers and the line dis-connectors,
while the-line isolator is open, the voltage input to the distance relay shall be
routed through auxiliary switch contact of the dis-connector, so that in the open
state of the dis-connector, the distance protection shall have current input only to
secure its operation. Also zone 3 timer shall be by-passed under this condition.
1.12.1.29 The reach of each zone shall be individually and independently adjustable. The
Contractor shall furnish necessary evidence to show that each step of operating
time is sufficiently independent of the magnitude of fault current.
1.12.1.30 Provision shall be made for detection of broken transmission conductors not
involving ground.
1.12.1.31 The Contractor shall submit sufficient evidence supported by relay setting
calculations and relay characteristics on R-X diagrams, based on the line surge
impedance loading (SIL) and line length to show that the offered relays have the
required reach on each transmission line section where it shall be applied without
load encroachment. Means shall be applied for the protection to function
correctly during low fault currents.
1.12.1.32 Design calculations for current transformers for use with distance relays shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. C.T. Design shall be on a maximum fault
level equivalent to 500 KV and 220 KV switchgear rating and X/R ratio of the
circuit.
28
1.12.1.33 The DC-DC converters provided with the relays shall be conservatively rated and
shall be of robust design as to provide the required operating voltage and
isolation of high frequency transients at the full range of battery operating
voltage with the relay room ambient temperature specified.
1.12.1.34 Only relays having three years proven field experience will be accepted. A
reference list shall be provided with the Tender. The relay shall have sufficient
outputs for independent tripping of each phase trip coil of line controlling
breaker initiating single and / or three pole-auto-reclosing, circuit breaker failure,
fault locator, fault recorder, alarms etc.
1.12.1.35 Serial interfaces for on-line and off-line transmission of relay operation data, line
load data, fault recording, remote setting and remote test initiation be provided.
1.12.1.36 IEDs shall be able to store at least 50 events and 10 disturbance records and shall
be able to download locally land remotely from engineering workstation and
NPCC / RCC through the Substation Control System gateways.
1.12.1.37 Serial connection facility to a PC with printer/plotter for further data exploitation
with the required software.
1.12.1.38 The built-in distance shall have compensation for the mutual coupling in case of
parallel lines algorithm shall calculate in real time. The distance to a fault in
either km or percentage of line length maintaining an accuracy of 2%. Also, the
fault locator function in the relay should be able to store data for at least 5 quick
successive faults.
1.12.1.39 For 132 KV transmission line, built-in, auto-reclosure and synchro-check relays
shall be provided.

1.12.2 NUMERICAL LINE DISTANCE RELAY, PROTECTION SET-II

1.12.2.1 All the features contained in distance protection Set-II shall be in line with
Clause 11.1. of same specifications. Set-II distance relay shall have different
operating algorithm and shall be of different make and type.

1.12.3 AUTORECLOSURE.
1.12.3.1 The reclosing feature shall be able to handle single pole and three pole high
speed and delayed reclosing. The reclosing function shall include features to
operate in conjunction with line protection in transferred tripping, carrier
acceleration and directional comparison blocking carrier schemes.
1.12.3.2 Reclosure Function shall only be affected following tripping either as a result of
first zone operation or in conjunction with a high speed protection initiated
tripping signal from the remote end. Full information shall be provided regarding
the means of discrimination employed by the protection and reclosure in
combination and the sequence of events when single phase to ground fault
involves a second phase during the switching sequence. Relay equipment shall be
provided with a selector switch or through software to select any of the following
sequences. Reclosing sequence shall be as:-
(1) Single and three phase reclosure (1-phase faults are reclosed single phase,
2 and 3 phase faults are reclosed three phase).
29
 (2) Three phase reclosure (1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase faults are all
reclosed three phase).
(3) Single phase reclosure (1-phase faults are reclosed with 1-phase
reclosure; 2 and 3 phase faults are locked out in all three phases).
(4) No reclosure (all faults are locked out at first trip).
1.12.3.3 The relay equipment shall be provided with timing features to cause three phase
lockout if the fault detecting relays pick up within 5 to 10 seconds of the
reclosure cycle.
1.12.3.4 For 500 KV and 220 KV single pole reclose will initiate breaker closure,
independent of any voltage or synchronism checks. Three pole reclosure will be
provided with voltage check logic to detect live line-dead bus, dead line-live
bus, and live line – line bus, conditions with selection to inhibit or allow any
combination of the above conditions. For the dead line or dead bus conditions,
reclosure will be controlled by a separate timer with a range of 0.5 to 10 seconds.
For live line-live bus reclosure the closing command will be checked by the
synchro-check having no additional time delay over and above that necessary to
ensure safe synchronizing conditions. In the case of a change of system
conditions during the timing sequence, the sequence will reset and re-start
provided the modified conditions do not entail an inhibited mode.
1.12.3.5 The auto re-closure shall operate in conjunction with both the main-I and main-II
line protection. An independent auto-reclosure shall be connected for each line
controlling breaker in one-and-a-half switch bay. Master Follower logic shall be
provided and the tripping will be simultaneous but reclosure will be in priority
order with bus side breaker closing first and the centre breaker following if the
bus side breaker closes successfully. However, if the bus side breaker cannot
reclose because it was open prior to the line fault or if its reclosure is inhibited by
a mechanism fault of a non-reclosable protection operation in one adjacent zone,
then the priority shall be automatically reversed and the centre breaker will
relclose first. The priority logic will initiate the second breaker close logic 200
m.sec following the first breaker without further checks for single pole reclose
but via the appropriate voltage detection and synchro-check logic for three pole
reclose. A removable inhibit of three pole reclosing shall be provided on the
centre breakers if neither of the associated bus breaker are closed in service.
1.12.3.6 The auto-reclose cycle will be inhibited and cancelled, if a circuit breaker fail
protection operates on either line breaker, if a local reactor protection operates or
if a direct transfer trip, intertrip, signal associated with a remote reactor fault or
breaker fail operation is received. The auto-reclosure of the respective breaker
will also be inhibited if it is tripped by a protection operation in an adjacent zone.
1.12.3.7 Auto-reclose shall not be initiated on breakers that were open prior to a fault or
for faults which occur within 5 seconds of manual closure.
1.12.3.8 It shall be possible to manually select auto-reclosing “IN” or “OUT”. A facility
shall also be provided to enable auto-reclose scheme to be switched “IN” and
“OUT” from remote supervisory point.
1.12.3.9 The relay equipment shall be provided with timing features to cause three phase
lockout if the fault detecting relays pick up within 5 to 10 seconds of the
reclosure cycle.
30
1.12.3.10 The auto-reclose cycle will be inhibited and cancelled, if a circuit breaker failure
protection operates on either line breaker, if a local reactor protection operates or
if a direct transfer trip, inter trip, signal associated with a remote reactor fault or
breaker fail operation is received. The auto-reclosure of the respective breaker
will also be inhibited if it is tripped by a protection operation in an adjacent zone.
1.12.3.11 A pole discrepancy trip logic, with a time delay longer than the normal single
pole reclose dead time, shall be provided. This shall be fed from the DC supply
group not associated with the reclose equipment.
1.12.3.12 Auto reclose shall not be initiated on breakers that were open prior to a fault or
for faults which occur within 5 seconds of manual closure.

1.12.4 SYNCHRONIZING CHECK FUNCTION (500 KV and 220 KV).

1.12.4.1 The synchronism verifier shall check the conditions of synchronism existing
between two system voltages and close any of the high voltage breakers when the
voltages are within the set limits in phase and frequency. Also included shall be
the feature that the function will operate when one of the sources is de-energized.
The operating time shall be adjustable. The relay shall have phase angle setting
range of 5 to 50 degrees. If the circuit is not in synchronism, then the reclosure
shall be locked out.
1.12.4.2 Provisions shall be made to synchronize either manually or automatically the
line / feeder with bus. The contractor shall design the synchronism check scheme
accordingly and submit to the Engineer for approval.
1.12.4.3 The check-synchronizing relay shall be part of the auto-reclose scheme and shall
be fed from line voltage transformer and relevant bus bar voltage transformer.
The selector choice of the bus bar voltage shall be performed via bay control
selector switches or voltage selection relay.
1.12.4.4 A separate synchronism check relay panel shall be provided for manual closing
of all the breakers.
1.12.4.5 The synchronism-check relay shall have provision for the following conveniently
selectable modes and combinations thereof:
- Incoming system live, running system dead (live line, dead bus).
- Incoming system live, running system live (live line, dead bus).
- Incoming system live, running system live (dead line, live bus).
- Incoming system live, running system dead (dead line, dead bus).
1.12.4.6 A three position synchronism selector switch, marked with positions Auto-Off-
Manual, shall be provided adjacent to each discrepancy type circuit breaker
control switch on the remote control panel in the control room. Besides selecting
the appropriate voltages land applying these to the synchronism check relay of
the respective circuit breaker and the common synchronizing instruments, the
selector switch shall activate the synchronism check scheme as follows:

31
 Switch in Off position: No voltage applied to the respective synchronism
check relay. No voltage applied to the common
synchronizing instruments. Closing command to the
circuit breaker is blocked.
Switch in Auto position: Voltages applied to the respective synchronism check
relay and the common synchronizing instruments.
Upon turning the circuit breaker control switch to
command position, synchrocheck scheme is
activated. Circuit breaker control switch is activated.
The scheme remains activated until the turned to Off
position. If synchronism check is un-successful
within an adjustable preset time an alarm is activated.
Switch in Manual Position: Voltages applied to the respective synchronism check
relay and the common synchronizing instruments.
Upon turning the circuit breaker control switch to
command position, synchrocheck scheme is
activated. Circuit breaker control switch is kept in
scheme activated. The scheme remains activated until
the circuit breaker closes and / or the selector switch
is turned to Off position. If synchronism check is un-
successful within an adjustable preset time an alarm
is activated.
1.12.4.7 Circuit breaker close command from SCADA shall bypass the synchronism
selector switch but shall activate the synchrocheck scheme as described for Auto
position of the selector switch.
1.12.4.8 The Contractor shall design the synchronism check scheme accordingly and
submit to the Engineer for approval.

1.12.5 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION.

1.12.5.1 Protection shall be of numerical type and phase-segregated with independent
fault measuring capability. The current differential relay shall be designed with
shunt capacitance current compensation. The relay operating time shall not
exceed 20ms for fault resistance of 50 Ohms or more.
1.12.5.2 For enhanced reliability, security and availability, current differential relays shall
work with dual fiber optic interface links. Each interface shall be built over either
dedicated, direct link or one dedicated and the other a multiplexed interface
through a fixed (synchronous) TDM to the SDH hierarchies. Digitized current
sampling values must be exchanged on both links if the hardware permits:
otherwise one link must serve as main and the other as “hot” standby with a
switchover facility.
1.12.5.3 The current differential relay shall be built with an unstablizing facility, through
which, on receipt of an external trigger, it shall communicate a signal to the
remote and relay for the purpose of tripping the remote and circuit breaker and
thus cutting off the remote end infeed to the fault at the local and external to the
protection zone.

32
1.12.5.4 The current differential relay shall be designed with multiple differential slope
settings. The hardware shall be designed with a CT saturation detector. This
detector will change the slope characteristic from low value to high value to
increase the operating current. The line terminal that detects the saturation should
send a coded message to the remote end over the same channel used to exchange
current samples, so that slope characteristic is also changed at the other end. As
multifunction protection and processing capabilities, the following
complementary functions shall be provided.
1.12.5.5 Zone distance measuring protection package equipped with fuse failure and
conventional tele-protection signaling interface facilities.
1.12.5.6 Earth fault directional comparison protection.
1.12.5.7 Fault locator function since the synchronized voltage and current phasors from
both line ends are available at each end for an accurate fault locating accuracy.
1.12.5.8 The current differential relay at one feeder end shall communicate with a similar
relay at the remote-end over dedicated fiber optic communication channels to
provide unit protection for the full length of the feeder being protected.
1.12.5.9 If optical signal boosters or regenerators are required along the line route, then
the requirement and/or provision of the optical equipment shall be included and
confirmed in the bid.
1.12.5.10 An accurate time synchronization of the current measurements shall be
maintained at both ends of the feeder. The relays shall be designed to possess
accurate knowledge of the transmission message delay on-line. The two relays
shall exchange current samples concerning their local end primary currents via
telecommunication channel (s). The principle of operating shall be based on a
biased differential current measurement at both feeder ends and shall be
responsive to, and produce independently a trip criterion for, all phase and earth-
faults within the protected zone. The relays shall stabilize for all external fault
conditions. If relays are designed to be capable of receiving a time signal from
the GPS time distributor, the propagation delay compensation is not required as
both relays are synchronized to a common time reference.
1.12.5.11 The differential relay shall be designed with delay compensation feature, due to a
significant delay arising between the sending and receipt of the current message
in the communication circuit. The protection shall dynamically adjust the delay
compensation according to the prevailing message delay resulting from the
change of communication route.
The fault detection principle shall be independent of power swings. Faults near
weak infeeds shall be detected as well as faults near high-energy centers.
1.12.5.12 The current differential protection shall be designed with exchange of digital
information pertaining to the magnitude and phase angle of fault currents flowing
at both ends of the feeder though the fiber-optic interface.
1.12.5.13 Fiber-optic interface shall be provided with all necessary accessories.
1.12.5.14 The conceptual design of the protection shall be unaffected by:
Zero sequence mutual coupling.
Sudden power reversal.
33
 Charging current.
Interaction of fault resistance and sources feeding with different fault
angles producing misleading measurement of reactance.
External switching phenomena.
CT Saturation.
1.12.5.15 Close-in high-current faults shall be cleared instantaneously and the relay may
trip the breaker without information from the remote end. Also, measuring
algorithms to provide switch-onto-fault facility shall be included.
1.12.5.16 The design shall have the ability to provide on-line monitoring and self-check
facilities to monitor the state of health of the entire protection system.
1.12.5.17 Hardware and software shall be checked by software sub-routine continuously.
Important components supervised shall include:
CPU‟s and associated Memory (ROM, RAM, EEPROM)
Input Signal Validity (A/D Converter).
Protection Functions Software.
OS Software.
Communication System Software.
Watchdog and Self-Monitoring Software.
Output Signal Integrity.
Interference Noise Level.
Algorithm Execution/Logic Performance.
Analogue Measuring System.
Digital Input Conversion System.
I/O Logic Points.
Power Supply Noise / Failure.
Internal Clock.
1.12.5.18 The current differential relay shall be designed to work with a single and three-
phase auto-reclosing (AR) facility.
1.12.5.19 The relay shall further have the following facilities:
(a) Serial interfaces for on-line and off-line transmission of relay operation
data, feeder load data, fault recording, remote setting and remote test
initiation.
(b) Storage facility for one fault information for at least the latest five system
faults, giving on demand relay operations, operating times, load data, etc.
(c) Serial interface facility to a PC for further data exploitation with the
required software for this purpose.

34
 (d) What about A / R and synchronizing check relays with current differential
protection.

1.12.6 TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION RELAY.

1.12.6.1 A Three phase numerical multifunctional Percentage Biased differentia relay
shall be employed as main differential protection for 2 or 3 winding on
transformer as specified.
1.12.6.2 The relay shall have the following features:-
(a) Bias restraint characteristics.
(b) Built-in adjustment for vector group and CT ratio corrections.
(c) Stability against inrush currents (second harmonic blocking).
(d) Stability during through fault and CT saturation.
(e) High set O/C function element in the differential circuit.
(f) Adequate alarm and tripled indications with hand reset facility and LCD
Displays.
(g) Comprehensive self monitoring and diagnostics facility.
(h) Event and disturbance recording facilities.
(i) PC serial inter face for parameter display/setting and fault evaluation.
(j) Clock synchronization.
1.12.6.3 Relay shall be designed to ensure stability on any transformer tap position under
maximum through fault conditions with maximum DC offset in the fault current.
1.12.6.4 Relay shall have programmable facility on inputs and outputs to provide trip and
for indication of external protection features.
1.12.6.5 The relay shall be provided with 5th harmonic restraint or blocking features such
that it shall not mal-operate under over excitation conditions.
1.12.6.6 The scheme shall comprise of unrestrained high set units for terminal faults.
1.12.6.7 Setting, monitoring and post faulted analysis shall be possibly on the relay,
further by a Laptop computer.
1.12.6.8 Percentage bias setting of the relay shall be adjustable in range of 10% to 50% of
IN.
1.12.6.9 The relay shall have dual shape bias characteristics.
1.12.6.10 Differential relay trip contacts shall be wired to the lockout trip relays.
1.12.6.11 Relay shall be supplied with front and rear ports equipped with communication
software for local / remote access of data and parameter down load.

1.12.7 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY.

1.12.7.1 High impedance circulating current differential protection shall be employed for
auto transformer application covering the complete transformer windings.

35
1.12.7.2 It shall be connected to bushing current transformers having same CT ratio and
characteristics provided on HV and LV windings as well as in the transformer
neutral circuit.
1.12.7.3 The relay shall have an operating time of less than 20 m.sec. It shall be tuned to
fundamental currents, so that it is insensitive to the DC component and other
high order harmonics.
1.12.7.4 All necessary stabilizing resisters of adequate rating and new linear or over
voltage protection resistors shall be provided.
1.12.7.5 The current range of the relay shall be 10 to 40% of rated current or equivalent in
voltage calibrated relays.
1.12.7.6 The ohmic value of the resistor shall be 0-250 ohms for 1 amp. CT secondary.
1.12.7.7 The sensitivity of protection scheme shall be around 25 percent of the related
current of the protected winding.
1.12.7.8 The relay must ensure on exceptional level of through faults stability.
1.12.7.9 Current transformer supervision shall not normally be provided because the CT
bus wiring be relatively short and shall not be switched.
1.12.7.10 Solid state high impedance relays shall be accepted, but if both protections i.e.
transformer percentage differential protection and Restricted earth fault high
impedance differential protection are solid state then they shall be of different
manufacturer so that a component type failure is unlikely to affect both
protections.
1.12.7.11 Four pairs of make self resetting contacts shall be provided.

1.12.8 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION.

1.12.8.1 The relay shall have non directional three phase over current elements and one
earth fault element.
1.12.8.2 The relay shall have the facility of selection of following characteristics
according to IEC 60255 and BS-142.
(a) Standard inverse.
(b) Very reverse.
(c) Long time inverse.
(d) Extremely inverse.
(e) Definite time over current.
1.12.8.3 Relay shall have adjustable settings for both operating current and time, the
design of the relay being such that the setting can be carried out without taking
relay out of service. The range of current settings for phase fault shall cover at
least 5-200 percent of rated current with tappings a minimum of 5-percent
intervals and time setting adjustment shall be 0 to 3 seconds at ten times the
setting current. Time setting for both over current and earth fault elements shall
be adjustable over a range of at least 0.05 to 1.0 times in steps not exceeding

36
 0.025 times. Earth fault element shall have a minimum range of setting from 5%
to 80% with tapping of 5% interval.
1.12.8.4 The high set element shall have a setting range of 200 percent to 3000% of
nominal current the tripping time of high set elements should have within 20 ms.
1.12.8.5 Each protection element shall have separate trip and alarm contacts and separate
trip indicators.
1.12.8.7 Relays shall be supplied with front and rear ports equipped with communication
software for local/remote access of data and parameter down load.
1.12.8.8 HMI – Keypad facilities shall be provided for local access to setting, monitoring
and disturbance data shall also be provided.
1.12.8.9 The relays shall be thermally rated such the operating time of the relay at the
highest practical current levels on combination of current and time multiplier
settings shall not exceed the time thermal with stand time of the relay.
1.12.8.10 The actual relay pick-up current shall not exceed 1.1 times the relay setting and
reset value shall not be less of 90% of pick-up current.

1.12.9 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION.

1.12.9.1 The breaker failure protection shall have three phase instantaneous over current
element and single phase ground element with built-in timers
1.12.9.2 Breaker failure protection shall be fitted to all 500 KV breakers and 220 KV
circuit breakers.
1.12.9.3 The breaker failure protection shall be initiated by all the other protection which
normally initiates tripping of the breaker, breaker failure protections of
associated circuit breaker and pole discordance.
In case of line controlling breaker, failure protection it shall also be initiated by
remote end PLC signal receipt.
1.12.9.4 Protection shall have for two stage tripping. In event of circuit breaker failing to
open within a pre-selected time, in first stage, breaker failure protection shall trip
its own breaker. In 2nd stage the breaker failure protection shall initiate tripping
of all adjacent breakers. It shall also incorporate provision for initiating direct
inter tripping of any remote infeeds, via tele-protection channel over power line
carrier, Fiber optic links etc.
1.12.9.5 The relay shall have an operating time of approximately 10 ms and a consistent
reset time of less than 10 m sec.
The relay shall be capable of remaining in the operated position continuously and
of carrying twice the circuit rated current continuously.
1.12.9.6 The operating time of the breaker failure protection shall be selected by means of
Built-in-timers with ranges of 50-500 m sec.
1.12.9.7 It shall be sensitive enough to operate between 20 percent and 200 percent of
nominal current, adjustable in steps of less than or equal to 10 percent.
1.12.9.8 The DC voltage used for the breaker failure protection initiation (DC1 and DC2
separately) shall be taken from the station batteries.
37
1.12.9.9 Following detection of a breaker failure protection, T1 and T2 timers are
energized.
1.12.9.10 Facilities shall be provided for sending a non-permissive on inter trip signal to
the remote end breakers, where stuck breakers condition is detected.
1.12.9.11 Both time delay stages shall be by passed in the event of abnormal situation in
the breakers (e.g. under pressure of SF6, N2, hydraulic oil etc.) to immediately
effect bus bar clearance following fault detected by a relay.
1.12.9.12 Breaker relay shall block the auto-reclose function.
1.12.9.13 Breaker failure relay shall give tripping command to both the sets of trip coils of
the same circuit breaker and other fault feeding circuit breakers.
1.12.9.14 The breaker failure relay shall be provided for each individual breaker. Breaker
failure protection shall be installed in the respective breaker failure protection
panel.
1.12.9.15 Setting, monitoring and post fault analysis shall be possible directly on the relay,
further by portable. Computer through a due interface.
1.12.9.16 Separate DC supply through MCB shall be provided for the scheme. The supply
shall be monitored by a separate DC supervision relay.
1.12.9.17 The scheme shall include circuit breaker fail check relays, timers, lockout
tripping relays. Self reset tripping relay, DC supervision relay, test block, wiring,
terminals, label etc.
1.12.9.18 The scheme shall work through mechanical protection of auto-transformer as
well. As mechanical protection function is not necessarily dependent on the
current, the starting of breaker failure will be performed by a logical circuit
instead of usual current starting. The scheme shall be prepared in such a manner
that equipment is supervised continuously for preventing incorrect tripping. Also
in case of short circuit between an open circuit breaker and its associated current
transformer, the scheme shall provide for operation of the protection system to
trip the adjacent breaker (s).

1.12.10 HIGH IMPEDANCE BUS BAR PROTECTION.

1.12.10.1 A high impedance circulating current bus bar protection scheme shall be
employed for one & half breaker arrangement / double bus bar arrangement.
1.12.10.2 It shall be capable of detecting all types of faults i.e. multi-phase and single
phase to ground faults with an over all operating time of less than 1-cycle
symmetrical fault exceeds a value twice the pick-up value.
1.12.10.3 Non linear voltage limiting resistors shall be permanently connected to CT bus
wires associated with protection relay in order to prevent dangerously high
voltages being developed on the bus wires, if a wiring fault develops, if a CT
goes open circuit, or if a disconnector auxiliary switch develops a fault. Also, this
relay shall be equipped with heavy duty contacts for shorting the CT bus wires.
1.12.10.4 The voltage setting range shall be 25-325 volts.

38
1.12.10.5 Stability for external faults shall be ensured:-
(a) Not less than the three phase symmetrical breaking capacity of the switch
gear irrespective of the distribution of current between individual circuits.
(b) Under full CT saturation of any of the outgoing circuits.
1.12.10.6 Sensitivity shall not exceed 20% of the minimum fault level for all types of
faults.
1.12.10.7 Current transformer bus wires shall be supervised by a sensitive three phase
voltage supervision relay which shall operate on alarm after a delay of three
seconds.
1.12.10.8 Supervision relay shall be between 1% and 5% of the bus bar rating, but not
greater than 50% of the full load current of any connected circuit.
1.12.10.9 Operation of current transformer supervisory equipment should take the defective
protection zone out of service by short circuiting the current transformer bus
wiring.
1.12.10.10 Hand reset bus bar protection trip relays shall be associated with each circuit
breaker.
1.12.10.12 In case of transformer circuits, operation of bus bar protection shall trip HV and
LV sides controlling breakers.
1.12.10.13 All bus bar protection trip outputs shall have with-drawable isolated links.
1.12.10.14 A lockable bus bar protection IN/OUT of service switch is to be provided.
1.12.10.15 The calculated performance data for instantaneous high impedance differential
bus bar protection system has to be submitted to NTDC confirming the
following:-
(a) The rated stability limit shall be no less than three phase symmetrical
breaking capacity of the switchgear.
(b) The fault setting for any type of fault shall be 10% to 30% of the
minimum fault current overload.
(c) Current transformer knee point voltage shall not be less than the relay
circuit setting voltage.
(d) The maximum peak voltage across current transformer secondary wiring
shall not exceed 3-KV under maximum internal fault conditions.
1.12.10.16 When a bus bar fault occurs, all breakers connected to faulty bus bar shall be
tripped simultaneously, whether they can feed fault current or not.
1.12.10.17 The terminal boards for CT connections shall have shorting, testing and
disconnecting facilities which will allow tests to be conducted with the circuit on
load and which may be repeated without disturbing the connected wiring.
1.12.10.18 The existing bus bar protection scheme shall be extended to cover the new bays
to be added. Additions and modifications as required be made. Test switches,
auxiliary relays, tripping relays, terminal wiring, and other equipment and
material necessary to integrate the new bay into the bus bar protection scheme is
deemed to be included in the scope of work.

39
 There shall not be any adverse effect of the addition and modifications on the
performance of existing bus bar protection including the trip time of the bus bar
protection.
1.12.10.19 The bus bar protection scheme shall also look into faults taking place between
CTs and circuit breakers of 220 KV and 132 KV bus bars.
1.12.10.20 The speed of operation shall be less than one cycle if the symmetrical fault
current exceeds a value twice the pick-up level. The overall time shall be less
than 0.1 sec.

1.12.11 LOW IMPEDANCE BUSBAR PROTECTION.

1.12.11.1 A numerical low impedance busbar protection shall be offered with phase-
segregated measurement. It shall be capable of detecting all types of faults, i.e.
multiphase and single phase-to-ground faults with an overall operating time of
less than 1.5 cycles. The architecture of the bus-bar protection shall be derived
from using individual bay units located on a suite of common panels along with a
central fault-measuring unit. The panels shall be located in the relay room.
1.12.11.2 To enhance security, the protection scheme shall use at least two independent
criteria for detecting in-zone faults, and shall provide a trip signal only if the two
criteria are securely satisfied. The two criteria shall be dissimilar. The busbar
protection shall have the following additional functional features.
1.12.11.3 a) Current transformer saturation detector to enhance through fault stability.
b) Third voltage criterion for added security of protection performance.
c) Redundant power supply unit to ensure high protection reliability and
availability.
d) Backup over current and earth fault algorithm in the bay unit.
1.12.11.4 In the event of protection relaying being designed with a biased differential
comparator unit for both discriminating zones and check zones, the offered
equipment shall ensure the adoption of slope settings up to 0.9 for achieving
protection operation with high stability margins on external faults and the
employment of an intelligent algorithm for preventing over-stabilization of the
common check zone function under internal faults occurring under different
busbar switch conditions.
1.12.11.5 In the architecture of the busbar protection, the central unit shall receive data
from all bay units, carry out algorithmic computation and comparison of restraint
and differential currents, locate the fault position, send the trip decision to the
respective bay units operating on the faulted busbars. The host processors of the
central unit and the bay units shall run a multi-tasking kernel to provide a slice of
its processing time to a range of non protection features, in addition to protection
functions, to aid SCADA operations, system fault analysis, on-line self-
supervisions and diagnostics, data exchange via communication ports,
communication supervision, etc.
1.12.11.6 Bay units shall be designed to acquire current values in real time on each circuit
operating on the busbars. Each unit shall carry out sampling and A/D conversion
of the current waveforms of its own circuits using software programs, and sends
out the digital values in a coded bit serial data transmission to the central unit.
40
 The sampling rate should not be less than 2.0 KHz. The bay unit shall also send
our binary information regarding the operational status of the circuit and to
which section of the busbars, it is connected.
1.12.11.7 Optical fibers shall be supplied between the bay units and the central unit (two
cores per bay). All cores shall be terminated with FST connector or other
admissible interface. This communication interface shall be designed with
adequate throughout and bandwidth capacity to ensure fast exchange of data. The
technical requirements of the optical cable transmission medium supplied with
the protection equipment shall be specified in respect of type of fiber, maximum
length of cable admissible between the central unit and the BCU, optical budgets
of the communication interface designed, etc.
1.12.11.8 For maintainability, both bay and central units shall support on-line self-
supervision and diagnostic function to detect and alarm all hard ware and
software failures.
Volatile memory is required for the storage and execution of the processor
software and data storage as required during the processors calculations.
Non-volatile flash memory for the storage of software code and text programs,
battery backed-up RAM memory for the storage of disturbance, event and fault
record data and EEPROM memory for the storage of relay settings, configuration
data, calibration coefficient etc, shall be supported in the protective relaying
hardware. The bidder/contractor shall give details for the capacity provided for
each type of memory available in the relaying hardware.
1.12.11.9. LEDs shall be used for targets showing visual indication of the protection status.
1.12.11.10 Facilities shall include user interface (both front and near ports), serial
communication and diagnostic/self-supervision, connection cables etc.
Communication software for local and remote access of data from, and parameter
download into, the bay, units and/or central unit shall also be provided.
1.12.11.11 The protection shall use GPS time reference to synchronize the internal real-time
clock running in all protective relaying hardware to an accuracy of 1ms. The
internal clock shall be used for the time tagging of the event, fault record,
disturbance record. Etc. However, the busbar protection algorithms shall be able
to operate correctly independent of this time reference, but with the maintenance
of time synchronization among the hardware internal time clocks.
1.12.11.12 The bus bar protection shall be able to operate on current transformers having a
wide range of ratios. However, CT cores, dedicated for busbar protection, shall
have the same ratios and ratings, as far as is practicable. Full selectivity shall be
achieved for every busbar zone; hence the replica of every feeder isolator, bus
isolator, coupling circuit breaker and/or busbar sectionalizer shall be
incorporated.
1.12.11.13 Combinations of N/O and N/C auxiliary contacts on each isolator/breaker shall
be provided for build up of busbar replica circuits in software. The N/O contacts
shall operate and close in the closing sequence before the primary isolator
contacts reach the pre-arcing distance. The N/C contact, on the other hand,
should open only after the primary contacts travel past the pre-arcing distance.

41
1.12.11.14 The secondary circuits of the main current transformer shall not be switched via
auxiliary contacts of the busbar isolators directly. Under no circumstances during
switching over of feeder isolators, shall voltages be generated in the system in
excess of the insulation rating of the wiring used.
1.12.11.15 The CT ratio shall be adjustable in the busbar protection cubicle to achieve a
primary operating current in the range from 600 to 3000 A.
1.12.11.16 The protection trip command for each feeder shall be given directly to the
redundant circuit breaker trip coils. The tripping function shall also block the
close circuit of all the circuit breakers.
1.12.11.17 The busbar protection, on operation, shall trigger the breaker fail relay.
1.12.11.18 Provision shall be made such that any busbar trip signal shall result in a self-
holding function. The function shall be disabled from a reset command issued
locally or remotely.
1.12.11.19 Both bay and central units shall support on-line self-supervision and diagnostic
functions to detect and alarm all hardware and software failure. If an error is
detected in a busbar zone, it is preferred that this particular zone is blocked and
an alarm provided, with the retention of busbar protection on the other healthy
zones.
1.12.11.20 There shall be facilities for continuous monitoring of CT circuits, busbar isolator
auxiliary circuits and breaker auxiliary contacts. Auxiliary contacts shall be
monitored in both open and close positions.
1.12.11.21 Two sets of CTs shall be provided on either side of the bus coupler/sectionalizer,
and shall be connected in an over-lapping arrangement. The bus zones on both
sides of the breaker shall operate in the event of a fault between the circuit
breaker and CTs. This is a mandatory requirement.
1.12.11.22 Human Machine Interface (HMI) facilities shall be provided on both bay and
central units.
1.12.11.23 The DC supplies to the bay units and central unit shall be fed from the
independent station batteries in a redundant configuration.
1.12.11.24 An ON/OFF switch shall be provided on the BCU from panel to disconnect it
from the busbar protection fault measurement, if required.
1.12.11.25 The busbar protection shall be blocked by a lockable manual switch. Under this
condition, the tripping functions shall also be blocked on all feeders (to be
provided as hardwired facility) and alarmed. However, the measuring function of
the busbar protection should remain in service to facilitate signal measurement
checks in the restrain and operating circuits of the protection.
1.12.11.26 Extension of the busbar protection system shall easily be made possible. The
protection cubicles shall be completely wired for the total number of feeders
specified in the scope of works.
1.12.11.27 However, protection cubicles shall be designed to provide spare points and wired
points as specified in the contract. In spare points, the equipment is fully installed
and wired with all the modules in place but not utilized. In wired points, terminal
blocks, wiring and space are provided but hardware equipment and other slot-in
modules will not be supplied.
42
1.12.11.28 Prior to manufacturing, the bidder/contractor shall indicate the remaining
extension possibilities in the same cubicle (s) and the final quantity of provisions
that would remain as spare points or wired points for future feeders shall be
approved by NTDC.
1.12.11.29 The bus bar protection scheme shall also look into faults taking place between
CTs and circuit breakers.
1.12.11.30 The speed of operation shall be less than one cycle if the symmetrical fault
current exceeds a value twice the pick-up level. The overall time shall be less
than 0.1 sec.

1.12.12 OVER EXCITATION RELAY.

1.12.12.1 The over excitation relay shall monitor the magnitude of excitation by measuring
the relationship between the voltage and frequency (V/Hz) which shall offer
simultaneous monitoring of both voltage and frequency.
1.12.12.2 The V/Hz setting range shall be 1.0 P.U. to 1.4 P.U.
1.12.12.3 The relay shall be provided with an inverse time operating characteristic.
The inverse time characteristics of the relay shall be matched with transformer
over fluxing characteristics.
1.12.12.4 The relay shall have independently adjustable trip and alarm V/Hz setting and
time multiplier setting range. The relay shall be complemented with a definite
time stage and thermal replica.
1.12.12.5 The relay shall be of numerical /static design with minimum reset ratio nearly
98% and shall be complete with separate operation indication / LEDs for alarm
and trip, tripping relays, test switch, DC / DC converter of liberal rating suitable
for tropical climate.
1.12.12.6 The supplier / contractor shall coordinate the over fluxing withstand protection
with over fluxing withstand capability of the transformer. The over fluxing
withstand characteristic of the transformer shall be supplied by supplier /
contractor. For all transformers, the over fluxing withstand curve shall be under
pre-hot no load condition. The protection shall be designed to trip the transformer
on last resort concept basis. NTDC approval should be especially obtained for
relay range and setting calculations.
In case, rated voltage of over fluxing relays is not matching with P.T secondary
voltages, auxiliary P.Ts of adequate ratio and rating (e.g. VA, class 0.2) shall be
provided.

1.12.13 VOLTAGE PROTECTION.

1.12.13.1 Line Voltage Protection.

1.12.13.1.1 Numerical over voltage relay shall be employed for 500 KV line.

43
1.12.13.1.2 The over voltage protection shall comprise of three independent voltage relays.
Relay (59-I No) shall have inverse characteristics, where relay (59-H) shall be
definite time, high set short time (59-L) shall be definite time, low set long time.
1.12.13.1.3 The accuracy of voltage measurement element shall be better than +2% and have
LEDs / LCDs indicator in the front of the relay.
1.12.13.1.4 Each voltage relay shall be rated for 110V 50Hz and it shall operate satisfactorily
in range of 60 – 130 V.
1.12.13.1.5 The voltage setting range of these relays shall be 0.8 –1.6 UN with steps of
0.1 Volts. The relays shall have accurate operation within of 30 Hz to 80 Hz and
60 – 130 V.
1.12.13.1.6 The built-in timer setting range for definite time voltage relay shall be as under:
a. High set relay (59-2) : 1m sec. to 1 sec.
b. Low set relay (59-3) : 1 sec to 200 sec.
1.12.13.1.7 The each relay shall be connected to secondary circuit of different phases of
CCVT.
1.12.13.1.8 The relay shall have built-in self monitoring system and shall be largely in
sensitive to voltage fluctuation, harmonies and system transients.
1.12.13.1.9 The facility should include parameter above to and retrieved of internal data from
voltage relay.
1.12.13.1.10 Ports shall be provided for local and remote communication.
1.12.13.1.11 The drop off to pick-up ratio of the relays shall be in range of 95 – 98%.
1.12.13.1.12 The relays shall have the following function:
i). Event record.
ii). Fault record.
iii). Disturbance record.
iv). Circuit breaker monitoring.
v). Frequency disturbance recorder.

1.12.13.2. Transformer over voltage protection.

1.12.13.2.1 The numerical phase – phase over voltage relay shall have same characteristics
as described above in Clause 1.12.13.1.

1.12.14 GROUND FAULT RELAY.

1.12.14.1 Ground fault relay shall also be provided in the neutral of the auto transformer as
non directional back-up protection.
1.12.14.2 All the features shall be in conformity with Clause 1.12.8.

44
1.12.15 OVERALL/ROUGH BALANCE PROTECTION.
1.12.15.1 Overall/Rough Balance Protection shall be numerical biased percentage
differential protection.
1.12.15.2 Electrical protection include, but not limited:-
(i) Differential Protection.
(ii) Two stage definite overload protection.
(iii) Over fluxing protection.
1.12.15.3 All the features shall be in line with Clause 1.12.6.

1.12.16 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY.

1.12.16.1 A two stage thermal overload protection shall be provided for the auto-
transformer.
1.12.16.2 The thermal overload relay shall be based on thermal model developed from
thermal replica. The thermal model shall be adaptable to the transformer thermal
characteristics to the maximum possible extent
1.12.16.3 Each stage shall be provided with a time and thermal time constant having
adjustable range of 0 to 30 minutes.
1.12.16.4 The relay shall have independently adjustable trip, alarm and thermal time
constant settings.
1.12.16.5 The relay shall be complemented with definite stage and thermal replica.

1.12.17 TERTIARY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION RELAY.

1.12.17.1 Two stage Earth fault over current protection shall have three elements for the
tertiary winding of auto transformer.
1.12.17.2 The relay shall have following selectable multiple current time characteristics as
per BS-142 and IEC 60255:-
(i) Definite time.
(ii) Very inverse.
(iii) Extremely inverse.
(iv) Normal inverse.
(v) Long Inverse.
(The curves shall be such as to give tripping after three seconds for ten times the
current setting when a time multiplier setting of 100% is applied).
1.12.17.3 The earth fault element shall have at least current range from 5% to 80% of rated
CT secondary current in step of 5%.
1.12.17.4 Time setting range for earth fault element shall be adjustable over a range of at
least 0.05 to 1.0 times in steps not exceeding 0.025 times.
1.12.17.5 The high current shall be at least 1 to 30IN and blocked in steps of 0.5 IN or less.
The tripping time for high current operation shall be maximum 20 ms.
45
1.12.17.6 The relay shall have separate trip and alarm contacts and separate trip & alarm
indicators.
1.12.17.7 Setting, monitoring and post fault analysis directly or the relay further by a
portable computer through a due interface.

1.12.18 AUTO TRANSFORMER HV AND LV CONNECTION PROTECTION.

1.12.18.1 The relay shall be high impedance circulating current type and shall be capable
of detecting three phase, phase to phase and phase to earth fault under all system
plant condition.
1.12.18.2 The operating time of the measuring relay shall be 20 ms.
1.12.18.3 The relay shall voltage setting range of 5-100 volts OR it shall have an operating
range of 20-80% of rated secondary current.
1.12.18.4 Stability resistors shall be provided together with non linear resistors to prevent
dangerously high voltages develop.

1.12.19 BUS COUPLER / BUS SECTIONALIZER OVER CURRENT AND EARTH

FAULT PROTECTION.
1.12.19.1 A three phase over current and earth fault numerical protection to detect multi-
phase and phase to ground shall be provided.
1.12.19.2 Each of the protection elements shall have separate and alarm contacts and a
separate trip indicator.
1.12.19.3 Over current and earth fault protection relays for bus coupler shall be provided
on a dedicated cubicle.
1.12.19.4 All the features shall be in line with Clause 1.12.8.

1.12.20 LOCKOUT RELAYS.

1.12.20.1 Lockout relays, shall be electromechanical, drawout, high burden, hand and
electrically reset, hand reset mechanical flag, high speed and of multi-contact
construction complying with E.A (ESI) standard 48-4, Class EB2.
The relay coil shall be designed for continuous operation of 220 V DC with
tolerance of +20% and -15%. The high burden relays shall be immune to AC and
capacitance discharge current.
1.12.20.2 Lockout relays shall have at least five (5) years field proven experience. The
contact arrangement shall consist of 8 NO and 2 NC or 18 NO & 8 NC contacts
as per scheme requirement. Number of relays shall commensurate with the
requirement of the protection scheme. The contact rating shall not be less than
the following:

46
 Contract Make and Carry Make and Carry for
Break.
Rating. Continuously. 3-Seconds.
1250 VA with 7500 VA with maxima 1250 VA with
AC maximum of 15A of 30 A and 660 V maxima of 5A and
660 V 660 V.
1250 W with 7500 W with maxima 100 W resistive 50
maxima of 15A and of 30 A and 660 V W inductive with
DC
660 V. maxima of 5A and
660 V.
1.12.20.3 The relays shall be suitable for flush mounting on the front of the cubicle with
connections made at the rear of the case.
1.12.20.4 Tripping relay contacts shall be suitably rated to satisfactorily perform their
required duty and relay operating time shall not exceed 10 ms from initiation of
trip relay operating coil to contact close.
1.12.20.5 Resetting of the indicator and the contact shall be possible without having to
open the relay case.
1.12.20.6 The operation and reset coils of electrically resettable trip relays shall have
internal cut-off contacts.
1.12.19.7 Hand reset type relays are required for busbar protection and auto-transformer
protection and breaker failure protection.
1.12.20.8 Electrical resettable relays for other equipment such as transmission lines are
required.
1.12.20.9 The contactor/supplier shall submit test evidences of mechanical durability
performance of the offered relays for both loaded contacts and un-loaded
contacts.
1.12.20.10 The mechanical durability shall be 10,000 operation (minimum) with loaded
contact.
1.12.20.11 Standard lockout relay shall be AREVA make, type MVAJ25 / MVAJ205 /
MVAJ105 or approved equivalent.
1.12.20.12 In addition to tripping requirements, lockout relays / auxiliary relays shall have
adequate number of contacts for annunciation, sequence of events, SCADA, fault
recorder, trigger / monitoring of breaker failure initiation and block closing of
relevant breakers and all other functions requirements.

1.12.21 HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAYS:

1.12.21.1 Tripping relays shall be electromechanical, drawout, high burden, self reset, hand
reset flag, high speed, flush mounted and of multi-contact construction with
indication target to be reset manually.
1.12.21.2 The relay coil shall be designed for continuous operation of 220 V DC with
tolerance of +20% and -15%. The operating time shall not be greater than 10 ms
at rated voltage. The high burden relays shall be immune to AC and capacitance
discharge current.

47
1.12.21.3 Tripping relays shall have at least five (5) years field proven experience. The
contact arrangement shall consist of 8 NO and 2 NC contacts OR 18 NO and
2 NC contacts. Numbers of relays shall commensurate with the requirement of
the protection scheme. The contact rating shall not be less than the following.

Contract Make and Carry Make and Carry for

Break.
Rating. Continuously. 3-Seconds.
AC 1250 VA with 7500 VA with maxima 1250 VA with
maximum of 15A of 30 A and 660 V maxima of 5A and
660 V 660 V.
DC 1250 W with 7500 W with maxima 100 W resistive 50
maxima of 15A and of 30 A and 660 V W inductive with
660 V. maxima of 5A and
660 V.
1.12.21.4 The relays shall be suitable for flush mounting on the front of the cubicle with
connections made at the rear of the case.
1.12.21.5 The contactor/supplier shall submit test evidences of mechanical durability
performance of the offered relays for both loaded contacts and un-loaded
contacts.
1.12.21.6 The mechanical durability shall be 10,000 operation (minimum) with loaded
contact.
1.12.21.7 Standard tripping relay shall be AREVA make, type MVAJ21 / MVAJ205 or
approved equivalent.
1.12.21.8 The CB fail inter trip direct transfer trip receive relay, and the CB fail inter trip
direct transfer trip transmit relay, shall be self-reset type, with manually reset
targets, high burden, high speed tripping relays of multi-contact construction
suitable for flush or mounting..
1.12.21.9 The tripping relay shall have not operating time in excess of 10 milliseconds of
rated voltage.
1.12.21.10 In addition to tripping requirements, tripping relays / auxiliary relays shall have
adequate number of contacts for annunciations, sequence of events, SCADA,
fault recorder trigger / mounting of breaker failure initiation and block closing of
relevant breakers and all other functions requirements.

1.12.22 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY.

1.12.22.1 The relay shall be electromechanical, flush mounted, dust proof, drawout type,
hand reset flag with indication target to be reset manually.
1.12.22.2 The trip circuit supervision scheme shall provide continuous supervision of the
trip circuits of the circuit breaker both in the open or closed position and
independent of local or remote selection at the local operating position.
The supervision relay shall include D.C. supply voltage, trip coils, all
interconnected cables, auxiliary contacts for trip coils, trip circuit panel and
inter-panel loopings etc.
48
1.12.22.3 The relay shall also initiate an alarm if the trip supply or auxiliary supply voltage
fails. The relay shall have sufficient contacts for visual/audible alarm and
indication purposes.
1.12.22.4 The relay shall have time delay (200 msec) on drop off to prevent spurious
alarms.
1.12.22.5 The relay alarm element shall be equipped with hand resetting mechanical flag
indicator or approved equivalent.
1.12.22.6 The built-in trip circuit supervision function of a main relay is not considered to
provide adequate supervision functionality at that of dedicated and hence not
acceptable.
1.12.22.7 The relay shall also be provided to supervise wiring in trip relay circuit when
wiring is run outside the panel.
1.12.22.7 The relay contacts shall be multiplied for providing alarm, sequence of events,
scada etc.

1.12.23 D.C. CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY.

1.12.23.1 The relay shall be electromechanical, flush mounted, dust proof, drawout type
and hand reset mechanical flag with indication target to be reset manually.
1.12.23.2 The relay shall be of short circuit proof design.
1.12.23.3 The relay shall have a time delayed drop off 200 ms (minimum) and shall be
provided with hand resetting mechanical flag indicators or approved.
1.12.23.4 Supervision relays are required for each protection supply in each panel.
1.12.23.5 The relay shall also initiate an alarm of aux. voltage supply fails.
1.12.23.6 The relay shall have sufficient contacts for SOE, Scada and Annunciation.

1.12.24 AUXILIARY RELAYS.

1.12.24.1 Auxiliary relays shall be of rugged construction and shall have a high degree of
reliability even when they have been idle for long periods of time. All auxiliary
relay coils and contacts shall be suitable for continuous operation at 220 V DC
for 220 KV system with a tolerance of + 20% and -15 %. The relay coils shall be
so designed that their consumption is kept to a minimum and yet sufficient
contact pressure is ensured when the relay operates to make contacts. The
continuous current carrying rating of the contacts and make rating shall not be
less than 5A at 220 V DC for 500 KV and 220 KV shall have a good margin on
contacts break ratings of resistive and inductive loads involved.
1.12.244.2 Auxiliary relays shall be of instantaneous type or time delayed as required. The
time delay provided in the relays shall not be affected by changing temperature
or humidity. Auxiliary and contact multiplier relays in the tripping circuits shall
be of high speed type and equivalent or better than class-I relays as defined in
IEC-60255.
1.12.24.3 Manual reset auxiliary relays shall be high speed, multi-contact type with
operation indicator.
49
1.12.24.4 Self-reset auxiliary relays shall be for rear of panel mounting, front-connected
type.
1.12.24.5 Auxiliary tripping relays shall be self-reset, front-connected type suitable for
rear-of-panel mounting.
1.12.24.6 Operating Time Of Auxiliary Relays For SOE / TFR etc.
In all applications that require high-speed performance for SOE.TFR (e.g. inter
trip signal receive) and various applications which require input to SOE and
fault-recorder etc.) Various auxiliary relays (if used) shall have its operating time
of typical 1 msec, at rated voltage. The number of contacts shall be provided as
required to meet specification requirements.
In all other general type applications, the operative speed of auxiliary relays shall
be within 4 to 10 msec depending on application. In case it is more than above
value, special approval from the NTDC shall be taken. Signals send/receive
functions for protection shall be performed directly without using any
multiplication through aux devices.

1.12.25 COILS.
1.12.25.1 The current coils of the relays shall withstand the thermal and mechanical
stresses at least 35 times the continuous current rating of the coil for one half
second or 20 times the continuous rating of the coil for 3 seconds without
damage to coil or associated mechanical or electronic components. The
continuous rating shall be twice the rated current, with the specified temperature
rise.
1.12.25.2 Voltage coils shall withstand thermal stress due to continuous energization at
voltage 25% in access of the rated voltage at all settings of the relays.

1.13 EQUIPMENT DETAILS FOR 500 KV SYSTEM.

1.13.1 The tentative quantity of equipment for relay panels are elucidated below:-
500 KV System
Relay Panel Type R11.
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Distance Relay Set-I as specified in Clause 1.12.1. One No.
2. Auto-reclosure with Built-in synchro-check relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.3
3. Over voltage relay as specified in Clause 1.12.13. One No.
4. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset Three Nos.
tripping relay Having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.21.
5. D.C. Supervision Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.

50
 6. Test block. Min five Nos. or as
per approved
scheme.
7. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
the „Out‟ position for local and remote indication.
Key with-drawable in „IN‟ position.
8. Indicating lamp, red colour indicating absence of DC One No.
supply.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
and according to
approved drawings.
10. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
11. Auxiliary relays as specified in clause 1.12.24.
All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs, approved
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, diagrams.
power sockets, to complete the scheme.

1.13.2 Relay Panel Type R12.

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Distance Relay Set-II as specified in Clause 1.12.2. One No.
2. Auto-reclosure with Built-in synchro-check relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.3.
3. Three phase and one earth fault element non-directional One No.
over current and earth fault relay as specified in
Clause 1.12.8.
4. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset Four Nos.
tripping relays having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.21. Quantity to suit
the tripping schemes can be increased.
5. D.C. Supervision Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
6. Test block. Min 6 Nos. or as
approved
scheme.
7. Main IN / OUT lockable selector switch with contact in Two No.
the „OUT‟ position for local and remote indication key
withdrawable in „IN‟ position
8. Indicating lamp, red colour indicating absence of DC One No.
supply.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit the
scheme

51
 10. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
11. Auxiliary relays as specified in clause 1.12.24.
12. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs, approved
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks. Internal light diagrams.
locks, power sockets etc. to complete the scheme.

1.13.3 Relay Panel Type R13.

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Percentage biased transformer differential relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.6.

2. High REF impedance circulating current differential One No.

protection as specified Clause 1.12.7.
3. HV side numerical over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
4. LV side numerical over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
5. Over excitation relay as specified in Clause 1.12.12. One No.
6. Thermal over load relay as specified in Clause 1.12.16. One No.
7. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Two Nos. OR
electrical reset lock out relay having (18NO + 2NC) Four Nos. per each
contacts OR (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag main electrical and
as specified in Clause 1.12.20 for transformer buchhloz guard protection
as per approved
trip, H.V winding temperature trip, LV winding trip and
scheme.
oil temperature trip and for main electrical protection
from Sr. No. 1 to 6 above.
8. Multi contact high speed, high burden, self reset tripping Two Nos.
relay having (8NO + NC) contacts with hand reset flag
as specified in Clause 1.12.21 for direct inter trip circuit.
9. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
10. Indicating lamp indicating in absence of D.C supply. One No.
11. Test block. Min. Six Nos. or
as approved
scheme.
12. Main IN/OUT lockable switch with contact in „OUT‟ One No.
position for local and remote indication.
13. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
14. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme

52
 15. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. According to
approved
Self / Electrical reset auxiliary relays with flags for the
diagrams.
following :-
1. Transformer – Buchhloz Trip.
2. Transformer – Buchhloz alarm.
3. Transformer – HV winding temp. trip.
4. Transformer – HV winding temp. alarm.
5. Transformer – LV winding temp. trip.
6. Transformer – LV winding alarm.
7. Oil Temp Trip.
8. Oil Temp alarm.
9. Electrical Protection Relays.
16. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs, approved
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks. Internal light diagrams.
locks, power sockets etc, to complete the scheme.

1.13.4 Relay Panel Type R14

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Overall Percentage biased Differentia relay as specified One No.
in Clause 1.12.6.
2. HV connection circulating protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.18.
3. LV connection circulating protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.18.
4. Tertiary over current protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.17.
5. Transformer neutral ground protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.14.
6. Rough balance protection as specified in Clause 1.12.15. One No.
7. Over voltage protection as specified in Clause 1.12.13. One No.
8. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Two Nos. OR
electrical reset lockout relay having (18NO + 2NC) OR Four Nos. per each
having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag as main electrical and
specified in Clause 1.12.20 for tap changer buchhloz trip, guard protection.
pressure relief valve trip and each electrical protection
from Sr.1 to 7 above.
9. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.

53
 10. Test Block. Min 7 Nos. or as
per approved
scheme.
11. Main IN/OUT lockable switch with contact in „OUT Quantity as
position for local and remote indication. required to suit
the scheme.
12. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
13. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. Seven Nos.
14. Indicating lamp RED & BLUE colour indicates in One No.
absence of D.C supply.
15. Auxiliary Relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24:- According to
1. Tap changer buchhloz trip. approved
drawings.
2. Tap changer buchhloz alarm.
3. Transformer – Low oil level alarm.
4. Tap Changer – Low oil level alarm.
5. Transformer – Pressure relief alarm.
6. Transformer – Pressure relief trip.
7. Tap changer – Pressure relief alarm.
8. Tap changer – Pressure relief trip.
9. Electrical Protection Relays.
16. Interposing CTs. (Multiple Windings). As per approved
scheme.
17. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, heater, humidity sensor, and approved
locks. Internal light, power sockets etc. to complete the drawings.
scheme.

1.13.5 Relay Panel Type R15 (For One & Half Breaker Scheme).
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Breaker failure relay with two stage timers as specified Three Nos. for
in Clause 1.12.9. 500 KV circuit
breaker.
2. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Three Nos. OR
electrical reset lockout tripping relay having contacts Six Nos. for each
(18NO + 2NC) OR (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand bus bar breaker
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.20. failure protection.
3. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Two OR Four Nos.
electrical lockout tripping relay having contacts for mid breaker B.F.
(18NO + 2NC) OR (8NO + 2NC) with hand reset flag as
specified in Clause 1.12.20.

54
 4. Electrical Reset Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.21. One No.
5. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
6. Test block. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
7. Main IN/OUT lockable selection switch with contact in
„OUT‟ position for local and remote indication. Key One No.
withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
8. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
9. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
10. Indicating lamp, red colour. One No.
11. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
12. All other necessary trip switches, auxiliary relays, fuses, According to
links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable approved
glands, lugs, ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks, diagram.
internal light, power socket, to complete the scheme.

1.13.6 Relay Panel Type R16 (For One & Half Breaker Scheme).
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole as specified . 18 Nos. for 500 KV
in Clause 1.12.22. circuit breakers.

2. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required

to suit the scheme.
3. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. Two Nos.
4. Indicating lamp, red colour. Two Nos.
5. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, ferrules, humidity sensor, locks. Internal approved
light, power sockets, to complete the scheme. diagram.

1.13.7 Relay Panel Type R17

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. High impedance bus differential as per specification
Clause 1.12.10.
OR
Optional low impedance bus differential relay as per
specification Clause 1.12.11.
(a) for 500 KV bus bar No.1 One No.
(b) for 500 KV bus bar No.2 One No.

55
 2. Bus wire protection relay:
(a) for 500 KV bus bar No.1 One No.
(b) for 500 KV bus bar No.2 One No.
3. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and
electrical reset tripping relay contacts (18NO + 2NC)
OR (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag specified
in Clause 1.12.20.
(a) for 500 KV bus bar No.1 Three Nos.
OR Six Nos.

(b) for 500 KV bus bar No.2 Three Nos.

OR Six Nos.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23.
(a) for 500 KV bus bar No.1 One No.
(b) for 500 KV bus bar No.2 One No.
5. Test block. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
6. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in Two Nos.
OUT position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
7. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
8. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. Two Nos.
9. Indicating lamp, red colour, Two Nos.
10. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
11. All other necessary trip switches, auxiliary relays, fuses, According to
links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable approved diagram.
glands, lugs, ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks,
internal light, power socket, to complete the scheme.

1.13.8 Relay Panel Type R18

Sr. No Description. Quantity.
1. Numerical 3-Phse over current and one earth fault relay One No.
as specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker as specified in Clause 1.12.22.
3. Breaker failure relay as specified in Clause 1.12.9. One No.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.

56
 5. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and Quantity
electrical reset lockout tripping relay having required as suit
the scheme.
(8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag contacts as
specified in Clause 1.12.21.
6. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset Two Nos.
tripping relay with hand reset flag having
(8 N/O + 2 N/C) contacts as specified in Clause 1.12.20.
7. Test block. One No.
8. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
10. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
11. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
12. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.23. Quantity required as
suit the scheme.
13. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.13.9 Relay Panel Type R19

Sr.No. Description. Quantity.
1. Numerical 3-Phse over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker.
3. Breaker failure relay as specified in Clause 1.12.9. One No.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.

5. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and Quantity

electrical reset tripping relay with hand reset flag contacts required as suit
as specified in Clause 1.12.20 the scheme.
6. Multiple contact high speed, self reset tripping relay with Quantity
hand reset flag contacts as specified in Clause 1.12.21. required as suit
the scheme.
7. Test block. One No.

57
 8. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
10. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
11. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
12. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.23. Quantity required as
suit the scheme.
13. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.13.10 Relay Panel Type R20.

Sr.No. Description.
1. Percentage biased differential relay as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.6.
2. Restricted Earth fault relay as specified in Clause 1.12.7. One No.
3. Over current and earth fault relay as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.8
4. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker.
5. Breaker failure relay as specified in Clause 1.12.9. One No.
6. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
7. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and Quantity
electrical reset lockout tripping relay having (8NO+2NC) required as suit
contacts with hand reset flag contacts as specified in the scheme.
Clause 1.12.20.
8. Test block. Three Nos.
9. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key with drawable in „IN‟ position.
10. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
11. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
12. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
13. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity required as
suit the scheme.

58
 14. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.14 EQUIPMENT DETAILS FOR 220 KV SYSTEM.

1.14.1 The tentative quantity of equipment for relay panels are elucidated below:-
220 KV System
Relay Panel Type R1.
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Distance Relay Set-I as specified in Clause 1.12.1. One No.
2. Auto-reclosure with Built-in synchro-check relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.3
Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset Three Nos.
3.
tripping relay having (8NO+2NC) contacts with hand
reset flag as specified in
Clause 1.12.21.
4. D.C. Supervision Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
5. Test block. Min Five Nos. or as
per approved scheme
6. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
the „Out‟ position for local and remote indication.
Key with-drawable in „IN‟ position.
7. Indicating lamp, red colour indicating absence of DC One No.
supply.
8. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
and according to
approved drawings.
9. Auxiliary relays as specified in clause 1.12.23. According to
approved
diagrams.
10. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals,
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs,
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light,
power sockets, to complete the scheme.
1.14.2 Relay Panel Type R2.
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Distance Relay Set-II as specified in Clause 1.12.2. One No.
2. Auto-reclosure with Built-in synchro-check relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.3.
59
 3. Three phase and one earth fault element non-directional One No.
over current and earth fault relay as specified in
Clause 1.12.8.
4. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset Four Nos.
tripping relay having (8NO+2NC) with hand reset flag as
specified in Clause 1.12.21.
Quantity to suit the tripping schemes can be increased.
5. D.C. Supervision Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
6. Test block. Min 6 Nos. OR
as per approved
scheme.
7. Main IN / OUT lockable selector switch with contact in Two Nos.
the „OUT‟ position for local and remote indication key
withdrawable in „IN‟ position
8. Indicating lamp, red colour indicating absence of DC One No.
supply.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit the
scheme
10. Auxiliary relays as specified in clause 1.12.24. According to
approved
diagrams.
11. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals,
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs,
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks. Internal light
locks, power sockets etc. to complete the scheme.

1.14.3 Relay Panel Type R3.

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Percentage biased transformer differential relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.6.
2. High REF impedance circulating current differential One No.
protection as specified Clause 1.12.7.
3. HV side numerical over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
4. LV side numerical over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
5. Over excitation relay as specified in Clause 1.12.12. One No.
6. Thermal over load relay as specified in Clause 1.12.16. One No.

60
 7. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Three Nos. per
electrical reset lock out relay having (8NO + 2NC) each main
contacts with hand reset flag as specified in electrical and
Clause 1.12.20 for transformer buchhloz trip, H.V guard protection
winding temperature trip, LV winding trip and oil
temperature trip.
8. Multi contacts, high speed, high burden, self reset Two Nos.
tripping relay having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.21 for direct inter
trip circuit.
9. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
10. Indicating lamp indicating in absence of D.C supply. One No.
11. Test block. Six Nos.
12. Main IN/OUT lockable switch with contact in „OUT‟ One No.
position for local and remote indication. Key
withdrawable in “IN” position.
13. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
14. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
15. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. According to
approved
Self / Electrical reset auxiliary relays with flags for the
diagrams.
following :-
i. Transformer – Buchhloz Trip.
ii Transformer – Buchhloz alarm.
iii Transformer – HV winding temp. trip.
iv Transformer – HV winding temp. alarm.
v Transformer – LV winding temp. trip.
vi Transformer – LV winding alarm.
vii Oil Temp Trip.
viii Oil Temp alarm.
ix Electrical Protection Relays.
16. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, lugs, approved
ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks. Internal light diagrams.
locks, power sockets etc, to complete the scheme.

1.14.4 Relay Panel Type R4

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Overall Percentage biased Differentia relay as specified One No.
in Clause 1.12.6.
61
2. HV connection circulating protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.18.
3. LV connection circulating protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.18.
4. Tertiary over current protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.17.
5. Transformer neutral ground protection as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.14.
6. Rough Balance Protection as specified in Clause 1.12.15. One No.
7. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Three Nos. per
electrical reset lockout relay having (8NO + 2NC) each main
contacts with hand reset flag as specified in Clause electrical and
1.12.19 for tap changer buchhloz trip, pressure relief guard protection
valve trip.
8. Interposing C.T (Multiple Windings). As per approved
scheme.
9. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.24. One No.
10. Test Block. Six Nos. or as per
approved scheme.
11. Main IN/OUT lockable switch with contact in „OUT Quantity as
position for local and remote indication. Key required to suit
the scheme.
withdrawable in “IN” position.
12. Protection reset push button. One No.
13. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. Quantity as per
approved scheme.
14. Indicating lamp RED & BLUE colour indicates in One No..
absence of D.C supply.
15. Auxiliary Relays as specified in Clause 1.12.23:- According to
i. Tap changer buchhloz trip. approved
drawings.
ii Tap changer buchhloz alarm.
iii Transformer – Low oil level alarm.
iv Transformer – Low oil level alarm (Tap changer).
v Transformer – Pressure relief alarm
vi Transformer – Pressure relief trip.
vii Pressure relief alarm (Tap changer).
viii Transformer – Pressure relief trip (Tap changer).
ix Electrical Protection relays.
16. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, heater, humidity sensor, approved
locks. Internal light, power sockets etc. to complete the drawings.
scheme.
62
1.14.5 Relay Panel Type R5 (For One & Half Breaker Scheme).
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Breaker failure relay with two stage timers as specified i). Three Nos. for
in Clause 1.12.9. 500 KV circuit
breaker.
ii) One No. for
132 KV T/F C.B.
2. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Three Nos. OR
electrical reset lockout relay contacts (18NO + 2NC) OR Six Nos. for each
(8NO + 2NC) with hand reset flag as specified in bus bar breaker.
Clause 1.12.20.
3. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, hand and Two Nos. OR
electrical reset lockout relay contacts (18NO + 2NC) OR Four Nos. for
(8NO + 2NC) with hand reset flag as specified in mid breaker.
Clause 1.12.20.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
5. Test block. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
6. Main IN/OUT lockable selection switch with contact in One No.
„OUT‟ position for local and remote indication. Key
withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
7. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
8. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
9. Indicating lamp, red colour. One No.
10. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
11. All other necessary trip switches, auxiliary relays, fuses, According to
links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable approved
glands, lugs, ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks, diagram.
internal light, power socket, to complete the scheme.

1.14.6 Relay Panel Type R6 (For One & Half Breaker Scheme).
Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole as specified . i) 18 Nos. for
in Clause 1.12.22. 220KV circuit
breakers.
ii) Two Nos. for
132KV circuit
breaker
2. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
3. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. Two Nos.

63
 4. Indicating lamp, red colour. Two Nos.
5. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, ferrules, humidity sensor, locks. Internal approved
light, power sockets, to complete the scheme. diagram.

1.14.7 Relay Panel Type R7

Sr. No. Description. Quantity.
1. High impedance bus differential as per specification
Clause 1.12.10.
OR
Optional low impedance bus differential relay as per
specification Clause 1.12.11.
(c) for 220 KV bus bar No.1 One No.
(d) for 220 KV bus bar No.2 One No.
2. Bus wire protection relay:
(c) for 220 KV bus bar No.1 One No.
(d) for 220 KV bus bar No.2 One No.
3. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and
electrical reset tripping relay contacts (18NO + 2NC) OR
(8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag specified in
Clause 1.12.20.
(c) for 220 KV bus bar No.1 Three Nos.
OR Six Nos.

(d) for 220 KV bus bar No.2 Three Nos.

OR Six Nos.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23.
(c) for 220 KV bus bar No.1 One
(d) for 220 KV bus bar No.2 One
5. Test block. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
6. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in Two Nos.
OUT position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
7. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
8. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. Two Nos.
9. Indicating lamp, red colour, Two Nos.
10. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.

64
 11. All other necessary trip switches, auxiliary relays, fuses, According to
links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable approved diagram.
glands, lugs, ferrules, heater, humidity sensor, locks,
internal light, power socket, to complete the scheme.

1.14.8 Relay Panel Type R8

Sr. No Description. Quantity.
1. Numerical 3-Phse over current and one earth fault relay One No.
as specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker as specified in Clause 1.12.22.
3. Breaker failure relay as specified in Clause 1.12.9. One No.
4. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
5. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and Quantity
electrical reset tripping relay with hand reset flag required as suit
the scheme.
contacts as specified in Clause 1.12.21.
6. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self reset One No.
tripping relay with hand reset flag having (8 N/O + 2
N/C) contacts as specified in Clause 1.12.20.
7. Test block. One No.
8. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
9. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
10. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
11. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
12. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity required as
suit the scheme.
13. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, According to
test points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.14.9 Relay Panel Type R9

Sr.No. Description. Quantity.
1. Numerical 3-Phase over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker.
65
 3. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
4. Multiple contact high speed, high burden, self and One No.
electrical reset tripping relay having (8NO + 2NC)
contacts with hand reset flag contacts as specified in
Clause 1.12.21.
5. Test block. One No.
6. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key withdrawable in „IN‟ position.
7. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme.
8. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
9. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
10. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity required as
suit the scheme.
11. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.14.10 Relay Panel Type R10

Sr.No. Description.
1. Percentage Biased differential relay as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.6.
2. Restricted Earth fault relay as specified in Clause 1.12.7. One No.
3. Over current and earth fault relay as specified in One No.
Clause 1.12.8
4. Trip circuit supervision relay for each pole of circuit Six Nos.
breaker.
5. Breaker failure relay as specified in Clause 1.12.9. One No.
6. DC supervision relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. One No.
7. Multiple contact, high speed, high burden, hand and Quantity
electrical reset tripping relay with hand reset flag contacts required as suit
as specified in Clause 1.12.20. the scheme.
8. Test block. Three Nos.
9. Main IN/OUT lockable selector switch with contact in One No.
“OUT” position for lock and remote indication.
Key with drawable in „IN‟ position.

66
 10. Protection reset push button. Quantity as
required to suit
the scheme.
11. Reset push button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
12. Indicating lamp, red colour, One No.
13. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. Quantity
required as suit
the scheme.
14. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.
1.15 EQUIPMENT DETAILS FOR 132 KV SYSTEM.

1.15.1 The tentative quantity of equipment for relay panels are elucidated below:-
132KV System
Relay Panel Type RP1 for Bus Coupler.
Sr.No Description. Quantity.
1. Three phase over current and on earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. D.C Trip Circuit Supervision Relay as specified in Clause Two Nos.
1.12.22.
3. Multiple contacts, high speed, high burden, self reset One No.
tripping relay having (8NO + 2NC) contacts as specified
in Clause 1.12.21.
4. Auxiliary relay as specified in Clause 1.12.24. As per
application.
5. Test Block. One No.
6. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
according to
approved drawings.
7. Reset bush button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
8. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

67
1.15.2 Relay Panel Type RP2 for Sectionalizer.
1. Three phase over current and on earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
2. D.C Trip Circuit Supervision Relay as specified in Clause Two Nos.
1.12.22.
3. Multiple contacts, high speed, high burden, self reset One No.
having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand reset flag as
specified in Clause 1.12.21.
4. Auxiliary relay as specified in Clause 1.12.24. As per application.

5. Test Block. One No.

6. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
according to
approved drawings.
7. Reset bush button for electrically reset trip relay. One No
8. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.15.3 Relay Panel Type RP3.

1. Distance Protection Relay with built-in auto-reclosure One No.
and synchro-check relay as specified in Clause 1.12.1.
2. Three Phase over current and earth fault relay as One No.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
3. D.C Trip Circuit Supervision Relay as specified in Clause Two
1.12.22.
4. Multiple contacts, high speed, high burden, self reset One No.
tripping relays having (8NO + 2NC) contacts with hand
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.21.
5. Auxiliary relay as specified in Clause 1.12.24. As per
application.
6. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required
to suit the scheme
according to
approved drawings.
7. Reset bush button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
8. Test block. Two Nos.
9. D.C miniature circuit breaker with change over facilities. Two Nos.

68
 10. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.15.4 Relay Panel Type RP4.

1. Differential Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.6. One No.
2. Three phase over current and earth fault relay as specified One No.
in Clause 1.12.8.
3. D.C Trip Circuit Supervision Relay as specified in Two Nos.
Clause 1.12.22.
4. Multiple contacts, high speed, high burden, hand and Seven Nos.
electrical reset lockout relay having (8NO + 2NC)
contacts with hand reset flag as specified in
Clause 1.12.21.
5. Auxiliary relay as specified in Clause 1.12.23. As per application.

6. Protection reset push button. Quantity as required

to suit the scheme
according to
approved drawings.
7. Reset bush button for electrically reset trip relay. One No.
8. Test Block. Two Nos.
9. D.C miniature circuit breaker with change over facilities. Two Nos.
10. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power diagram.
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.15.5 Relay Panel Type RP5.

1. Differential Relay as specified in Clause 1.12.6. One No.
2. Three Phase over current and earth fault relay as Two Nos.
specified in Clause 1.12.8.
3. D.C Trip Circuit Supervision Relay as specified in Four Nos.
Clause 1.12.22.
4. Multiple contact (8 NO + 2 NC), high speed, high Eight Nos.
burden, hand and electrical reset lockout relay with hand
reset flag as specified in Clause 1.12.21.
5. Auxiliary relays as specified in Clause 1.12.24. As per application.

6. Test block. Three Nos.

7. D.C miniature circuit breaker with change over facilities. Two Nos.

69
 8. All other trip switches, MCBs, fuses, links, terminals, test According to
points, wiring, earthing, cable stands, lugs, ferrules, approved diagram.
heater, humidity sensor, locks, internal light, power
socket, to complete the scheme.

1.16 TESTING AND INSPECTION.

1.16.1 GENERAL.
1.16.1.1 All relays (including panels) shall be tested in the Manufacturer‟s work. The
bidder/contractor may be required to carry out any one or all of the tests stated in
this Specification in the presence of Representatives of NTDC.
1.16.1.2 Testing of relays and their components shall be performed in line with this
specification, and in accordance with the relevant IEC standards (as minimum
requirement) and other standards as may be approved by NTDC.
1.16.1.3 Acceptance by NTDC representative of any relay tests shall not relieve the
manufacturer from any of his performance guarantees or from any other obligations.
1.16.1.4 NTDC reserves the right to perform checks during the manufacturing process at any
time or all the times. It shall be at the discretion of NTDC to witness tests on 100%,
or any percentage of each lot for routine tests, apart from the type tests, wherever
called for.
1.16.1.5 Tests of relays shall comprise factory tests and site tests.

1.17 FACTORY TESTS.

1.17.1 Type Tests.

1.17.1.1 Evidence shall be given that the proposed relays to be supplied under contract works
had already been subjected to all type tests (including transient and steady-state
tests) at an internationally recognized testing laboratory, like KEMA or equivalent.
If deemed necessary, NTDC will decide whether additional tests are to be performed
by the Bidder/Contractor.
1.17.1.2 An internationally recognized laboratory shall certify the type test reports.
1.17.1.3 The Bidder/Contractor shall submit certified copies of type test certificates and
reports covering the proposed relays components.
1.17.1.4 Type tests certificates and reports shall be considered acceptable if they are in
compliance with the relevant standards and the following:
(a) Type tests conducted at an internationally recognized laboratory acceptable
to NTDC.
(b) Type tests and dynamic stability test on Real Time digital simulator (RTDS)
conducted at the manufacturer‟s laboratory and witnessed by representatives
of NTDC.

70
 If the presented type test reports are not in accordance with the above requirements,
NTDC may decide to ask for the type tests and Dynamic stability test to be carried
out afresh in the manufacturer‟s premises or other places subject to the approval of
NTDC and at no additional cost. These tests shall be performed in the presence of an
NTDC engineer at laboratory, which should issue the relevant type test certificates
upon successful completion of all tests.
1.17.1.5 Transient tests shall be included simulating dc off-sets and harmonics, in order to
verify the dynamic behavior, including the circuit breaker trip time, communication
channel time and the effectiveness of the settings adopted.

1.17.2 Routine Tests.

1.17.2.1 Protection relays and their components shall be subjected to routine tests as per the
relevant IEC standards. Protection relays mounted in cubicles shall be completely
wired, tested and inspected at the relay manufacturer‟s factory.
1.17.2.2 Factory tests shall cover a subset of the following:
1.17.2.3 Secondary injection, scheme checks, relay logic, performance of engineer interface,
functional-trip tests, setting ranges and calibration accuracy, response (trip) times,
functional availability and application limits, system supervision, performance of
communication interfaces with PCMS, events and disturbance records etc.
1.17.2.4 The Bidder/Contractor shall provide to NTDC a generic list of tests for approval,
depending upon the duration of factory tests, the importance and complexity of the
protection system, familiarity of the system being inspected, etc. However, test
procedures shall be prepared to verify adequately the performance, functionality and
protection reliability.
1.17.2.5 The Bidder/Contractor shall indicate that the equipment has been manufactured,
racked and correctly wired by carrying out approved factory tests.
1.17.2.6 Routine test certificates shall be submitted to NTDC‟s review and approval before
shipment / dispatch of the relays/panels.

1.17.3 SITE TESTS.

1.17.3.1 GENERAL.
1.17.3.1.1 The site tests of relays shall be mainly based on functional tests, in addition to the
visual and wiring checking of the relays, in order to ensure that all components are
correctly installed and properly aligned and that there are no imperfections due to
damage during transport to site.
1.17.3.1.2 Relay site tests include comprehensive tests and checks with the protection
equipment fully connected to the array of all field devices (PCMS, tele-protection
signaling equipment, switchgear, CTs/VTs, D.C system, etc.).
1.17.3.1.3 Secondary and primary injections, scheme checks, relay logic, performance of
engineer interface, functional-trip tests, setting ranges and calibration accuracy,
response (trip) times, functional availability, system supervision, performance of
communication interfaces with PCMS, events and disturbance records etc.

71
1.17.4 FOR TURNKEY PROJECTS.
1.17.4.1 Prior to field tests on protection relays, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide to
NTDC for approval operation settings and parameters to set the protection
relays/systems to the substation conditions and power grid requirements.
1.17.4.2 Calculations for the revision of relay settings (e.g. zone 2 and 3 of distance relays) in
the remote end substations shall also be submitted to NTDC for approval.
1.17.4.3 Setting recommendations shall be submitted for approval at least 2 months before
commissioning/energization.
1.17.4.4 Separate schedules for on-site tests shall be submitted for approval at least one
month before start of the tests.
1.17.4.5 The results of all tests shall be submitted immediately after satisfactory completion
of tests in the form of computer print out along with the hand written test sheets
signed by NTDC for witness of the tests.
1.17.4.6 Site test reports shall illustrate all test details, as well as details of all applied testing
equipment and their calibration validity.
1.17.4.7 The Bidder/Contractor shall provide sufficient number of experienced test personnel
during inspection tests and at Site (preferably senior engineers from factory).
1.17.4.8 The Bidder/Contractor shall not withdraw or change the test engineer (s) before the
completion of all the testing activities, unless it is the requirement of NTDC in the
event that the test personnel lacks adequate test skills, knowledge base and technical
expertise in the concerned protection systems/equipment.
1.17.4.9 Where work permits at existing Substations are required, the Bidder/Contractor shall
give sufficient notice to NTDC to plan and prepare for the necessary outage (if any)
to be arranged.
1.17.4.10 Overall tests involving more than one Bidder/Contractor‟s equipment shall be
suitably land professionally coordinated and arranged by the main
Bidder/Contractor. The test and commissioning programs shall be subject to
approval by NTDC at site.
1.17.4.11 The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out any additional site tests, other than those
mentioned in the approved site test program, if deemed necessary by NTDC, due to
some unforeseen technical requirements arising out of operational contingencies in
the network and loading conditions.

1.17.5 OTHER SITE TESTS FOR PROTECTION PURPOSES.

1.17.5.1 Positive and zero sequence impedance measurements shall be carried out for each
new or modified cable or overhead line circuit included in the scope of works and
operating at and above 132 KV. These tests shall be carried out by performed by the
Bidder/Contractor of the respective line/cable before commissioning of the relays
for the new and modified circuits. However, the Bidder / Contractor shall provide
assistance to the extent of providing leads / connections to the circuit terminals.

72
1.18 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION.

1.18.1 GENERAL.
1.18.1.1 The English Language shall be used at all times with respect to documents,
drawings and labels, procured or prepared by the bidder pertaining to the work.
1.18.1.2 All dimensions shall be in SI metric units.

1.18.2 DRAWINGS.
1.18.2.1 The bidder shall submit with the quotation 4-copies of drawings/catalogues showing
all dimensions and details of the equipment offered.
1.18.2.2 The successful bidders shall submit for approval 6-copies of Engineering drawings
and documentation for approval.
1.18.2.3 The contract shall be executed strict conformity with the specifications and / or
drawings given or mentioned in this section and the supplier shall do no “Work”
without proper specifications and / or drawings.
1.18.2.4 Specifications under / or drawings are intended to complement each other so that if
any thing is shown on the drawings as required but not mentioned in the
specifications or vice versa, it shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in
both. If any errors, omissions or discrepancies are found in the figures, specifications
and / or drawings or, if any feature shall appear to the supplier to be indefinite or
unclear, the same shall be referred to the Engineer whose written explanation and /
or clarifications shall be obtained before proceeding with the work.
1.18.2.5 The supplier shall submit to Engineer under intimation to the Purchaser, within
30-days of the issuance of the Notification of Award, for approval of the Engineer.
Six (6) copies of all drawings, required under the specifications or other provisions
of the bidding documents or, if he deems necessary, require changes or modifications
to be made therein, he shall return two copies to the Supplier marked “Approved”,
“Approved as Noted” or “Returned for Correction”. Each drawing which is noted
“Returned for Correction” shall be resubmitted to the Engineer after corrections.
1.18.2.6 The Supplier shall then prepare and submit to the Engineer eight (8) prints and
two (2) soft copies of the approved drawings. Two prints shall be stamped
“APPROVED” Engineer and returned to the Supplier for his record.
1.18.2.7 On completion of the Contract, the Contractor / Supplier shall deliver to the Engineer
eight (8) sets of prints and two (2) sets of soft copy of all drawings, technical
literature, data which show the work in the final or “as built” condition.
1.18.2.8 One as built drawing of panel shall be kept in each relevant panel.

73
1.18.2.9 The Supplier shall allow 30-days for the Engineer‟s approval of drawings in his
schedule of work and in the time allowed for completion of the Contract Extra time
required for approval of drawings due to deficiencies in design or errors in submitted
drawings shall be the responsibility of the Supplier are no extension in time will be
allowed on this account. Delays in obtaining approval caused by the Engineer
beyond 30-days will entitle the supplier to an extension of time.
1.18.2.10 Approval by the Engineer does not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility to do the
work in accordance with the Contract.
1.18.2.11 The supplier shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in any
drawings or other particulars supplied by him whether such drawings or particulars
have been approved by the Engineer or not.
1.18.2.12 All drawings and documents furnished by the Supplier in accordance with the
Contract shall become the property of the Purchaser.
1.18.2.13 Whenever reference is made in the Technical Specifications to specific standards and
codes to be met by the goods and materials to be furnished or tested, the provisions
of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards or codes in effect
shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract. Where such standards
and codes are national or relates to a particular country or region, other authoritative
standards that ensure substantial equivalence to the standards and codes specified
will be acceptable.

1.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

1.19.1 The successful bidder shall submit eight copies of the operation and maintenance
instruction manual to the owner.
1.19.2 The complete manuals must be provided to NTDC before the delivery of relays or
relay panels. Information in the manuals and documentation for relay system shall
not contain less than the following:
a. Specification and characteristics.
b. External connections.
c. Description and drawing of the construction and principle of operation.
Additionally for relay systems, the module layout in interconnection
diagrams, internal wiring and component descriptions. For numerical relays,
details / information of all applicable software, interfaces, marshalling of
binary inputs / binary outputs contacts, programming, optional features etc.
shall be provided.
d. All setting calculation instructions explained with examples.
e. All setting and calibrations procedures and instructions.
f. Receiving inspections and acceptance test on instructions.
g. Installation requirements and instructions.
h. Routine maintenance requirements and instructions.
i. Repair and recalibration instructions.
j. Parts list.
74
 k. Design test report.
l. Original manufacturer‟s instruction manuals and documentation (detailed
information of basic and optional features if any) and not brochures shall be
provided to system protection department NTDC and accepted to acceptance
of relays or relays system. Photo copies of manuals shall not be acceptable
(i.e. all manuals shall be original as issued by Relay Manufacturers).

1.20 FOR TURNKEY PROJECTS.

1.20.1 Before energizing the substation, the following should be ensured as minimum:
(a) All as built drawings and O&M manuals are available at site.
(b) Signed copy of all SAT reports are available at site.
(c) All spares and tools have been handed over.
(d) Site training on operation, configuration and maintenance have been
completed.
(e) Substation is ready to be controlled and monitored from local and remote.

1.21 RELAY SETTINGS AND CTS SIZING CALCULATIONS.

1.21.1 All numerical data communication shall comply with IEC-60870-5-103 and
IEC-61850 Protocol.
1.21.2 The Contractor shall furnish the complete relay settings (in tabular format) and basis
of relay settings and shall provide all relay-setting calculations for each and every
relay, module, parameter and timers etc. as required by the individual relay. Relay
settings are required for each and every feeder / Transformer / eqpt under this
project.
1.21.3 The details of equipment to be protected are stated in this specification. The
company shall approve relay settings furnished by the contractor. If, in judgment of
company, it is observed that the relay setting (s) is (are) wrong, the contractor shall
furnish revised calculations or relay settings. Also, in case, it is found that relays
installed at site cannot meet the required settings, the contractor shall change the
relay, relay wring, testing commissions etc., without any additional price to complete
satisfaction of the company.
1.21.4 The contractor shall provide preliminary relay settings, relay calculations, CT and
relay suitability calculations at the earliest for all equipment along with related
instruction manuals and documents on the basis of which these settings were
calculated.

75
1.21.5 Contractor shall furnish the CT and relay suitability calculations along with the
tender. The Contractor shall furnish the recommended relay settings and relay
calculations three (3) months before commissioning date. The time current grading
shall be provided for all over current on log-log graph sheets separately for phase
and ground relays using protected equipment‟s manufacturer provided withstand
curves. The Contractor shall obtain the customer‟s equipment relay settings and
attach along with his protection setting proposals. Actual soft copy of settings &
configuration of inputs / outputs etc. for all Numerical protection shall be provided.

76
1.22 RELAY PANELS
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

(I) DISTANCE PROTECTION SET-I

FOR OVERHEAD LINES.
1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue
provided – (Yes / No).
5. Rated Current.
Maximum zone relay operating
6.
time.
7. Polarizing system.
8. Zone switched.
9. Number of zones.
10. C.T. supervision.
11 Shape of impedance characteristic.
a) Zone 1 Phase – Ground.
b) Zone 2 Phase – Phase.
12. Reverse locking element
(blocking signal initiation)
13. Sensitivity.
a) Minimum Operating Current.
- Earth Faults.
- Phase Faults.
14. Minimum necessary voltage at
Zone-1 reach point (if applicable).
- Earth Faults.
- Phase Faults.

77
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

15. Minimum zone 1 ohmic impedance

to which relay can be set.
Maximum zone 1 ohmic impedance
16. to which relay can be set and
maintain accuracy.
Minimum zone 2 ohmic impedance
17.
to which relay can be set.
Maximum zone 2 ohmic impedance
18.
to which relay can be set.
19. Maximum zone 3 ohmic:
a) Forward reach.
b) Reverse reach.
20. Are forwarded and reverse reach
settings, independent of each other?
21. Can resistance and reactance
reaches be set independent of each
other?
22. Directional sensitivity.
23. Current transformer requirements.
24. Voltage transformer requirements.
25. VT supervision.
26. Back up zone time ranges:
a) Zone 1
b) Zone 3
27. Power swing blocking.
a) Forward reach
b) Reverse reach
28. Auto reclose with Sync. Check.
- Internal / External.

78
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
29. Modes of operating provided:
a) Basic mode.

b) Zone accelerator mode.

c) Permissive Overreach / under

reach transfer trip mode.

d) Blocking / unblocking mode.

e) Method of conversion of site

from one mode to other, describe.

f) Details of extra components for

above, Describe.

30. Methods used to clear close-in

faults.
a) Which occur when line is already
energized in service.

b) Which exist upon the

energisation.

31. Distance to Fault Locator, event

recorder, fault recorder and
disturbance recorder included in
distance relay.

32. Has distance protection been

previously used in the type of
scheme specified for this contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

33. Year of first going into service.

Approximate number if service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

79
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
34. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation
of suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
35. Communication interface to SCMS
& Protection WS.
36. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
37. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.

38. Communications:-
a) Front Port RS232 (Yes/ No).
b) Rear Port RS485 (Yes/ No).
c) Port RS 422 (Yes/ No).
d) Ethernet Port (Yes/ No).
e) Fiber Optic Port (Yes/ No).
f) IEC 60870-5 Protocol (Yes/ No).
g) IEC 61850 Protocol (Yes/ No).
h) RTU Protocol (Yes/ No).
i) IRIG – B Time Synchronization
(Yes/ No).
39. Burden
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

40. Environmental.
a) Temperature (Operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

80
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
41. Mechanical.
a) Overall Size HxWxD

b) Mounting.

c) Weight.

42. Zone-1 Operating Times.

a) Earth Faults.
Source of Fault position Operating time in
line ratio. % of relay m.sec.
setting. Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

b) Phase to Phase faults.

Source of Fault position % Operating time in
line ratio. of relay setting. m.sec.
Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

81
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
c). Three Phase Faults.

Source of Fault position % Operating time in

line ratio. of relay setting. m.sec.
Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

(II) DISTANCE PROTECTION

FOR OVERHEAD LINES
SET-II.
1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue
provided (Yes / No).
5. Rated current.
Maximum zone relay operating
6.
time.
7. Polarizing system.
8. Zone switched.
9. Number of zones.
10. C.T. supervision.
11.
Shape of impedance
characteristic.
a) Zone1 Phase – Ground.
b) Zone2 Phase – Ground.

82
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
12. Reverse looking element
(blocking signal initiation).

13. Sensitivity.

a) Earth faults.

b) Phase faults.

14. Minimum necessary voltage at

Zone-1 reach point
(if applicable).

a) Earth Faults.

b) Phase faults.

15. Minimum zone 1 ohmic

impedance to which relay can be
set.
16. Maximum zone 1 ohmic
impedance to which relay can be
set and maintain accuracy.
17. Minimum zone 2 ohmic
impedance to which relay can be
set.
18. Maximum zone 2 ohmic
impedance to which relay can be
set and maintain accuracy.

19. Maximum zone 3 ohmic reach.

a) Forward reach.

b) Reverse reach..

20. Are forwarded and reverse reach

settings independent of each other?
21. Can resistance and reactance
reaches be set independent of each
other?
22. Directional sensitivity.
23. Current transformer requirements.

83
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
24. Voltage transformer requirements.

25. VT supervision.

26. Back up zone time ranges.

a) Zone 1

b) Zone 3.

27. Power swing blocking.

a) Forward reach.

b) Reverse reach.

28. Auto-Reclose with sync.check.

- Internal / External.

29. Modes of operating provided:

a) Basic mode.

b) Zone acceleration mode.

c) Method of conversion at site

from one mode to other
describe.

d) Details of extra components for

above, Describe.

30. Method used to clear close-in

faults.
a) Which occur when line is
already energized in service.

b) Which exist upon line

energisation.

31. Distance to fault locator, events

recorder, fault recorder and
disturbance recorder included in
distance relay.

84
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
32. Has distance protection been
previously used in the type of
scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

33. Year of first going into service.

Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should
be submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

34. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation

of suitability of the relay for
system application as specified in
the main specification.

35. Communication interface to

SCMS & Protection WS.

36. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

37. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

38. Communications:-
a) Front Port RS232 (Yes/ No).
b) Rear Port RS485 (Yes/ No).
c) Port RS 422 (Yes/ No).
d) Ethernet Port (Yes/ No).
e) Fiber Optic Port (Yes/ No).
f) IEC 60870-5 Protocol (Yes/ No).
g) IEC 61850 Protocol (Yes/ No).
h) RTU Protocol (Yes/ No).
i) IRIG – B Time Synchronization
(Yes/ No).

85
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
39. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

40. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).

b) Enclosure protection.

c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.

d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.

e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

41. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD.

b) Mounting.

c) Weight.

42. Zone 1 operating times.

a) Earth Faults.
Source of Fault position % Operating time in
line ratio. of relay setting. m.sec.
Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

86
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
b) Phase to Phase faults.

Source of Fault position % Operating time in

line ratio. of relay setting. m.sec.
Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

c) Three Phase Faults.

Source of Fault position % Operating time in

line ratio. of relay setting. m.sec.
Min. Max.
1 0 (Relay Point)
50
90

10 0
50
90

30 0
50
90

87
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
(III) LINE DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION.
1. Differential Current Protection for
Overhead Line Feeders.
a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.
5. Service experience list attached.
6. Phase segregated type.
7. Rating.
8. Insulation.
9. Maximum relay operating time.
10. Maximum burden of relay.
11. Minimum Sensitivity:
a) Earth faults.
b) Phase Faults.
12. Maximum through fault stability
Operating time – fault initiation to trip
initial at:
13. a) Three times minimum setting.
b) Ten times minimum setting..
14. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation
for the suitability of the relay for the
feeder system specified.
15. a) Guard relay provided for over
current / earth fault.
b) Type of guard relay.
c) Rating.
d) Setting ranges.
16. End – End communication media.

88
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

17. Autoreclose with Sync. Check.

18. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for the
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
19. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).
20. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
21. Communication interface to PCMS &
Protection WS.
Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
22. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
23. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.
24. Distance to fault locator, event
recorder, fault recorder and
disturbance recorder included in the
relay.

25. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

89
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
26. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).

b) Enclosure protection.

c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.

d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.

e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

27. MECHANICAL.

a) Overall Size HxWxD.

b) Mounting.

c) Weight.

(IV) AUTO - RECLOSURE SET-I

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided
(Yes / No).
5. Single phase / three phase auto-
reclosure.
a) No. of shots.
6. Dead time range.
7. Re-claim time range.
8. Priority logic provided (Yes / No).
9. Synchronizm check for auto-reclose
provided (Yes/No).
10. Synchronizm check for manual close
provided (Yes/No).
11. Auto / Non Auto / Modes provided
(Yes/No).

90
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

12. Operating logic via soft ware function

links provided (Yes/No).
13. Live line / live dead / bus live / bus
dead facility provided (Yes/No).
14. Events recorder and disturbance
recorder provided (Yes/No).
15. Has auto reclosure protection been
previously used in the type of
scheme for this contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
16. Year of first going into service
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

17. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

18. Communication interface to SCMS

and protection WS.

19. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

20. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

21. List of ports

22. BURDEN:

a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

91
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
23. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

24 MECHANICAL.

a) Overall Size HxWxd.

b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(V) AUTO - RECLOSURE SET-II

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided
(Yes / No).
5. Single phase / three phase
auto-reclosure.
a) No. of shots.

6. Dead time range.

7. Re-claim time range.
8. Priority logic provided (Yes / No).

9. Synchronizm check for auto-reclose

provided (Yes/No).
10. Synchronizm check for manual close
provided (Yes/No).
11. Auto / Non Auto / Modes provided
(Yes/No).

92
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

12. Operating logic via soft ware function

links provided (Yes/No).
13. Live line / live dead / bus live / bus
dead facility provided (Yes/No).
14. Events recorder and disturbance
recorder provided (Yes/No).
15. Has auto reclosure protection been
previously used in the type of
scheme for this contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

16. Year of first going into service
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

17. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
18. Communication interface to SCMS
and protection WS.
19. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
20. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.
21. List of ports

22. BURDEN:

a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

93
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

23. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.
24 MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD.
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(VI) PERCENTAGE BIASED T/F

DIFFERENTIAL RELAY FOR
ICT.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.
5. Design
- For 2 winding / 3 winding / Auto.
6. In-built interposing CT ratio matching
logic.
7. In-built disturbance recording, events
recording and fault recording..
8. On demand system V, I, W display.
9. Protection Functions:
a) Differential.
b) Back-up O/C on HV/LV sides
(Optional).

94
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
c) Thermal overload (thermal replica).
d) Earth fault protection.
e) Over fluxing function.
f) Magnetizing in rush restraint.
g) Additional relay optional functions
included in this application.

10. RATINGS.
a) AC Current (N).
b) Frequency.
c) Aux. Supply – (D.C)
11. AC THERMAL RATING:
a) Continuous.
b) Short time – (1 sec)
12. BASIC SETTINGS:
a) Differential:
Sensitivity (pick-up).
Bias Slope X-tics
Operating time.
Accuracy of P/U value.
b) Unrestrained High Set Unit
(if provided).
Current setting.
Operating time.
c) Bay unit Over-current (3-Phase).
Setting range.
Operating X-tics
(DMT) BS142.

95
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
d) Overload:
Setting range (I thermal).
Time constraint (TC).
Accuracy (both Ith & TC).
13. Communication interface to SCMS &
Protection WS.

14. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract:

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

15. Year of first going into service

Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

16. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

17. a) Operating time including trip relay

at two relay minimum setting.

b) Operation time including trip

relays at five times relay minimum
setting.
18. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).
19. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

96
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
20. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.

21. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

22. BURDEN:

a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

23. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).

b) Enclosure protection.

c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.

d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.

e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

24 MECHANICAL.

a) Overall Size HxWxD.

b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(VII) OVERALL DIFFERENTIAL OR

ROUGH BALANCE
PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.

b) Country of Manufacture.

2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.

97
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.
5. Design
- For 2 winding / 3 winding / Auto.
6. In-built interposing CT ratio matching
logic.
7. In-built disturbance recording, events
recording and fault recording..
8. On demand system V, I, W display.

9. Protection Functions:
a) Differential.
b) Back-up O/C on HV/LV sides
(Optional).
c) Thermal overload (thermal replica).

d) Earth fault protection.

e) Over fluxing function.

f) Magnetizing in rush restraint.
g) Additional relay optional functions
included in this application.

10. RATINGS.
a) AC Current (N).
b) Frequency.
c) Aux. Supply – (D.C)
11. AC THERMAL RATING:
a) Continuous.
b) Short time – (1 sec)

98
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

12. BASIC SETTINGS:

a) Differential:
Sensitivity (pick-up).
Bias ch. Slope.
Operating time.
Accuracy of P/U value.
b) Unrestrained High Set Unit
(If Provided).
Current setting.
Operating time.
c) B/U Over-current (3-Phase).
Setting range.
Operating ch. (DMT) BS142.
d) Overload:
Setting range (lth).
Time constraint (TC).
Accuracy (both lth & TC).

13. Communication interface to PCMS &

Protection WS.

14. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract:

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

99
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
15. Year of first going into service
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

16. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

17. a) Operating time including trip relay

at two relay minimum setting.

b) Operation time including trip

relays at five times relay minimum
setting.

18. Year of first going into service.

Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

19. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

20. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

21. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

22. BURDEN:

a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

100
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

23. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

24 MECHANICAL.

a) Overall Size HxWxd.

b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(VIII) HIGH IMPEDANCE BUSBAR

PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.

b) Country of Manufacture.

2. Type.

3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Rated Current (In).

6. Auxiliary DC supply voltage.

7. Rated Power.

8. a) Operation principle.

b) Multiple operation criterion

included in the relay.

9. Minimum Operating Current/Voltage.

101
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
10. Setting Range:

a) Earth faults.

b) Phase faults.

11. Maximum through fault current at

which protection is stable:

a) Earth faults.

b) Phase faults.

12 a) Operating time including trip relay

at two relay minimum setting.

b) Operation time including trip

relays at five times relay minimum
setting.

13. Sensitivity of scheme (allowing for

current transformer magnetizing
current, etc).

14. Bus Wire Supervision Relay.

15. C.T. supervision setting range:

a) Current.

b) Time delay.

16. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract:

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

17. Year of first going into service.

Approximate number in service
(A complete reference 1st should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

102
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
18. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

19. Communication interface to SCMS

and protection WS.

20. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

21. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

22. BURDEN:

a) Max. DC Burden.

b) Max. AC Burden.

23. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

24 MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD.
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

103
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

(IX) LOW IMPEDANCE BUS BAR

PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s ordering code.
4. Phase segregated type.
5. Rated current (In).
6. Auxiliary D.C. supply
7. No. of Zones.
8. No. of peripheral units.
9. Typical operating time.
10. Dual characteristics provided
(Yes/No)
11. Check zone element
provided(Yes/No)
12. Dead end zone or blind zone.
Protection provided (Yes / No).
13. Current transformer supervision
provided (Yes / No).
14. Isolator discrepancy alarm provided
(Yes / No).
15. Events recorder and disturbance
provided (Yes / No).
16. Back up two stage over current and
earth fault protection included
(Yes / No).
17. Local and remote communication
parts provided (Yes / No).
18. Current and frequency measurement
provided (Yes / No).
19. Bus wise supervision relay.

104
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
Has relay been previously used in the
20
type of scheme specified for this
contract
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
21. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system,
voltage and year of going into
service).

22. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

23. Relay catalogue provided with the

tender.

24. List of relay optional

25. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

26. ENVIRONMENTAL.

a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

27. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD.
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

105
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

(X) HIGH IMPEDANCE

RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.

b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
Manufacturer‟s type designation
(separate relay to be provided. Built-in
3. function of main Differential Relay is
not acceptable).

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Rating.
Operating principle e.g. high
6. impedance.

7. Minimum relay setting.

Sensitivity of scheme (allowing for
8. current transformer magnetizing
current, etc.).

Maximum through fault current at

9. which protection is stable.

10. Current transformer requirements.

Operating time at three times relay
11. minimum setting.

Operating time at ten times relay

12. minimum setting.

13. a) Stabilizing resistors provided.

b) Stabilizing resistor value.

106
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
14. a) Non linear resistors provided.
b) Non linear resistors value.
Communication interface to PCMS &
15. Protection WS.

16. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
17. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

18. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

19. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

20. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

21. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

22. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

107
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

23. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(XI) HIGH VOLTAGE CONNECTION

PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s type designation
(separate relay to be provided. Built-in
function of main Differential Relay is
not acceptable).

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Rating.
6. Operating principle e.g. high
impedance.

7. Minimum relay setting.

8. Sensitivity of scheme (allowing for
current transformer magnetizing
current, etc.).

9. Maximum through fault current at

which protection is stable.

10. Current transformer requirements.

11. Operating time at three times relay
minimum setting.

12. Operating time at ten times relay

minimum setting.

13. a) Stabilizing resistors provided.

b) Stabilizing resistor value.

108
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
14. a) Non linear resistors provided.
b) Non linear resistors value.

15. Communication interface to PCMS &

Protection WS.

16. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.

17. Year of first going into service.

Approximate number in service.
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

18. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

19. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

20. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

21. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

22. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

109
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

23. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(XII) LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTION

PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
(Separate relay to be provided. Built-
in function of main Differential Relay
is not acceptable).

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Rating.
6. Operating principle e.g. high
impedance.

7. Minimum relay setting.

8. Sensitivity of scheme (allowing for

current transformer magnetizing
current, etc.).

9. Maximum through fault current at

which protection is stable.

10. Current transformer requirements.

11. Operating time at three times relay
minimum setting.

12. Operating time at ten times relay

minimum setting.

13. a) Stabilizing resistors provided.

b) Stabilizing resistor value.

110
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

14. a) Non linear resistors provided.

b) Non linear resistors value.

15. Communication interface to PCMS &
Protection WS.
16. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
17. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

18. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

19. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

20. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

21. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.
22. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

111
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

23. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XIII) DELTA TERTIARY
PROTECTION.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s type designation.

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Inverse time element

a) a) Range of current setting:
Earth Fault.
b)
c) b) Range of operating time at
d) highest time setting at ten time‟s
current setting.

c) Range of operating times at

highest time setting at two time‟s
current setting.

d) Time multiplier setting

range / step.

6 Instantaneous element
(for applicable cases only).

e) a) Range of setting:
Earth Fault.

b) Time multiplier setting

range / step.

c) Transient over - reach.

f)
g)

112
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
flowing.
- - At ten times setting current
- flowing.
e) Burden of relay on minimum
inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting.

- Earth fault.
7. Definite time element
(if applicable as per requirement).

- Current setting range.

- Time setting range.

8. Communication interface to SCMS &
Protection WS.
9. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
10. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

11. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

12. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.
113
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

14. BURDEN.
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

(XIV) T/F NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT

PROTECTION.
1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s type designation.

4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Inverse time element

h) a) Range of current setting:

i) - Earth Fault.
j) b) Range of operating time at
k) highest time setting at ten time‟s
current setting.
l)
c) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at two time‟s
current setting.

d) Time multiplier setting

range / step.

114
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

6 Instantaneous element
(for applicable cases only).

m) a) Range of setting:
Earth Fault.

b) Time multiplier setting

range / step.

c) Transient over - reach.

d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
flowing.
- - At ten times setting current
- flowing.

e) Burden of relay on minimum

inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting.

- Earth fault.
7. Definite time element
(if applicable as per requirement).

- Current setting range.

- Time setting range.
8. Communication interface to PCMS &
Protection WS.

9. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
10. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

115
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

11. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

12. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

14. BURDEN.
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5.
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5.
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1.

16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XV) SYNCHRONIZING CHECK
RELAY.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
3. Relay type.
4. Rated voltage.

116
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

5. Setting ranges:
a) Phase angle.
b) Voltage difference.
c) Frequency.
d) Facility for dead bus and dead
line selection included.

6. Facility for dead line and dead bus

selection included.

7 Separate relay or built-in BCU.

8. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
9. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

10. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

11. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

12. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

117
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

14. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

15. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD

b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
16. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

(XVI) TRIPPING RELAYS.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
3. Nominal operating voltage.
4. Minimum Operating voltage.
5. Contact Mechanism Reset
(Hand / Electrical / Self).
6. Operation indicator.
7. Operating time at nominal voltage.
8. Contact rating:
a) Make and carry continuously.
b) Make and carry for 3 secs.
c) Break resistive watts.
d) Inductive VA

118
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

9. Thermal withstand capacity.

10. Reset mechanism.
11. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
12. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

13. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

14. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

15. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

16. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

17. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

119
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

18. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XVII) TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION.
(Supervision relays to be provided.
Built-in functionality of a Main Relay
is not considered sufficient to meet the
requirements).

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
3. Monitors full trip circuit with
CB open and close.

4. a) Operating time.
b) Resetting time.
c) Time delayed drop off period.
5. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
6. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

7. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

8. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

120
 Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

9. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

10. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

11. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

12. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XVIII) LINE OVER CURRENT AND
EARTH FAULT RELAY.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturers type designation.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Tripping time X-stics provided.

a) Definite time.
b) Normally inverse.
c) Very inverse.
d) Extremely inverse.
e) Long time inverse.

121
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

6. Phase Current Element.

a) Range of current settings:
- Over current.
b) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at ten times
current setting.
c) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at two times
current setting.
d) Time Multiplier setting
range / step.
7. Instantaneous element
(for applicable cases only)
a) Range of setting:
- Earth fault.
b) Time Multiplier setting
range / steps.
c) Transient over-reach.
d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
flowing.
- At ten times setting current
flowing.
e) Burden of relay on minimum
inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting:
- Earth fault.

8. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
9. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

122
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

10. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

11. Communication interface to PCMS &

Protection WS.

12. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

14. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1
16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

123
 Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

(XIX) H.V SIDE T/F OVER CURRENT

AND EARTH FAULT RELAY.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturers type designation.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Tripping time X-stics provided.

a) Definite time.
b) Normally inverse.
c) Very inverse.
d) Extremely inverse.
e) Long time inverse.

6. Phase Current Element.

a) Range of current settings:
- Over current.
b) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at ten times
current setting.
c) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at two times
current setting.
d) Time Multiplier setting
range / step.
7. Instantaneous element
(for applicable cases only)
a) Range of setting:
- Earth fault.
b) Time Multiplier setting
range / steps.
c) Transient over-reach.

124
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
flowing.
- At ten times setting current
flowing.
e) Burden of relay on minimum
inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting:
- Earth fault.
8. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
9. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

10. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

11. Communication interface to PCMS &

Protection WS.

12. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.

14. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

125
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XX) L.V SIDE T/F OVER CURRENT
AND EARTH FAULT RELAY.

1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturers type designation.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.

5. Tripping time X-stics provided.

a) Definite time.
b) Normally inverse.
c) Very inverse.
d) Extremely inverse.
e) Long time inverse.

6. Phase Current Element.

a) Range of current settings:
- Over current.
b) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at ten times
current setting.
c) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at two times
current setting.

126
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

d) Time Multiplier setting

range / step.
7. Instantaneous element
(for applicable cases only)
a) Range of setting:
- Earth fault.
b) Time Multiplier setting
range / steps.
c) Transient over-reach.
d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
flowing.
- At ten times setting current
flowing.
e) Burden of relay on minimum
inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting:
- Earth fault.
8. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
9. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).
10. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
11. Communication interface to SCMS &
Protection WS.
12. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.

127
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.
14. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1
16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
(XXI) INVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT
RELAY.
1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of Manufacture.
2. Type.
3. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
4. Detailed technical catalogue provided.
5. Inverse time element.
a) Range of current settings:
- Earth fault.
b) Range of operating line at highest
time setting at ten times current
setting.
c) Range of operating times at
highest time setting at two times
current setting.
c) Time Multiplier setting
range / step.

128
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

6. Instantaneous element
a) Range of settings:
- Earth fault.
b) Time Multiplier setting
range / steps.
c) Transient over-reach.
d) Operating times:
- At three times setting current
- flowing.
- At ten times setting current
- flowing.
e) Burden of relay on minimum
inverse time element current
setting at a current ten times
setting:
- Earth fault.
7. Definite time element
(as per requirement)
Current Setting Range.
Time setting Range.
8. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
9. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).
10. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
11. Communication interface to PCMS &
Protection WS.
12. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
129
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

13. List of Relay Optional functions

included for this application to be
listed clearly.
14. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

15. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

16. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.
b) Non linear resistors value.
17. Communication interface to PCMS &
Protection WS.

18. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.

a) If yes, year of going into service.

b) Year of first going into service.
19. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

20. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.

130
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

21. Relay catalogue provided with the

Tender.
a) If yes, year of going into service.
b) Year of first going into service.
22. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service.
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into
service).

23. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of

suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
24. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
25. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.

(XXII) LINE OVER VOLTAGE.

1. a). Manufacturer.
b). Country of Manufacture.
2. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
3. Relay type.
4. Rated voltage.
5. Voltage Setting Ranges:
a). Definite time.
b). Inverse time.
c). Instantaneous.
6. Timer Setting Ranges:
a). Definite time.
b). Inverse time.
c). Instantaneous.

131
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

7. Has relay been previously used in the

type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a). If yes, year of going into service.
b). Year of first going into service.
8. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into service.
9. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
10. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
11. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.
12. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

13. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

14. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

132
 Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
(XXIII). TRANSFORMER OVER
VOLTAGE.
1. a). Manufacturer.
b). Country of Manufacture.
2. Manufacturer‟s type designation.
3. Relay type.
4. Rated voltage.
5. Voltage Setting Ranges:
a). Definite time.
b). Inverse time.
c). Instantaneous.
6. Timer Setting Ranges:
a). Definite time.
b). Inverse time.
c). Instantaneous.
7. Has relay been previously used in the
type of scheme specified for this
contract.
a). If yes, year of going into service.
b). Year of first going into service.
8. Year of first going into service.
Approximate number in service
(A complete reference list should be
submitted stating client, system
voltage and year of going into service.
9. Relay manufacturer‟s confirmation of
suitability of the relay for system
application as specified in the main
specification.
10. Relay catalogue provided with the
Tender.
11. List of Relay Optional functions
included for this application to be
listed clearly.
12. BURDEN:
a) Max. DC Burden.
b) Max. AC Burden.

133
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.

13. ENVIRONMENTAL.
a) Temperature (operation).
b) Enclosure protection.
c) Insulation IEC 60255-5
d) HV impulse IEC 60255-5
e) HF disturbance IEC 60255-22-1

14. MECHANICAL.
a) Overall Size HxWxD
b) Mounting.
c) Weight.

134
 CONTENTS

2.1 General

2.2 Control and Auxiliary Voltages.

2.3 D.C. Supply Schemes.

2.4 A.C. Supply Schemes.

2.5 Position Indicating and Interlocking Schemes.

2.6 Control Schemes.

2.7 Indicating Instruments.

2.8 Transducers.

2.9 Annunciation Schemes.

2.10 Control Switches.

2.11 Annunciator Unit.

2.12 Control Panels.

2.13 Provision for SCADA and Remote Control.

2.14 Annunciations on the Control Panel.

2.15 Events Recorder and Printer.

2.16 Fault Recorder.

2.17 Recording Instruments.

2.18 Out Door Local Control Cubicles.

2.19 Name Plate.

2.20 Equipment Details.

2.21 Control Panels Technical Schedule.

2.22 Schedule of Qualification of Bidder.

2.23 Shipping Information.

2.24 List of Deviation.

135
 SECTION – 2 : CONTROL AND RECORDING EQUIPMENT.

2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 This section covers the design, supply, installation and testing and commissioning
of control, metering, fault recording and events recording equipment for
500 / 220 / 132 KV system of substations.
2.1.2 The equipment to be supplied under this specification shall be manufactured and
tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant IEC standards or
equivalents.
2.1.3 The control switches for circuit breakers and disconnectors shall be provided on
the control panel, control discrepancy type square switches for circuit breakers
and round shape switches for disconnectors, together with the mimic arrangement
and red/green status indicating lamps. Indicating meters for measuring current,
voltage, active and reactive power shall be provided on upper portion of the
control panels.
Control panel: Control panels shall be vertical, indoor type, free standing, rear
access, and shall be installed in the control room.
The synchronism check relays with under voltage logic shall also be provided for
the manual closing of the breaker and for the remote closing by the remote
supervisory system.

2.2 CONTROL AND AUXILIARY VOLTAGES.

2.2.1 The rated control and auxiliary supply voltages shall have the following values:-
500 KV Side. 220 KV Side. 132 KV Side.
DC Voltage. 220 V 220 V 110 V
AC Voltage 240 V 240 V 240 V
(Single Phase 50 Hz.)
2.2.2 The rated voltages are applicable to auxiliary circuits of main protective relays,
tripping relays, auxiliary relays alarm annunciator relays, miniature circuit
breakers indicating lamps, panels illuminating lamps, power out-let socket and all
the accessories.

2.3 DC SUPPLY SCHEMES.

2.3.1 The rated DC supply system for 500 KV and 220 KV switchyard equipment shall
be 220 V. There shall be duplicate 220 V DC batteries conforming to WAPDA
Specification P-132:88. The battery supply shall be connected to the terminal
block of the control panel, where it shall be further distributed through miniature
circuit breakers into following three circuits. The functional features of each
circuit is also described hereunder:

136
 a). Position indicating and Interlocking Circuits.
This circuit shall feed circuit breaker and isolator position indication
circuits, isolators interlocking and healthy supply supervision circuits
and flicker relay.
b). Control, Protection and Annunciation Circuit of Trip Functions.
This circuit shall feed circuit breaker control and protection of the
associated switchyard equipment healthy supervision circuit,
annunciator relays for trip functions. Indicating lamps, DC siren and
associated auxiliary relays and components, as applicable.
c). Annunciation Circuit of Alarm Functions.
This circuit shall feed annunciator relays for the alarm functions,
indicating lamps, DC Hooter and healthy supply supervision circuits.
d). DC Supervision Relay.
DC supervision relays for control and annunciation scheme shall be
provided in control panel.
2.3.2 The healthy status of the above circuits shall be supervised continuously by
means of supervision relays. The healthy status shall be monitored from DC
supply by continuous glow of neon indicating lamps which shall extinguish when
the associated supply circuit fails. In addition the failure of any circuit shall
initiate an audible alarm and cause visual indication from AC supply.

2.4 AC SUPPLY SCHEMES.

2.4.1 The scheme consists of alarm anunication of DC supply supervision and panel
illumination circuit.
2.4.2 The incoming single phase AC supply shall be terminated through terminal
blocks on a 2-pole MCB in the control panel with a normally closed contact
which is used for indicating the failure of AC supply.
2.4.3 AC supply shall be used for giving annunciation and alarm in case of failure of
any DC supply circuit. In addition, it shall be used for the control panel
illumination and socket outlet, wherever applicable.
2.4.4 AC supply for the control and relay panel illumination and socket outlet wherever
applicable, shall be fed from the respective control panel. Panel illumination shall
be by means of strip light controlled by door type switch.

2.5 POSITION INDICATING AND INTERLOCKING SCHEMES.

2.5.1 This scheme consists of indication of the operational status of power circuit
breakers and isolators and interlocking of isolators with the associated power
circuit breakers.

137
2.5.2 The status of circuit breakers shall be indicated by the indicating lamps of the
discrepancy type control switch having „ON‟ and „OFF‟ positions. An OFF status
of control switch lamp indicates that position of both the control switch and
respective circuit breakers are in agreement with each other. A disagreement in
their positions initiates flickering of control switch lamp / LEDs.
2.5.3 When the circuit breakers opens without operation of the remote control switch,
i.e. by protective relays, the control switch lamp / LEDs gives flickering light
which changes into continuous light when the switch is turned to the agreement
positions. The audible alarm shall be silenced by the alarm cancellation
arrangement.
2.5.4 The position of isolators is also indicated by discrepancy control switches. The
provisions of above Clauses shall also be applicable to isolator control switch.
2.5.5 The interlocking of isolators with the associated power circuit breakers shall be
through connection of isolator interlocking coils in series with normally closed
contacts of the associated power circuit breaker. In the control and relay panels
only provision of terminal blocks for the required interconnections is to be made.
2.5.6 The position indication and interlocking scheme shall include supervision relay
for continuously monitoring by indicating lamps the healthy status of its DC
supply, as described in Clause 1.3.1.2.

2.6 CONTROL SCHEMES.

2.6.1 The control scheme shall consist of the controls for operation of circuit breakers
and power operated isolators from the control panels, the indication of the
operational status of breakers and isolators, the audible and visual alarm and
indications for malfunction or actuation of equipment and the metering
installation.
2.6.2 The operation and position indication of circuit breakers shall be by discrepancy
type control switches. The operation and position indication of isolators, shall
also be through discrepancy control type switches.
2.6.3 The panels shall accommodate the controls for circuit breakers operation, the
instruments, annunciators indicators, mimic bus, circuit labels and associated
equipments including wiring, terminal boards auxiliaries etc.

2.7 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS:

2.7.1 General.
2.7.1.1 All indicating instruments shall be transducer-fed. The instruments shall be
designed, constructed, supplied and tested in accordance with latest edition of
IEC Publication 60051 and the requirements listed herein. All instruments shall
be tropicalized.

138
 Indicating instruments shall be flush mounted, direct reading, dust proof,
switchboard type, having a removable transparent, dust-tight window cover with
a dull black finish to match in appearance with existing meters. The instruments
shall have 240 degree circular scale and accuracy of one percent of full scale
value except frequency meter whose accuracy shall be 0.05 Hz. The scale plates
shall have permanent white finish with black graduations and numerals, and
prominently marked with the instrument transformer ratio for which instrument
has been graduated. The zero adjustment knob shall be provided.
2.7.1.2 AC instrument potential coils shall be designed for continuous operation at 1.2
times rated voltage and withstanding 2-times rated voltage for 10-minutes. AC
instrument current coils shall be capable of continuous operation at 1.5 times
rated current and withstanding 35-times and current for the half second or
20-times the continuous additional rating of the coil for 3-seconds without
damage to the coil.

2.7.2 Ammeters and Voltmeters.

2.7.2.1 The AC Ammeters shall have full scale range corresponding to 150 percent of the
rated current which is required to be measured.
2.7.2.2 The voltmeters shall have full scale values corresponding to 150 percent of the
rated voltage which is required to be measured. The scale shall be marked red at
the point indicating nominal voltage.
2.7.2.3 Separate ammeters shall be provided for each phase current. Single ammeter with
phase selector switch will not be accepted. Ammeter for R and B phases shall be
analog type. Digital ammeter shall be provided for Y-phase.
2.7.2.4 Ammeters shall have replaceable scale plates. Set of scale plates comprising
plates corresponding to each available ratio in the CTs shall be provided for each
ammeter.

2.7.3 Wattmeters and Varmeters.

2.7.3.1 The wattmers and varmeters shall have a full scale range corresponding to about
125 percent of the rated power that will be required to measure. This rated power
shall be based upon the rated primary current of the current transformers. The full
scale range shall be chosen from the preferred values specified in relevant IEC
Publication.The meters shall be 3 – Phase, 4 –Wire for balanced load.
2.7.3.2 The wattmeters and varmeters shall have a centre zero scale. Power flowing into
the bus shall be shown on the left hand side of the scale and this scale shall be
marked “IN”. Similarly the power flowing out of the bus shall be shown on the
right hand side and marked “OUT”. The varmeter shall show lagging Vars on left
hand and leading Vars on right hand side. Each part of the scale shall be marked
with the full range.

139
2.7.4 Frequency Meters.
2.7.4.1 Frequency meters shall be self-contained. The instruments shall be of digital type
with four digit display. The digit height shall be 2.5 cm minimum. The frequency
meter shall have accuracy of 0.05 Hz.

2.7.5 Digital Power Meter.

2.7.5.1 It shall have graphic display with back ground illumination and transparent front
cover and its size shall be 96mm x 96mm.
2.7.5.2 It shall have flush mounting design.
2.7.5.3 It shall have four wire, three phase voltage element.
2.7.5.4 It shall measure the following electrical parameter:
a. Voltage (Phase-N, Phase to Phase).
b. Current per phase.
c. Active, reactive and apparent power (Import & Export).
d. Active, reactive and apparent energy (Import & Export).
e. Power Factor.
f. Phase angle.
g. Harmonies of currents and voltages.
h. Unbalance voltage and unbalance current.
i. Frequency.
2.7.5.5 Measured values / states shall be recorded with date and time stamps.
2.7.5.6 The parameters shall be fully configurable.
2.7.5.7 All values and information shall be read out via software and there shall be shown
in tabular and graphical forms.
2.7.5.8 All the measured values can be transmitted to central master station. It shall be
equipped with RS 232 / RS 485 ports and other multiple communication ports.
2.7.5.9 It shall have output contacts.
2.7.5.10 Its degree of protection shall be IP 55.
2.7.5.11 The supplier / contractor shall supply soft, connector, cable connector and
auxiliary equipment without an additional cost shall be part of contract.
2.7.5.12 It shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60688.

2.8 TRANSDUCERS.

2.8.1 Transducer fed indicating instruments shall be used instead of simple analog
meters for measurement of voltages, currents, frequency watts, and vars.

140
 Transducers shall convert secondary quantities from instrument transformers to
proportional DC-milliampere generated shall be 1mA for rated input AC
quantities. Transducer output for unidirectional quantities shall be 0/20 mA and
for bi-directional quantities shall be 10/0/10mA. Output shall be linear throughout
the input.
2.8.2 The burden imposed on the instrument transformers shall not exceed 3VA per
element. Transducers shall be powered from 220 V DC supply. For 132 KV
system, these shall be powered from 110V DC. Transducers shall be of modern
solid state design for maintenance free operation and protected against surge
voltages on inputs and outputs. Accuracy shall be within 1%. Current, watt, and
var transducers shall be capable of withstanding over currents of upto 40 x
normal rated current for not more than 1 second.
2.8.3 Screw or stud type barrier terminal blocks shall be provided for input side
terminals and separate terminal blocks for the output circuits together with a
means to ground the screen of the output cable and the transducer shall be
provided.
2.8.4 Control Panel Devices: The Control Panels shall include, but not be limited to
the equipment shown on Control Panels equipment list.

2.9 ANNUNCIATION SCHEME.

2.9.1 Common suitable alarms shall be provided for alarm and trip function and for
supervision of DC supplies. It shall consist of visual indication by LEDs / LCDs
and audible indication by Siren, hooter or bell, flasher, relay, annunciation
auxiliary relays, and push buttons for acknowledgement, reset and lamp test.
2.9.2 Alarm LEDs / LCDs lamps shall be provided.
2.9.3 The relevant alarm indicating lamps, light and flicker on the appearance of a trip
or alarm signal. At the same time the siren, hooter or bell as the case may be shall
be sounded. The duration of the flash shall be such that the legend may be easily
read. The speed of flashing shall not exceed three per second. On pressing the
acknowledgement push button, the audible signal shall be silenced and the
flashing shall change to continuous light, which remains alight until the cause of
fault is removed. The reset push button is then pressed to extinguish the signal
lamps.
2.9.4 The alarm scheme shall be such that a repeat energizing of the audible alarm is
possible on receipt of a new alarm signal, before the alarm circuit has been
completely reset. Alarm indicating lamps shall remain alight until the cause of
alarm is removed.
2.9.5 The lettering shall show white on a dark back ground, alternatively the letter shall
show dark on a white back ground.
2.9.6 Facilities shall be provided for lamp test. The lamp test shall include a test for all
spare windows which shall be identifiable as such under test conditions.
2.9.7 The station battery failure annunciation shall be provided on synchronizing panel.
2.9.8 The alarm and trip function for various annunciations is given below:
141
2.10 CONTROL SWITCHES.

2.10.1 Control switches for circuit breakers and power operated isolators shall be of
discrepancy type and mounted integral with mimic diagram. Circuit breakers
position shall be indicted by the position of switch in relation to the mimic
diagram. The switch shall continue the diagram line with showing „close‟ and
shall be at 90 deg to the line when showing „open‟ positive location of switch in
either of the indicating positions shall be provided, but spring action between
these positions is not essential.
2.10.2 The switches shall be controlled by two separate motions, one shall be for
selection and one for operation. To cause operation, discrepancy control switch
shall first be turned into desired position, when discrepancy lamp shall alight but
no audible alarm shall be given, the switches shall be further turned to effect
operation when the light shall be extinguished. This second operation shall be
possible only by first raising or pressing the switch knob. When the operation is
completed discrepancy light shall extinguish. If the selection switch is to be
abandoned without operation, the control switch shall be turned back into original
position. The direction of rotation shall be marked on the knob.

2.11 ANNUNCIATOR UNIT.

2.11.1 The commonfacia – annunciators shall be of the multi window type (having
individually replaceable window), with individual alarm operated from self seal
in relays and indicated by illumination of the inscribed transparent window. The
number of windows will depend upon the circuit to be indicated. The dimension
of windows of annunciator until shall not be less than 30mm x 30mm.
2.11.2 These drawings also show the typical location of front mounted equipment,
however, the final arrangement and exact quantities of equipment installed shall
be subject to the approval of Engineer.

2.12 CONTROL PANELS.

2.12.1 The types of control panels 500 KV System are:-

WC1 - It is combined control panel for line and auto transformer in one
and half breaker scheme.
WC2 - It is similar to W1, but for two lines.
WC3 - It is similar to W1 but for two transformers.
WC4 - It is control panel for line in double busbar scheme.
WC5 - It is control panel for auto transformer in double busbar scheme.
WC6 - It is synchronizing panel for one and half breaker scheme.
WC7 - It is synchronizing panel for one and a double bus bar scheme.

142
 WC8 - It is control panel for bus coupler.
WC9 - It is control panel for sectionalizer.
2.12.2 The types of control panels for 220 KV System are:-
C1 - It is combined control panel for line and auto transformer in one
and half breaker scheme.
C2 - It is similar to C1, but for two lines.
C3 - It is similar to C1 but for two transformers.
C4 - It is control panel for line in double busbar scheme.
C5 - It is control panel for auto transformer in double busbar scheme.
C6 - It is synchronizing panel for one and a half breaker scheme.
C7 - It is synchronizing panel for double bus bar.
C8 - It is control panel for bus coupler.
C9 - It is control panel for sectionalizer.
2.12.3 The types of control panels for 132 KV System are:-
CP-10 Control panel for 132 KV isolator control line.
CP-11 Control panel for 132 KV bus sectionalizer.
CP-30 Control panel for 132 KV line with mimic for single bus bar.
CP-31 Same as CP-30, but mimic for double bus bar.
CP-32 Same as CP-30, but inverted mimic for double bus bar.
CP-40 Control panel for bus coupler.
CP-50 Control panel for 132 / 11 KV power transformer.
CP-51 Same as CP-50, but with mimic for double bus bar.
CP-60 Control panel for 132 / 66 / 11 KV power transformer.
CP-61 Same as CP-60, but with mimic for double bus bar.
2.12.4 The following dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) of the panels shall be used:
1. 500 KV Control panels (WC1, WC2, & WC3) 2200 x 1000 x 800 mm.
2. 500 KV Control panels (WC4, WC5, WC6, WC7, WC8 & WC9)
2200 x 800 x 800 mm.
3. 220 KV Control panels (C1, C2 & C3) 2200 x 1000 x 800 mm.
4. 220 KV Control panels (C4, C5, C6, C7, C8 & C9) 2200 x 800 x 800 mm.
5. All relay panels for 500 KV and 220 KV. 2200 x 800 x 800 mm.
6. 132 KV Relay panels. 2200 x 800 x 800 mm.
7. 132 KV Control panels. 2200 x 600 x 800 mm.

143
2.13 PROVISIONS FOR SCADA AND REMOTE CONTROL.

2.13.1 Indication and annunciation systems of the panels to ensure easy adaptations to
the future telemetering and remote control requirements from National Control
Center. The contractor shall supply and install contactors, relays and any other
equipment that would be necessary to provide ready connection of remote
terminal until without any adaptation work in the circuitry and wiring for
implementation of SCADA and remote control function.
2.13.2 Identified terminals shall be provided on the terminal blocks of control panels for
easy introduction of trip and close orders through electrically isolated potential
free contacts (N/O logic) for three phase tripping and closing.
2.13.3 For manual and remote closing, a synchro check device shall be provided with an
under voltage logic to by-pass the synchro check device in case of zero voltage on
one side of breaker. This synchro check device and by-pass must be in circuit for
a remote close order.
2.13.4 Identified terminals in the control panels shall be wired to auxiliary contacts of
circuit breakers and isolators.
2.13.5 Identified terminals shall be available for transformer tap position indication
which shall be derived from a potentiometric or indicative pickup with one digital
output available in either of the following forms:-
- One 8 bits parallel register comprising electrically independent potential
free contacts.
- One analog output current comprised between -5 and +5 mA DC.
- Alarm contacts for each stage of transformers overload protection shall be
available on terminal blocks in control panels.
2.13.6 A potential free „ON‟ contact for “Telecom fault” shall be made available on
identified terminals on terminal control panels.
2.13.7 Provision shall be made on voltage and current circuit in order to readily allow
connection of additional transformers and under voltage relays. Connections for
transformers shall be available through self shorting terminals for C.T. Circuits.
Voltage measurements terminals shall be provided from Bus P.T. Circuits.

2.14 ANNUNCIATION ON THE CONTROL PANEL, EVENT RECORDER,

FAULT RECORDER & SCADA.

2.14.1 A common annunciation fascia for each circuit shall be provided and mounted on
the control panel. The annunciation fascia shall be of LED / LCD illuminated
multi window with the individual alarm separated from a self seal-in-unit. The
annunciation shall be indicated by the illumination of a transparent window cover
where the item is inscribed thereon.
2.14.2 Minimum of windows required for each window has been listed below. The final
alarm list shall however be subjected to approval of the Engineer.

144
1). For 500 / 220 KV transformer
Trip Functions
i) Differential Protection Tripped.
ii) Restricted earth fault protection tripped.
iii) H.V. side high set over current protection operated.
iv) L.V. side high set over current protection operated.
v) H.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.
vi) L.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.
vii) Tertiary earth fault protection tripped.
viii) Over excitation protection stage-II tripped.
ix) Over load protection stage-II tripped.
x) H.V. connection protection tripped.
xi) L.V. connection protection tripped.
xii) Overall or rough balance protection tripped.
xiii) Over voltage protection tripped.
xiv) Neutral over current protection trip.
xv) Excess oil temperature protection tripped.
xvi) Excess winding temperature tripped.
xvii) Transformer buchhloz tripped.
xviii) OLTC buchhloz tripped.
xix) Pressure relief valve tripped.
xx) Fire fighting system trip.
2). Alarm Functions.
i) Over excitation relay stage-I alarm.
ii) Over load relay stage-I alarm.
iii) Excess oil temperature alarm (R-Phase).
iv) Excess oil temperature alarm (Y-Phase).
v) Excess oil temperature alarm (B-Phase).
vi) Excess winding temperature alarm (R-Phase).
vii) Excess winding temperature alarm (Y-Phase).
viii) Excess winding temperature alarm (B-Phase).
ix) Transformer buchhloz alarm (R-Phase).
x) Transformer buchhloz alarm (Y-Phase).
xi) Transformer buchhloz alarm (B-Phase).
xii) OLTC buchhloz alarm (R-Phase).
145
 xiii) OLTC buchhloz alarm (Y-Phase).
xiv) OLTC buchhloz alarm (B-Phase).
xv) Pressure relief (R-Phase).
xvi) Pressure relief (Y-Phase).
xvii) Pressure relief (B-Phase).
xviii) Oil level low alarm (R-Phase).
xix) Oil level low alarm (Y-Phase).
xx) Oil level low alarm (B-Phase).
xxi) Differential relay unhealthy.
xxii) Restricted earth fault relay unhealthy.
xxiii) H.V. over current and earth fault relay unhealthy.
xxiv) L.T. over current and earth fault relay unhealthy.
xxv) L.V. connection protection relay unhealthy.
xxvi) Overall or rough balance relay unhealthy.
xxvii) D.C. supply of alarm.
xxviii) Tertiary E / F relay unhealthy.
xxix) Over excitation relay unhealthy.
xxx) H.V. connection protection relay unhealthy.
xxxi) Fire fighting equipment operated (R, Y, B).

NOTE:-
Alarm for serial (iii, xx & xxxi) shall be provided on T/F Aux. Panel.
3). 500 KV Line Protection.
i) Distance protection Set-I pick-up.
ii) Distance protection Set-I Red Phase Trip.
iii) Distance Protection Set-I Yellow Phase Trip.
iv) Distance Protection Set-I Blue Phase Trip.
v) Distance Protection Set-I Zone-I Trip.
vi) Distance Protection Set-I Zone-II Trip.
vii) Distance Protection Set-I Zone-III Trip.
viii) Power Swing Blocking.
ix) Stub protection operated.
x) PLC signal receive.
xi) PLC signal send.
xii) PLC faulty.

146
 xiii) CCVT MCB trip.
xiv) Line over current & earth fault protection trip.
xv) Line high set over current trip.
xvi) Auto reclosure Set-I operated.
xvii) Auto reclosure Set-I blocked.
xviii) Auto reclosure Set-I out of order.
xix) Distance protection Set-I D.C. supply off.
xx) Distance protection Set-II pickup.
xxi) Distance protection Set-II Red phase trip.
xxii) Distance protection Set-II Yellow phase trip.
xxiii) Distance protection Set-II Blue phase trip.
xxiv) Distance protection Set-II Zone-I trip.
xxv) Distance protection Set-II Zone-II trip.
xxvi) Distance protection Set-II Zone-III trip.
xxvii) Auto reclosure Set-II operated.
xxviii) Auto reclosure Set-II blocked.
xxix) Auto reclosure Set-II out of order.
xxx) Distance Protection Set-II D.C. supply off.
xxxi) Distance Protection Set-I A.C. supply off.
xxxii) Distance Protection Set-II A.C. supply off.
xxxiii) Over voltage protection trip.
xxxiv) Unhealthy status of each protective equipment.

4). Shunt Reactor Protection.

Trip Functions.
i) Differential Protection tripped.
ii) Restricted earth fault protection tripped.
iii) High set over current and earth fault protection tripped.
iv) IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.

Alarm Functions.
i) Excess Temperature alarm (R-Phase).
ii) Excess Temperature alarm (Y-Phase).
iii) Excess Temperature alarm (B-Phase).
iv) Excess Winding Temperature alarm (R-Phase).

147
 v) Excess Winding Temperature alarm (Y-Phase).
vi) Excess Winding Temperature alarm (B-Phase).
vii) Buchhloz alarm (R-Phase).
viii) Buchhloz alarm (Y-Phase).
ix) Buchhloz alarm (B-Phase).
x) Pressure Relief alarm (R-Phase).
xi) Pressure Relief alarm (Y-Phase).
xii) Pressure Relief alarm (B-Phase).
xiii) Low Oil alarm (R-Phase).
xiv) Low Oil alarm (Y-Phase).
xv) Low Oil alarm (B-Phase).

5). Breaker Failure Protection.

i) Bus-I Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
ii) Mid Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
iii) Bus-II Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
iv) Bus-I Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
v) Mid Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
vi) Bus-II Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
vii) Bus bar-I Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
viii) Mid Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
ix) Bus bar-II Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
x) D.C. supply off.
xi) A.C. supply off.

6). Trip Circuit Supervision (Alarm).

i) Trip circuit supervision for each breaker faulty alarm.

7). Common Alarms.

Annunciator with minimum twenty four (24) windows shall be
provided to accommodate the following alarms:
i) Annunciator supply fail.
ii) Control board DC MCB trip.
iii) Control board AC MCB trip.
iv) Metering board AC supply fail.
v) E/F DC system – I.
148
 vi) E/F DC system – II.
vii) 220V Battery – 1 discharged.
viii) 220V Battery – 2 discharged.
ix) 220V DC distribution incoming – 1 CB trip.
x) 220V DC distribution incoming – 2 CB trip.
xi) 220V DC system coupler breaker tripped.
xii) 220V DC system outgoing breaker tripped.
xiii) AC distribution incoming – 1 fail.
xiv) AC distribution incoming – 2 fail.
xv) AC distribution coupler CB trip.
xvi) AC distribution outgoing CB trip.
xvii) AC sub distribution outgoing CB trip.
xviii) AC distribution Essential Supply Fail.
xix) Telecom equipment failure.
xx) Bus Bar I Protection Tripped.
xxi) Bus Bar II Protection Tripped.
xxii) Bus Bar-I Wire Supervision.
xxiii) Bus Bar-II Wire Supervision.
xxiv) PT Failure Bus Bar I.
xxv) PT Failure Bus Bar II.
Each breaker and isolator (open & close status) shall be provided for Events
Recorder.
2.14.3 Minimum of windows required for each window has been listed below. The final
alarm list shall however be subjected to approval of the Engineer.

1). For 220 / 132 KV transformer

a). Trip Functions
i). Differential Protection Tripped.
ii). Restricted earth fault protection tripped.
iii). Differential Protection Tripped.
iv) Restricted earth fault protection tripped.
v). H.V. side high set over current protection operated.
vi). L.V. side high set over current protection operated.

149
vii). H.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped
viii). L.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.
ix). Tertiary earth fault protection tripped.
x). Over excitation protection stage-II tripped.
xi). Over load protection stage-II tripped.
xii). H.V & L.V connection protection tripped.
xiii). Neutral Earth Fault protection tripped.
xiv). Overall or rough balance protection tripped.
xv). Excess oil temperature protection tripped.
xvi). Excess winding temperature tripped.
xvii). Transformer buchhloz tripped.
xviii) OLTC buchhloz tripped.
xix). Pressure relief valve tripped.

b). Alarm Functions

i). Over excitation relay stage-I alarm
ii). Over load relay stage-I alarm.
iii). Excess oil temperature alarm.
iv). Excess winding temperature alarm.
v). Transformer & OLTC buchhloz alarm.
vi). Pressure relief alarm.
vii). Differential relay unhealthy.
viii). Restricted earth fault relay unhealthy.
ix). H.V. over current and earth fault relay unhealthy.
x). L.T. over current and earth fault relay unhealthy.
xi). H.V & L.V connection protection relay unhealthy.
xii). Overall or rough balance relay unhealthy.
xiii). Oil level low alarm.
xix). D.C. supply of alarm.
xx). Tertiary E / F relay unhealthy.
xxi). Over excitation relay unhealthy.
xxii). Rough Balance protection relay unhealthy.
xxiii). Fire fighting equipment operated.

150
2). 220 KV Line Protection.
i). Distance protection Set-I pick-up.
ii). Distance protection Set-I Red Phase Trip.
iii). Distance Protection Set-I Yellow Phase Trip.
iv). Distance Protection Set-I Blue Phase Trip.
v). Distance Protection Set-I Zone-I Trip.
vi). Distance Protection Set-I Zone-II Trip.
vii). Distance Protection Set-I Zone-III Trip.
viii). Power Swing Blocking.
ix). Stub protection operated.
x). PLC signal receive.
xi). PLC signal send.
xii). PLC faulty.
xiii). CCVT MCB trip.
xix). Line over current & earth fault protection trip.
xx). Line high set over current trip.
xxi). Auto reclosure Set-I operated.
xxii). Auto reclosure Set-I blocked.
xxiii). Auto reclosure Set-I out of order.
xxiv). Distance protection Set-I D.C. supply off.
xxv). Distance protection Set-II pickup.
xxvi). Distance protection Set-II Red phase trip.
xxvii). Distance protection Set-II Yellow phase trip.
xxviii). Distance protection Set-II Blue phase trip.
xxix). Distance protection Set-II Zone-I trip.
xxx). Distance protection Set-II Zone-II trip.
xxxi). Distance protection Set-II, Zone-III trip.
xxxii).
Auto reclosure Set-II operated.
xxxiii). Auto reclosure Set-II blocked.
xxxiv). Auto reclosure Set-II out of order.
xxxv).
Distance Protection Set-II D.C. supply off.
xxxvi). Distance Protection Set-I A.C. supply off.
xxxvii). Distance Protection Set-II A.C. supply off.

151
3). 220 KV Breaker Failure Protection.
i). Bus-I Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
ii). Mid Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
iii). Bus-II Breaker failure protection Stage-II trip.
iv). Bus-I Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
v). Mid Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
vi). Bus-II Breaker failure protection Stage-I alarm.
vii). Bus bar-I Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
viii). Mid Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
ix). Bus bar-II Breaker failure protection unhealthy.
x). D.C. supply off.
xi). A.C. supply off.

4). Trip Circuit Supervision (Alarm).

i) Trip circuit supervision for each breaker faulty alarm.
5). Common Alarms.
Annunciator with minimum twenty four (24) windows shall be provided to
accommodate the following alarms:
i) Annunciator supply fail.
ii) Control board DC MCB trip.
iii) Control board AC MCB trip.
iv) Metering board AC supply fail.
v) E/F DC system – I.
vi) E/F DC system – II.
vii) 220V Battery – I discharged.
viii) 220V Battery – II discharged.
ix) 220V DC distribution incoming – I CB trip.
x) 220V DC distribution incoming – II CB trip.
xi) 220V DC system coupler breaker tripped.
xii) 220V DC system outgoing breaker tripped.
xiii) AC distribution incoming – I fail.
xiv) AC distribution incoming – II fail.
xv) AC distribution coupler CB trip.
xvi) AC distribution outgoing CB trip.
xvii) AC sub distribution outgoing CB trip.

152
xviii) AC distribution Essential Supply Fail.
xix) Telecom equipment failure.
xx) Bus Bar I Protection Tripped.
xxi) Bus Bar II Protection Tripped.
xxii) Bus Bar-I Wire Supervision.
xxiii) Bus Bar-II Wire Supervision.
xxiv) PT Failure Bus Bar I.
xxv) PT Failure Bus Bar II.

1). For 132/11 KV transformer

Trip Functions
i) Differential Protection Tripped.
ii) Restricted earth fault protection tripped.
iii) H.V. side high set over current protection operated.
iv) L.V. side high set over current protection operated.
v) H.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.
vi) L.V. side IDMT over current and earth fault protection tripped.
vii) Excess oil temperature protection tripped.
viii) Excess winding temperature tripped.
ix) Transformer buchhloz tripped.
x) OLTC buchhloz tripped.
xi) Pressure relief valve tripped.

2). Alarm Functions.

i) Excess oil temperature alarm.
ii) Excess winding temperature alarm.
iii) Transformer & OLTC buchhloz alarm.
iv) Pressure relief alarm.
v) Differential relay unhealthy.
vi) H.V. over current earth fault relay unhealthy.
vii) L.T. over current and earth fault relay unhealthy
viii) Oil level low alarm.
ix) D.C. supply of alarm.
x) Unhealthy status of protective equipment.

153
3). Line Protection.
i) Distance protection pick-up.
ii) Distance protection Red Phase Trip.
iii) Distance Protection Yellow Phase Trip.
iv) Distance Protection Blue Phase Trip.
v) Distance Protection Zone-I Trip.
vi) Distance Protection Zone-II Trip.
vii) Distance Protection Zone-III Trip.
viii) Power Swing Blocking.
ix) PLC signal receive.
x) PLC signal send.
xi) PLC faulty.
xii) CCVT MCB trip.
xiii) Line over current & earth fault protection trip.
xiv) Line high set over current trip.
xv) Auto reclosure operated.
xvi) Auto reclosure blocked.
xvii) Auto reclosure out of order.
xviii) Unhealthy status of protective equipment.

4). Trip Circuit Supervision (Alarm).

i). Trip circuit supervision for each breaker faulty alarm.
5). Common Alarms.
Annunciator with minimum twenty four (24) windows shall be provided to
accommodate the following alarms:
i) Annunciator supply fail.
ii) Control board DC MCB trip.
iii) Control board AC MCB trip.
iv) Metering board AC supply fail.
v) E/F DC system – I.
vi) E/F DC system – II.
vii) 132V Battery – I discharged.
viii) 132V Battery – II discharged.
ix) 132V DC distribution incoming – I CB trip.
x) 132V DC distribution incoming – II CB trip.

154
 xi) 132V DC system coupler breaker tripped.
xii) 132V DC system outgoing breaker tripped.
xiii) AC distribution incoming – I fail.
xiv) AC distribution incoming – II fail.
xv) AC distribution coupler CB trip.
xvi) AC distribution outgoing CB trip.
xvii) AC sub distribution outgoing CB trip.
xviii) AC distribution Essential Supply Fail.
xix) PT Failure Bus Bar – I.
xx) PT Failure Bus Bar – II.
xxi) Telecommunication equipment faulty.

2.15 EVENTS RECORDER AND PRINTER.

2.16.1 The sequential events recording print-out system shall be furnished for minimum
capacity to address upto 1000 inputs. The input initially shall be provided for 512
events. In addition, provision shall be made for sufficient extension for events.
The system shall have reasonably low consumption and will be numerical. It shall
comprise of event, scanning and electronically storing equipment and a printer for
events print out.
2.16.2 Events shall be printed out in order of occurrence regardless of the distribution of
point activity. The capacity of sequential memory shall not be less than 250
levels. If capacity of sequential memory unit is not sufficient to store activity of
all points for events at least 5 millisecond apart, another memory unit shall be
provided to store events activity when the sequential memory is full. However, all
events shall be printed out in order of occurrence.
2.16.3 Terminal blocks are plug-in connectors shall be provided for all external cable
connections. Sufficient terminal shall be furnished to connect the ultimate
capacity of 1,000 field inputs. Spare terminals shall be provided for future field
inputs. Each field input shall have electrically independent, circuit isolation.
Printed out cards shall be physically keyed to prevent insertion of incorrect cards.
2.16.4 The printer shall be high speed, shall print one line per event and preferably, shall
be racked mounted type. Provision shall be made in the design of the events
recorder to include the facility for remote transmission of each event activity. The
printer shall preferably be of dot matrix type using ordinary computer paper.
2.16.5 The system shall include a unit for local annunciations. Some of the critical
events annunciations shall include:
i) Unit fail.
ii) Printer fail.
iii) System is recording.
iv) Low paper.
155
 v) Out of paper.
vi) System supply failure.
2.16.6 Event recorder malfunctions due to one or more of above mentioned reasons shall
be annunciated on 220 KV control panel by a single alarm.
2.16.7 The annunciation shall be followed by wiring isolation / auto shut down of the
faulty component.
2.16.8 The printer shall automatically print the date, month and year at the beginning of
each day. The printer shall print out event in the following sequence:
i) Time: Hours, minutes, seconds, Milli-seconds (24 hour basis).
ii) Nature of extent: „A‟ for abnormal; „N‟ for normal.
iii) Address: Four digit point identification number.
iv) Event: language, description of the events in abbreviated form. Not
more than 48 characters will be required in the format.
2.16.9 The event recorder shall incorporate all necessary output ports / cards (i.e.
Ethernet parallel etc) for connection to sub station PC, master station and printer
considering speed of transformer and location of sub station PC communication
equipment relative to location of panel recorder. Facility to down load the data
should be available.
2.16.10 All adjustment shall be through software. The circuit board access shall be from
the front of event recorder for easy repair replacement if necessary.
2.16.11 The event recorder shall be sealed and dust and moisture proof for long life is the
typically hostile sub station environment.
2.16.12 The event recorder shall have full time on line diagnostics that defect and alarm
and / or indicate the particular diagnostic condition.
2.16.13 Sub station desktop C and colour printer to be provided with necessary furniture
and accessories.
2.16.14 All necessary software and hand ware shall be supplied for fault analysis.
2.16.15 An „IN‟ / „OUT‟ switch shall be provided for printer so that it could be disabled
as and when required.
2.16.16 In case of loss of supply to the recorder, it should not lose it should not lose
whatever has been recorded in its memory if a print out is taken for any event that
should not be got erased from memory.

2.16 FAULT RECORDER.

2.17.1 A FAULT / Disturbance recorder to record graphically the currents, voltages and
frequency during fault conditions as well as the operation of protective relays,
shall monitor each 500, 220, 132 KV feeder and 500 / 220 / 132 KV, auto
transformer.

156
2.17.2 The operation of protection relays and trip relays & CB status of each circuit, and
each of the circuit breaker shall be recorded using digital channels.
2.17.3 In addition to the fast fault recording functions, the recorder shall be capable of
recording slow system disturbances upto 10 minutes. The slow scan recording
mode may be started by the fast scan recording mode of the recorder, and by level
triggering of system operating values. The analogue and digital parameters to be
recorded during system slow disturbances shall be finalized during the
engineering stage of the contract.
2.17.4 Each fault recorder shall have sufficient amount of memory for successful
recording of all faults and transmit / transfer of fault data automatically, to
permanent storing location (substation PC, master station in the system control
centre SCC and remote station in Maintenance Department) even in case of
temporary loss of communication channels.
2.17.5 The following facilities should be provided per circuit (plus minimum of two
analogue and two digital spare channels per fault recorder):
i) Oscilographic channels to record 3 voltages and 4 currents, as well as
separate analogue channels for recording of each auto transformer
neutral current.
ii) Digital channels shall be provided to record chronologically operation
of main relays, trip relays and circuit breaker operations.
iii) Alarm contacts to indicate „fault recorder operated‟ and „fault recorder
faulty‟ in the control room as well as SCADA.
iv) Memory for recording currents, voltages and frequency 10 cycles prior
to the occurrence of the fault.
v) The recording period shall be sufficient to cover a complete auto
recluse cycle. Separate reclosures shall be recorded without loss of
memory.
vi) Master station and sub station PCs shall record and on demand print
the data i.e. the sub station name, feeder name and precise time of the
occurrence of the fault to the nearest millisecond, pre fault signal
level, post fault signal level, fault current duration, designation of all
channels, cause of triggering, length of record etc.
Spare / Unused channels shall be fully equipped.
The data acquisition unit shall be triggered as follows:
i) Level triggering. Change of voltage / current / frequency higher
or lower than set points.
Change of state of a contact on circuit
ii) Event triggering.
protection relays, bus bar protection relays,
etc.
iii) External triggering. Initiation received from other recorder at the
substation.
The channel allocations required shall be approved by NTDC for each phase of
the works.
157
2.17.6 All feeder circuit current and voltage transformer signals and digital input shall be
connected to the fault recorder panel terminal blocks with isolation / shorting /
test facilities (as appropriate).
2.17.7 An „IN‟ / „OUT‟ switching facility is to be provided for digital channels used for
triggering, with an OUT indicating lamp on the panel front, to inhibit operation
during maintenance. Similar facility shall be provided for, 4 Nos. spare switches
per recorder and wired upto terminal blocks.
2.17.8 Cross triggering from other recorder shall be routed through „IN‟ / „OUT‟
switch / software configuration in order to keep the cross-triggering facility out as
and when required.
2.17.9 The use of photographic-type paper that requires special conditions for
developing will not be permitted.
2.17.10 An „IN‟ / „OUT‟ switch should be provided for the printer so that it could be kept
disabled as and when required.
2.17.11 The recorder shall incorporate all necessary output ports / cards (i.e. Ethernet,
parallel, etc.) for connection to substation PC, master station and printer
considering speed of data transfer and location of substation PC and
communication equipment (multiplexer, etc.) relative to location of fault recorder.
Facility to download the data should be available.
2.17.12 In case of loss of supply to the recorder, it should not lose whatever has been
recorded in its memory. Even if a printout is taken for any event that should not
get erased from memory.
2.17.13 All necessary software and hardware shall be supplied for fault analysis.
2.17.14 The fault recorder shall continue to acquire additional faults and / or disturbance
data without interrupting any other tasks already in process and automatically
return to the standby mode after all acquired data is printed and or transmitted.
2.17.15 All calibration adjustments shall be through software. The circuit board access
shall be from the front of the recorder for ease of repair / replacement, if
necessary.
2.17.16 The fault recorder shall be sealed and dust and moisture proof for long life in the
typically hostile sub station environment.
2.17.17 The fault recorder shall have a built-in calendar and clock to provide accurate
data and time, including, Month, Day, Year (or Day, Month, Year). Hour,
Minute, Second and Millisecond of each operation of the recorder. Any linked
FRs will be time coordinated to within one millisecond of each other. Normal
time sync will be from the satellite by use of suitable format / protocol, which
ensures the accuracy of 1 mS (i.e. IRIG-B serial time code, etc.). The system
should be supplied including satellite receiver and antenna.
2.17.18 The fault recorder shall have full time on line diagnostics that detect and alarm
and / or indicate the particular diagnostic condition.
2.17.19 Indicators for these alarms shall be LED type, latching and must be manually
reset.
2.17.20 NTDC has installed a fault recorders master station with all required software and
hardware facilities for data communication, analysis, archiving, etc. in the SCC.
158
 Furthermore, all the information retrieved by the master station will also be
copied to a remote workstation in the Maintenance Department of NTDC.
2.17.21 Contractor under his scope of work shall provide all necessary software and
hardware interfaces for successful integration of fault recorders into the fault
recorders master station and remote work station as well as in the substations to
the satisfactory of NTDC.
2.17.22 Substation desktop PC and colour printer to be provided along with a necessary
furniture and accessories.
2.17.23 All the hardware (PCs as well as printers) is subject to the approval of NTDC.
2.17.24 The print format of the traces shall be continuous rather than a series of dots so
that there is no confusion as to which points belong to which waveforms when
plotting transient conditions during faults.
2.17.25 The system shall be designed such that simple and accurate input to output
calibration may b performed during initial installation and occasionally to change
calibration or verify the accuracy of the overall system calibration. Over all
accuracy error shall be less than 1% of full scale over all operating environment
conditions including temperature and electrical noise.
2.17.26 Fault Recorders shall be connected to a Master Station through the fastest and the
most reliable mean of communication available in the substation. All interfaces to
the master station shall be provided under this contract.
2.17.27 The fault data from the substation shall be able to send to master station based on
criteria such as combination relay operation and circuit breaker status, sensor
trigger etc. user defined combination, as well as automatic sending of fault data to
different destination. Power quality monitoring facility shall be provided.
2.17.28 The detailed instruction for setting up of communication equipment for remote
communication to be provided. There shall not be any password protection to be
kept with the fault recorder. Manufacturer, if any shall be provided to NTDC with
proper instruction to maintain the equipment. If any user programming required
for any equipment while changing any component shall be provided to NTDC
with proper instructions.
2.17.29 The A.C. supply for the desktop P.C. shall be fed from station essential supply.
There shall not be any interruption of the A.C supply to the desktop P.C.
A suitably designed investor fed from station D.C battery with a static switch
automatically transfers the load of the computer and printer in the event of A.C
supply failure without interruption of A.C supply to P.C and printer shall be
provided. The necessary automatic changeover switch, inverter D.C to A.C
supply etc. shall be provided in the substation. Approval all is to be taken for the
inverter separately and it shall be located near the desktop P.C with a proper
encloser. Necessary cabling shall be carried out for the functioning of the system.
2.17.30 Supplier shall submit a list of facilities available in analysis software for NTDC‟s
approval.
2.17.31 The manufacturer will carry out testing and commissioning of fault recorder a
site.
2.17.32 The contractor / supplier shall submit a list of inputs to Fault Recorder.

159
2.17 RECORDING INSTRUMENTS:

The general characteristics of the recording instruments shall be as follows:

2.18.1 Construction:
All recorders shall be of the flush mounted.
2.18.1.1 The voltage recorder shall be of the direct acting type and shall conform to
applicable requirements of relevant. IEC standards Direct Acting Electrical
Recording Instruments (Switchboard and portable types). Al other recorders shall
be of the null balance type conforming to the applicable requirements of relevant
IEC Standards Specifications for Automatic Null Balancing Electrical Measuring
Instruments, or equivalent.
2.18.1.2 All records shall be magnetically shielded allowing 3% maximum error.
2.18.1.3 All the instrument cases shall be dust and moisture tight, with black finish and, as
far as practicable, of the same size and appearance Diving motors shall be rated
for use on 230V, 50Hz, A.C power supply.

2.18.2 Charts:
2.18.2.1 The recorders shall use strip charts at least 225 mm wide, unless otherwise
specified, with rectangular co-ordinates and suitable markings. Chart speed shall
be 75mm per hour unless otherwise specified. All recorders shall have high
visibility scales and indicating pointers and the scales shall be of suitable range.
The diving motors shall be D.C operated.
2.18.2.2 Each recorder shall be provided with an internal legend plate suitably engraved, a
chart supply indicator , chart tear-off, a chart identification rubber stamp reading
the same as the legend plate, chart reroll, writing table, power supply
„ON‟ – „OFF‟ switch and an internal fluorescent light for chart illumination. The
driving motors shall be D.C operated.
2.18.2.3 The Chart reroll shall be self-aligning, smooth in operation, self-contained in the
instrument case and accessible for changing chart rolls.

2.18.2.4 The writing table shall be located under the uncovered part of the chart between
the indicator and reroll in such a manner as to permit convenient writing on the
chart by merely opening the front hinged cover and shall be designed so that it
will not interfere with replacement of charts or access to the recorder mechanism.
The chart driver motor shall driver the chart through suitable reduction gearing
and shall have sufficient torque to start the chart when operating on 80 percent of
its rated voltage.

2.18.3 Motor Controls:

2.18.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, the motor control switch shall be located within the
case so that it can be conveniently reached to start or stop the motor.

160
2.18.4 Voltage Recorder.
2.18.4.1 The voltage recorder shall have two pens, one pen to record voltage of each
busbar. The recorder shall be of continuous lines, curves drawing type.
2.18.4.2 The instrument shall be designed for continuous operation at 150 V, 50 Hz and
shall given full scale deflection at 150V. The accuracy of the recorder shall be
within one percent of the full scale value. Provisions shall be made for the pens to
return to the low end of the scale in the event of VT secondary open circuit.
2.18.4.3 The chart shall be graduated in not greater than 2 KV divisions. An indicating
pointer with scale in accordance with the chart range shall be an integral part of
the instrument.
2.18.4.4 Transducers shall be incorporated in the design. The voltage signal for recorder
operation will be obtained from the respective voltage transformers. The recorder
shall be subjected to dielectric tests in accordance with IEC Standards by the
manufacturer. The overload shall be 200 V continuous and 500 V for 1 second.
The accuracy shall be not less than + 0.5% of full scale. The operating
temperature shall be as specified. The dielectric strength shall be 1500 V rms. For
1 minute. The recorder burden shall not be more than 2 VA.

2.18 OUTDOOR LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES.

2.19.1 Each one and half breaker arrangement shall have marshalling kiosk / local
control cubicle for ⅓ portion of the bay. Each local control cubicle shall have
mimic pertaining to the portion of the bay (it is intended for) with control
switches of circuit breakers, dis-connectors, earthing switches, local / remote
selector switches, local / remote selector switches, ON / OFF Push Buttons all
necessary relays, contactors, MCBs.
2.19.2 These panels shall be installed on foundations and so positioned that the face of
the operator should be towards the equipment for which that cubicle is meant.

2.19.3 Construction:
2.19.3.1 Each panel shall be duplex type i.e. it shall be accessible on both sides. Front side
shall show mimic diagrams and control switches whereas the rear side shall
contain terminal blocks. The cables shall be entered from the bottom of the
panels. The panels shall be designed for protection class IP55.
2.19.3.2 The panels shall be fabricated from stainless steel / galvanized steel sheet not less
than MSG 3 mm thick. However, in case of type tested rigid frame design, the
thickness of steel sheets may be reduced, but not below 2mm, according to
manufacturer‟s standard design. The paint on the outer surface shall withstand the
temperature variations. It should be vermin proof, dustproof and waterproof.
2.19.3.3 The size of the local control cubicle shall be 1800mm x 1800mm x 510mm
(H x W x D).

161
2.19.4 Lighting and Receptacles.
2.19.4.1 Strip light fixtures shall be provided in each marshalling kiosks, one on each side.
These lamps shall be door-operated type.
2.19.4.2 A three pin single phase 230 VAC service receptacle shall be provided in each
cubicle. The lighting and receptacle circuits shall be completely wired.
2.19.4.3 Separate MCBs shall be provided in each panel for lighting and power sockets.
MCBs shall have earth leakage device. D.C. MCBs shall be employed for D.C.

2.19.5 Applications of Space Heaters:

2.19.5.1 Each compartment of each cubicle shall be provided with space heaters of
adequate sizes, controlled with thermostats and humidistats. These heating
circuits shall be completely wired. Separate MCB shall be provided for the
heating circuit. MCBs shall have sensitive earth fault protection for personnel
safety.

2.19.6 Telephone Sockets.

2.19.6.1 Each marshalling kiosk shall be provided with telephone socket, completely
wired and connected to closed circuit telephone system of the substation.

2.19 NAME PLATES.

2.20.1 Each item of equipment mounted on the control desk and recorder board shall be
provided with an engraved name plate.
2.20.2 Name Plates shall be made on laminated sheet plastic 1.6mm thick or of anodized
aluminum 0.8 mm thick engraved to provide white letters on a black background.
Name plates forming a part of the mimic bus layout shall be of the same thickness
as the mimic bus. The name plates shall be fastened to the panels at proper
positions with black finished round head screws.
2.20.3 Samples of engraved nameplates shall be submitted for the approval of the
Engineer. Manufacturer‟s trademarks or nameplates shall be subject to approval
and shall not be mounted on the front of any panel. A nameplate list and detail
drawings shall be furnished to indicate the size of each type, number of characters
per line and number of lines for each size.

162
2.20 EQUIPMENT DETAILS.

CONTROL PANELS.
1. 500 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE WC1 (LINE +TRANSFORMER) Qty.

a). 500 KV Line.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Voltmeter with selector switch One No.

(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

b). HV Side (Auto Transformer). Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow-Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. Test Block. One No.

iii. Voltmeter. One No.

c). LV Side (Auto Transformer). Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

Voltmeter with selector switch
v. One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

- Control switches for 500 KV Circuit Breakers. Three Nos.

- Control switches for 500 KV Isolators, earth switch. Nine Nos.

- Control switch for 500 KV shunt reactor breaker. One No.

163
 - Control switch for 500 KV shunt reactor isolator. One No.

- Key lockable selector switch Five Nos.

- Operation counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. Four Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Ten Nos.

- D.C. supervisions relays. Two Nos.

A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
-
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional
All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary
-
relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

2. 500 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE WC2 (LINE + LINE) Qty.

a). 500 KV Line-I.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

Voltmeter with selector switch
v. One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

b). 500 KV Line-II. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow-Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

164
 vi. Test Block. One No.

vii. Control switches for 500 KV Circuit Breakers. Three Nos

viii. Control switches for Isolators, earth switches. Ten Nos.

ix). Control switch for 500 KV C.B. of shunt reactor. Two Nos

x). Control switch for 500 isolator of shunt reactor.

xi. Key-lockable selector switch for control positions (local / remote) Six Nos.

xii. Operation counters (close-open) for circuit breakers. Five Nos.

xiii. Annunciators having 12 windows. Ten Nos.

xiv. D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary
relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

3. 500 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE WC3 (T/F + T/F). Qty.

a). HV Side (T/F – 1)

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos

- LV Side (TF-1)

- Ammeters (Yellow Phase – Digital). Three Nos

- MW Meter. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter. One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

165
 - HV Side (T/F – 2)

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase – Digital). Three Nos

- Test Block. One Nos.

b). LV Side (TF-2)

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase – Digital) Three Nos

- MV meter One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter. One No.

Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

- Control switches for 500 KV circuit breakers. Three Nos

- Control switches for 500 KV isolators. Eight Nos

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) Four Nos

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. Three Nos

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Ten Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary
relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

166
4. 500 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE WC4 WITH DOUBLE BUS
Qty.
BAR SINGLE BREAKER ARRANGEMENT.

- 500 KV Line

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- MV Meters. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(Position : : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

- Control Switches for 500 KV circuit breakers. One No.

- Control switches for 500 KV isolators, earth switch. Four Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local remote) Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. One Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Four Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
-
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary
-
relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

5. 500 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE WC5 WITH DOUBLE BUS

Qty.
BAR SINGLE BREAKER ARRANGEMENT FOR 500 / 220 KV
ATB.
H.V. Side

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

167
 L.V. Side.

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- MW Meters. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter. One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. Two Nos.

- Control Switches for 500 KV circuit breakers. One No.

- Control switches for 500 KV isolators, earth switch. Three Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local remote) Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. One Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Four Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary

relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

6. 500 KV SYNCHRONIZING PANEL WC6 / WC7 Qty.

- Double frequency meter. One No.

- Double voltmeter. One No.

- Synchro scope. One No.

- Voltmeter. Two Nos.

- Frequency meter. Two Nos.

168
 - Timer. According to
approved scheme.
- Annunciator. According to
approved scheme.
- Synchronizing relay. One No.

- Key lockable selector. One No.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary

relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

7. 500 KV BUS COUPLER PANEL WC8. Qty.

- Voltmeter (Yellow Phase – digital). Three Nos.

Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

- Control Discrepancy Switch for circuit breaker. One No.

- Control Discrepancy Switch for isolators. Two No.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote). Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary

relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

169
8. 500 BUS SECTIONALIZER PANEL WC9. Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow Phase – digital). Three Nos.

Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

iii. Control Discrepancy Switch for circuit breaker. One No.

iv. Control discrepancy switch for Isolators. Two Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote). Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary

relays, MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass
cable glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater,
humidity sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and
installation.

EQUIPMENT DETAILS.

CONTROL PANELS.

1. 220 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE C1 (LINE + TRANSFORMER) Qty.

a). 220 KV Line.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

170
v. Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

b). HV Side (220 KV Auto Transformer). Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow-Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. Test Block. One No.

iii. Voltmeter. One No.

c). LV Side (132 KV Auto Transformer). Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

Voltmeter with selector switch
v. One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

- Control switches for 220 KV Circuit Breakers. Three Nos.

- Control switch for 220 KV circuit breaker of shunt reactor. One No.

- Control switch for 220 KV isolator of shunt reactor. One No.

- Control switches for 220 KV Isolators, earth switch. Nine Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch Five Nos.

- Operation counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. Four Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Ten Nos.

- D.C. supervisions relays. Two Nos.

A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
-
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional

171
 All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
-
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

2. 220 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE C2 (LINE + LINE) Qty.

a). 220 KV Line-I.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

Voltmeter with selector switch
v. One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

b). 220 KV Line-II. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow-Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. MW meter. One No.

iii. MVAR meter. One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(positions : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

vi. Test Block. One No.

vii. Control switches for 220 KV Circuit Breakers. Three Nos.

viii. Control switches for Isolators, earth switches. Ten Nos.

ix. Control switch for 220 KV circuit breaker for shunt reactor. Two Nos.

x. Control switch for 220 KV isolator for shunt reactor. One Nos.

xi. Key-lockable selector switch for control positions (local / remote) Six Nos.

xii. Operation counters (close-open) for circuit breakers. Five Nos.

172
 xiii. Annunciators having 12 windows. Ten Nos.

xiv. D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

3. 220 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE C3 (T/F + T/F). Qty.

a). HV Side (220 KV T/F – 1)

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- LV Side (TF-1) Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow Phase – Digital). Three Nos.

- MW Meter. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter. One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

b). HV Side (T/F – 2) Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase – Digital). Three Nos.

- Test Block. One Nos.

- LV Side (132 KV TF-2) Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase – Digital) Three Nos.

- MV meter One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

173
 - Digital Power Meter. One No.
Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

- Control switches for 220 KV circuit breakers. Three Nos.

- Control switches for 132 KV circuit breakers. Two Nos.

- Control switches for 220 KV isolators. Eight Nos.

- Control switches for 132 KV isolators. Four Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) Five Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. Five Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Eight Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

4. 220 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE C4 WITH DOUBLE BUS BAR

Qty.
SINGLE BREAKER ARRANGEMENT.
- 220 KV Line

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- MV Meters. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch One No.
(Position : : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

174
 - Control Switches for 220 KV circuit breakers. One No.

- Control switches for 220 KV isolators, earth switch. Four Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local remote) Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. One No.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Four Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
-
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
-
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

5. 220 KV CONTROL PANEL TYPE C5 WITH DOUBLE BUS BAR

Qty.
SINGLE BREAKER ARRANGEMENT.
220 / 132 KV Transformer H.V. Side

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- Voltmeter. One No.

L.V. Side. Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

- MW Meters. One No.

- MVAR Meter. One No.

- Digital Power Meter. One No.

- Voltmeter with selector switch
One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. Two Nos.

- Control Switches for 220 KV circuit breakers. One No.

- Control switches for 220 KV isolators. Three Nos.

- Control switch for 132 KV circuit breaker. One No.

175
 - Control switch for 132 KV Isolators. Two Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local remote) Three Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – Open) for circuit breakers. Two Nos.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Four Nos.

- D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

6. 220 KV SYNCHRONIZING LPANEL C6 / C7 Qty.

- Double frequency meter. One No.

- Double voltmeter. One No.

- Synchro scope. One No.

- Voltmeter. Two Nos.

- Frequency meter. Two Nos.

- Timer. According to
approved
scheme.
- Annunciator. According to
approved
scheme.
- Synchronizing relay. One No.

- Key lockable selector. One No.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

176
 - All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

7. 220 KV BUS COUPLER PANEL C8. Qty.

- Voltmeter (Yellow Phase – digital). Three Nos.

Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

- Control Discrepancy Switch for circuit breaker. One No.

- Control Discrepancy Switch for isolators. Two Nos.

- Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote). Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, brass cable glands, mimic,
lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity sensor, internal
light to complete the scheme and installation.

8. 220 KV BUS SECTIONALIZER PANEL C9. Qty.

- Ammeters (Yellow Phase – digital). Three Nos.

Voltmeter with selector switch
- One No.
(Position : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N,O)

- Test Block. One No.

iii. Control Discrepancy Switch for circuit breaker. One No.

iv. Control discrepancy switch for Isolators. Two Nos.

177
 - Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) Two Nos.

- Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

- Annunciators having 12 windows. Two Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

EQUIPMENT DETAILS.

132 KV CONTROL PANELS.

1. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP10

Sr.No. Description. Qty.

i). Control & Discrepancy Switches for Isolators. Two Nos.

ii). D.C. Supervision relay. One No.

iii). Annunciator block 8 windows. Three Nos.

iv). Supervision Lamp, neon type. One No.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays, MCBs,
links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable glands, mimic,
lugs, ferrules, labels, mimic power sockets, heater, humidity sensor, internal
light to complete the scheme and installation.

178
2. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP30. Qty.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) (0 – 400 A) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iii. MVAR meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Test Block. One No.

vi. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV Circuit Breaker. One No.

vii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. Three Nos.

viii. Key lockable selector switch. One No.

ix. Operation counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

x. Annunciators having 8 windows. Three Nos.

xi. D.C. supervisions relays. Three Nos.

xii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and

all equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

3. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP31. Qty.

i. Ammeters description (Yellow Phase digital) (0 – 400 A) Three Nos.

ii. MW meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iii. MVAR meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iv. Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Test Block. One No.

vi. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV Circuit Breakers. One No.
179
 vii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. Three Nos.

viii. Key-lockable selector switch for control positions (local / remote) One No.

ix. Operation counters (close-open) for circuit breakers. One No.

x. Annunciators having 8 windows. Three Nos.

xi. D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

xii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

4. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP32. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. MW meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iii. MVAR meter (300 – 0 – 300 MW). One No.

iv Digital Power Meter. One No.

v. Test Block. One No.

vi. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV circuit breakers. One No.

vii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. Four Nos.

viii. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote). One No.

ix. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

x. Annunciators having 8 windows. Three Nos.

xi. D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

xii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

180
 - A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

5. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP40 / CP11. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital). Three Nos.

ii. Test Block. One No.

iii. Control & Discrepancy switches for 132 KV isolators. Two Nos. + Two Nos.

iv. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) One No.

v. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

vi. Annunciators having 8 windows. Two Nos.

vii. D.C. supervision relays. Two Nos.

viii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

ix. Voltmeter with selector switch Two Nos.

(Position : : R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N, O) Only For CP-40

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

6. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP50. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital) (0 – 150 A). Three Nos.

ii. Digital Power Meter. One No.

181
 iii. Test Block. One No.

iv. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV circuit breaker. One No.

v. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. One No. + One No.

vi. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) One No.

vii. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

viii. Annunciators having 8 windows. Three Nos.

ix. DC supervision relays. Two Nos.

x. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

7. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP51. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow – Phase Digital) (0 – 150 A). Three Nos.

ii. Digital Power Meter. One No.

iii. Test Block. One No.

iv. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV circuit breaker. One No.

v. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. Two Nos.

vi. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) One No.

vii. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. One No.

viii. Annunciators having 8 windows. Four Nos.

ix. D.C supervision relay. Two Nos.

x. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

182
 - All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

8. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP60. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow Phase - Digital) (0 – 150 A). Three Nos.

ii. Ammeters (Yellow Phase - Digital) (0 – 400 A). Three Nos.

iii. Digital Power Meter. One No.

iv. Test Block. Two Nos.

v. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV circuit breaker. One No.

vi. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 66 KV circuit breaker. One No.

vii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. One No.

viii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 66 KV isolators. One No.

ix. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) Two Nos.

x. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. Two Nos.

xi. Annunciators having 8 windows. Four Nos.

xii. DC supervision relays. Two Nos.

xiii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

9. CONTROL PANEL TYPE CP61. Qty.

i. Ammeters (Yellow Phase - Digital) (0 – 150 A). Three Nos.

ii. Ammeters (Yellow Phase - Digital) (0 – 400 A). Three Nos.

183
 iii. Digital Power Meter. One No.

iv. Test Block. Two Nos.

iv. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV circuit breaker. One No.

v. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 66 KV circuit breaker. One No.

vi. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 132 KV isolators. Two Nos.

vii. Control & Discrepancy Switches for 66 KV isolators. One No.

viii. Key lockable selector switch for control position (local / remote) Two Nos.

ix. Operation Counters (close – open) for circuit breakers. Two Nos.

x. Annunciators having 8 windows. Four Nos.

xi. DC supervision relays. Two Nos.

xii. Supervision Lamp, neon type. Three Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all
equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.
- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,
MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

Note:
i. For 132 KV double bus bar arrangement, mimic for Busbar PTs.
should be mounted on 132 KV bus coupler panel CP-40.
ii. For 132 KV single bus bar arrangement, mimic for Busbar PTs.
should be mounted on transformer control panel.

3.24 500 KV / 220 KV Local Control Cubicles for Line Bay with Shunt Qty.
Breaker (Bus Side Breakers).
- D.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control double pole, 10A, Ten Nos.
10 KA 220 V DC.

- A.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control, single phase, 10A, Ten Nos.
10K, 230V A.C.

184
 - Auxiliary contactor 220V DC (contact arrangement shall be as per As per approved
scheme.
approved scheme).

- Auxiliary relay 220V DC. Ten Nos. Contact

arrangement as per
approved scheme.
- Time Relay 220V DC. Two Nos.

- Emergency push button. One No.

- Two way switch. Two Nos.

- Push button. Eight Nos.

- Lock Remote switch. Two Nos.

- Circuit Breaker Maintenance Switch. One No.

- Key operated switch. Four Nos.

- Semaphore Indicator. Five Nos.

- No voltage relay 110V AC. Three Nos.

- Telephone Socket. One No.

- Magnetic contactor. One No.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

3.25 500 KV / 220 KV Local Control Cubicles for Transformer Bay Qty.
(Bus Side Breakers).
- D.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control double pole, 10A, Ten Nos.
10 KA 220 V DC.

- A.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control, single phase, 10A, Ten Nos.
10K, 230V A.C.

185
 - Auxiliary contactor 220V DC (contact arrangement shall be as As per approved
scheme.
per approved scheme)

- Auxiliary relay 220V DC. Ten Nos. Contact

arrangement as per
approved scheme.
- Time Relay 220V DC. Two Nos.

- Emergency push button. One No.

- Two way switch. Two Nos.

- Push button. Six Nos.

- Lock Remote switch. Two Nos.

- Circuit Breaker Maintenance Switch. One No.

- Key operated switch. Three Nos.

- Semaphore Indicator. Four Nos.

- Telephone Socket. One No.

- Magnetic contactor. One No.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

3.26 500 KV / 220 KV Local Control Cubicles (Mid Breakers). Qty.

- D.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control double pole, 10A, Ten Nos.
10 KA 220 V DC.

- A.C. miniature circuit breaker with N/C control, single phase, 10A, Ten Nos.
10K, 230V A.C.

- Auxiliary contactor 220V DC (contact arrangement shall be as per As per approved

scheme.
approved scheme)

186
- Auxiliary relay 220V DC. Ten Nos. Contact
arrangement as per
approved scheme.
- Time Relay 220V DC. Two Nos.

- Emergency push button. One No.

- Two way switch. Two Nos.

- Push button. Four Nos.

- Lock Remote switch. Two Nos.

- Circuit Breaker Maintenance Switch. Two No.

- Key operated switch. Two Nos.

- Semaphore Indicator. Three Nos.

- Telephone Socket. One No.

- Magnetic contactor. One No.

- Interposing C.T (1:1) Metering Class. Six Nos.

- A set of material such as panels, wiring, terminals and all

equipment / devices necessary to complete scheme functional.

- All other miscellaneous and necessary items such as auxiliary relays,

MCBs, links, terminals, test points, wiring, earthing, brass cable
glands, mimic, lugs, ferrules, labels, power sockets, heater, humidity
sensor, internal light to complete the scheme and installation.

187
2.21 CONTROL PANELS
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. a) Manufacturer.
b) Country of manufacture.
2. Type.
3. TEST CERTIFICATES:
a) Issuing Authority.
b) No. and date.
4. CONSTRUCTION:
Type.
Standard.
Material and Thickness of Sheet.
Dimensions & Weight:
- Height.
- Width.
- Depth.
- Weight.
Degree of protection.
Tolerance for Dimensions.
Type of Door.
Type of arrangement for lifting
complete cubicle.
Diameter of lifting eyes.
Arrangement to protect against
vermin and dust
5. Material of gaskets if applicable
6. PAINTING:
No. of coats of painting applied:

188
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
7. EARTHING.
- Material of copper earth strip for
earthing.
- Cross section of copper earth strip.
8. MIMIC BUS:
- Size of strips of mimic bus:
i) Width.
ii) Thickness.
- Material of strip of mimic bus.
- Colour of Strips of mimic bus.
9. INSTRUMENTS & CONTROL:
a) Annunicator.
- Manufacturer.
- Type of Designation.
- Operating voltage.
- Tolerance in operating voltage,
# %
- Number of windows.
- window Size.
b) Ammeter.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type.
- Indication range.
- Accuracy.
- Technical catalogue provided.
c) Watt-meter.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type.

189
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Indication range.
- Accuracy.
- Technical catalogue provided.
d) VAR meter.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type.
- Indication range.
- Accuracy.
- Technical catalogue provided.
e) Synchronoscope.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type.
- Indication range.
- Technical catalogue provided.
f) Frequency meter.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type.
- Indication range.
- Technical catalogue provided.
g) Control Switches.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type Designation.
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
h) Instrument Switches.
- Manufacturer.

190
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type Designation
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
i) Current Test Blocks.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type Designation.
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
j) Voltage Test Blocks.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type Designation.
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
k) Test Switches.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of manufacture.
- Type
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
- Technical catalogue provided.
l) Terminal Blocks & Terminal.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Voltage rating.
- Type
- Voltage rating.

191
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Current rating.
- Technical catalogue provided.
l) Terminal Blocks & Terminal.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
- Technical catalogue provided.
m) Indication Lights / Alarms.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Voltage rating.
- Current rating.
- Series Resistance.
- Technical catalogue provided.
n) Watt Transducer.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Range.
- Output.
- Impedance.
- Accuracy (% of all scale).
- Technical catalogue provided.
o) VAR Transducer.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.

192
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Range.
- Output.
- Impedance.
- Accuracy (% of all scale).
- Technical catalogue provided.

p) Transducer, Ammeter, Volt

meter and Power Factor
meter.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Range.
- Output.
- Impedance.
- Accuracy (% of all scale).
q) Keys for synchronizing and
instrument Switches.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Technical catalogue provided.
r) Mimic bus.
- Size of strips of mimic bus (with x
thickness)
- Colour of strips of mimic bus.

s) D.C. Miniature Circuit

Breaker
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Rated Current.
- Rated Breaking Current.

193
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Characteristic
- Whether it is equipped with
magnet. (Yes / No)
t) A.C. Miniature Circuit
Breaker.
- Manufacturer.
- Country of Manufacture.
- Type.
- Rated Current.
- Rated Breaking Current.
- Characteristic.

194
 VOLTAGE AND POWER RECORDER PANELS.

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. Manufacturer.
2. Country of Manufacture.
3. Type.
4. Technical catalogue provide.
5. TEST CERTIFICATES:
a) Issuing Authority.
b) No. and Date.
6. CONSRUCTION:
- Type.
- Standard.
- Material and Thickness of Sheet.
DIMENSIONS & WEIGHT:
- Height.
- Width
- Weight.
7. Degree of protection.
8. VOLTAGE RECORDERS:
- Manufacturer.
- Type designation.
- VT ratio.
- Accuracy class.
- Auxiliary supply voltage
- Chart speed.
- Adjustment range of
chart speed.
- No. of pens.
- Voltage indication range

195
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- Whether provision for
telemetering available.
9. WATT AND VAR RECORDER:
- Manufacturer.
- Type designation.
- VT ratio.
- Accuracy class.
- Auxiliary supply voltage
- Chart speed.
- Adjustment range of
chart speed.
- No. of pens.
- Whether transducer used

196
 EVENT RECORDER PANELS.

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. Manufacturer.
2. Country of manufacturer.
3. Type.
4. Input capacity.
5. Memory levels:
i) Sequential.
ii) Non sequential.
6. Printer type.
7. Synchronous clock voltage rating.
8. Ground detection (type).
9. Input source.
10. Source withstand.
11. Isolation levels.
12. Operating temperature range.
13. Weight.
14. Dimension:
i) Weight.
ii) Width.
iii) Depth.
15. List of annunciation provided.
List of attached drawings and other
16.
documentation.
17. Technical catalogue provided.

197
 FAULT RECORDER / AUTOMATIC
TRANSIENT RECORDING OSCILLOGRAPH.

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. Manufacturer.
2. Country of manufacturer.
3. Type.
4. Dimensions and weight:
i) Weight.
ii) Width.
iii) Depth.
iv) Weight.
v) List of disturbances which the recording
oscillograph is capable of recording.
vi) List of annunciation provided.
5. Channel capacity.
i) Analog.
ii) Digital.
6. Signal patching capacity.
7. Sample rate.
8. Transient response.
9. Time resolution.
10. Event resolution.
11. Frequency response.
12. Technical catalogue provided.
13. Amplitude resolution.
14. Dynamic range.
15. Signal to noise ratio.
16. Writing speed of printer.
17. Pre fault memory.

198
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
18. Input source.
19. Surge withstand capability.
20. Operating temperature range
21. List of attached drawings and other documents
(state numbers).

RELAYS AND PROTECTION SYSTEM.

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. Relay Panel:
a) Manufacturer‟s name.
b) Address for
correspondence.
c) Fax Reference.
d) Type Designation.
e) TEST CERTIFICATES
- Issuing Authority.
- No. and Date.
f) RELAY PANEL
DIMENSIONS
- Height.
- Width.
- Depth.
- Weight.
- Material and thickness of
Sheet.

199
 ENERGY METER PANELS.

Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
1. Manufacturer.
2. Country of manufacturer.
3. Type.
Technical catalogue
4.
provided.
5. Construction:
- Type.
- Standard.
- Thickness of sheet.
- Dimensions.
- Tolerance for dimensions.
- Degree of protection.
- Type of door.
- Total No. of energy meter
installed on one panel.
a) Watt-hour
b) Var-hour.
6. Watt-hour Meters.
- Manufacturer.
- Type designation.
- Accuracy.
- CT ratio.
- VT ratio.
- Front dimensions.
- Range of register.
7. Var-hour Meters.
- Manufacturer.
- Type designation.
- Accuracy.

200
Item
Description. Unit. Requirement.
No.
- CT ratio.
- VT ratio.
- Front dimensions.
- Range of register.

201
2.22 SCHEDULE OF QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
NOTE:-
1. Please supply the following information with the bid separately and
medicate herein its reference where this information is available.
2. Non submission of the required information may result in rejection of
the bid.
Sr. BID
INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED. REFERENCES.
No.
1. Name of bidder, business address and country of incorporation.
2. Type of firm whether individual owned, partnership, corporation or
Joint Venture and the name of its owners or partners.
3. Annual report or qualification statement giving general description of
the firm, sort and loss of business carried out, balance sheet profile and
loss statement turn over and business done by the firm, duly
authenticated.
4. Location and address of manufacturing facilities.
5. Full description of factories owned and the annual manufacturing
capacities of the various items made therein.
6. Detail of the factory or factories where the offered equipment is
proposed to be manufactured. This description should include the
facilities and capacities of the particular factories and the processes
used in manufacturing. Where parts or components are purchased
outside. The details of equipment purchased and the name of the
suppliers.
7. Detail of description of the quality control, testing and research
facilities. If the equipment is manufactured under license, the name of
the licenser and details of the licensing arrangement such as duration of
the license. The facilities provided to the bidders by the licenser and
whether future improvements are available or not etc. A copy of the
license agreement may be attaché along with copies of amendments /
addenda, if any to the same.
8. Names, qualifications and experience of the principal technical
personnel (attached additional sheets, if required).
9. The time since the manufacturer has been in this business and the time
since he has been doing work of similar nature.
10. The time since the particular model of equipment offered has been
manufactured and the time for which it has been in service.
11. Reference lists of similar works done by the bidders in his country and
abroad indicating the name of customer, description and quality of
product, year of supply and the approximate value (attach additional
sheets if required).
12. Banking reference, name of Banks and addresses may be given to
whom references regarding finance at capability of the bidder may be
made.

SEAL & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER.

202
2.23 SHIPPING INFORMATION

Shipping Information.

Mass of each Size of Packing Cases Number of

Case (kg). H x W x D (mm) Cases.

203
2.24 SCHEDULE
LIST OF DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
(To be Completed and Signed by the Tenderer)
It will be assumed that the Tenderer‟s offer fully complies with the Specification in all respects unless deviations are listed in this Schedule. The
deviations indicated anywhere else directly or indirectly in the offer by way of „notes‟ or „technical review‟ or any other document will not be
considered as deviations unless listed out in this schedule. Tenderers are also required to fill up this schedule in cases where the guaranteed
particulars are deviating from the specification requirement. Otherwise compliance with the specification shall be assumed even though the
guaranteed Particulars in Volume IV filled in the tenderer may indicate differently.

Sr. Page No. of PARTICULARS.

Clause No.
No. Spec.
As Specified. As Offered.

STAMPED AND SIGNED BY THE TENDERER.

TENDERER‟S NAME AND ADDRESS.

204
 CONTENTS

3.1 General Requirements.

3.2 Architecture.

3.3 Dependability.

3.4 Key Performances.

3.5 PCMS Interfaces.

3.6 Equipment and Services.

3.7 Design Philosophy.

3.8 Substation Control and Monitoring Functions.

3.9 Exchange of Signal.

3.10 Communication Protocols Inside the Substation.

3.11 Panel Integration.

3.12 PCMS Expansion and Enhancement.

3.13 Central Functions.

3.14 Main Functions.

3.15 Control Procedure.

3.16 Alarm Management.

3.17 User Rights.

3.18 Tele Control Gateway.

3.19 Sequence of Events.

3.20 Archive.

3.21 Automation.

3.22 Alarm Functions.

3.23 Engineering Tools.

3.24 Simulation.

205
3.25 Project Requirements.

3.26 Project Management Documentation.

3.27 Tests.

3.28 Commissioning.

3.29 Site Acceptance Test.

3.30 Training.

3.31 Experience.

3.32 Quality Management.

3.33 Spare Parts.

3.34 Documentation.

3.35 Applicable Standards.

3.36 Table -1 Technical Schedule.

206
SECTION – III PROTECTION, CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

This Specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, delivery,

transportation and erection as well as the commissioning of all material and
equipment.
3.1.1 The PCMS shall provide:

- Control, monitoring and supervision functions, complete with equipment

interfaces and cabling for the system of the entire substation.
- Measurements and alarm settings.
- Interface to station voltage regulation equipment.
- Event logging / fault monitoring of numerical relays.
- Access to fault records of all the numerical relay / Bay control unit /
Intelligent electronic Device.
- Alarm annunciation.
- Interlocking functions for parallel operation.
- Synchronizing permissive based on voltage selection scheme.
- Automatic sequential control of the bay.
- PCMS / NPCC communication interface over the specified routes / media.
- Communication / interrogation with all the connected devices with
networking abilities.
- Hand Dressing / Safety Tagging.
- Dedicated separate password protected accesses hierarchy for the PCMS
System administrators.
- A minimum of 8 access level hierarchy with password protection.
- Selection of points of control such as, local station or PCMS, Remote
NPCC etc. with „bump-less‟ transfer amongst them.
- Adequate Digital, Analogue and pulsed I/O Racks and equipment for all
the connected devices that do not have networking capabilities.
- Easy maintainability, static and dynamic graphical configuration, editing,
additions of displays with reasonable provisions for up-gradations.
3.1.2 All components shall be of approved and reliable design. The highest degree of
uniformity and plug and play inter-change-ability shall be attained. The design
shall facilitate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair of the components.
3.1.3 If not, otherwise approved, a design concept shall be applied using
decentralized modules for alarm (monitoring) and tripping functions operating
independently of each other.

207
3.1.4 The equipment shall be completely assembled as far as possible at the
Contractor‟s premises e.g. shop welding of thermometer wells and other
connections, wiring of boards, desks, etc, including installations of internals,
test of equipment, including combinations, i.e. systems of control, supervision
and protection equipment, shall be performed at manufacturer‟s test
field / laboratory prior to shipment to site.
3.1.5 All components shall be suitable for the local climate, and the cubicles and
panels shall be dust and moisture-proof to withstand all prevailing climatic
conditions. The specified maximum ambient temperature shall be taken into
consideration in closed rooms, as the perfect operation of the air-condition
system in the rooms shall be assumed as not guaranteed. The Contractor shall
design the systems and select equipment accordingly.
3.1.6 Open-air installed parts shall be protected against direct sun light / radiation by
means of adequate and almost totally corrosion free steel covers, and shall be
able to withstand all other prevailing climatic conditions including rains and
sand storms. Rain sheds / Weather Proof containers or cubicles shall be
provided where necessary.
3.1.7 All instrumentation and control equipment shall be capable of continuous
satisfactory operation within the specified variation in supply voltage and
frequency, and during an overlapped change of the supply.
3.1.8 All work related to a fully functional PCMS system shall be considered. This
shall include any modification work which had to be done on the existing
stations and the load dispatch centre, NPCC.
3.1.9 A modern State-of-the-Art Computerized (microprocessor-based) flexible and
freely extendable open architecture Protection Control and Monitoring System
(PCMS) shall be designed, manufactured, installed and commissioned for the
substation. To minimize build costs, it shall be fully distributed and thereby
eliminate unnecessary plant cabling. Appropriate connection take up points
shall be provided in the system architecture to connect and assimilate
intelligent electronic devices of other manufacturers that provide connectivity
with acceptable international non-proprietary protocols.
3.1.10 Given the critical nature of the PCMS, it is essential that its architecture
provide a well-engineered and sound basis for operation, maintenance and
future expansion of the substation. Therefore, it shall be possible to alter,
extend or upgrade any element of the substation by the simple addition of
hardware and through simple software configuration.
3.1.11 The design shall adhere to the latest in technology and engineering practice,
ensuring an inherent high degree of reliability and safety to personnel.
Notwithstanding, it shall utilize the latest hardware and software available
provided that these are field proven with a minimum of three years operational
deployment.
3.1.12 The Substation Control System is such a critical part of the operation of the
modern Substation such as the proposed ones, particular emphasis is placed on
redundancy, availability and real-time performance. The system shall be
reliable in continuous operation and shall be capable of meeting an overall
reliability of 99.98 percent.

208
3.1.13 Real-time shall mean, microprocessor equipment, which incorporates a real-
time multitasking operating system.
3.1.14 The Contractor shall ensure that the NPCC Islamabad and the proposed PCMS
Communicate seamlessly with one another. IEC 60870-5-101 protocol shall
apply for communication with NPCC. This protocol is necessary to maintain
on-line communication to exchange signals with NPCC by report-by-exception
technique during a scanning cycle for information on status changes, alarms,
events, metering values, tap-position indications, control commands, parameter
loading etc. The link shall be commissioned on an unbalanced mode using a
master-follower relationship.
3.1.15 The Bidder shall note that interoperable features of the IEC protocol should be
jointly studied and determined by the PCMS supplier and the NTDC Engineer
to enable these two systems to work in union on a common protocol format.
This format should be submitted for NTDC Engineer for study and approval.
3.1.16 However, to facilitate improvements in performance and changes in the
communication architecture in the future, the PCMS design should be one of
an easily extendable, flexible and modular architectural platform to support all
the IEC interoperable features and options available in the data link and
physical layers. The bidder should therefore confirm facilities in the PCMS
design for supporting multiple network configurations, and hardware and
software for transferring data in future in a balanced mode of link operation at
64 Kbps.
3.1.17 The PCMS shall be designed to replace conventional means of monitoring and
control such as RTUs. The PCMS design shall take into account the
requirements of control, metering without interface transducers, hardwired
interlocking, monitoring, voltage regulation, load control tap change control,
load balancing and meteorology.
3.1.18 Future extensions shall be possible by the simple addition of hardware at bay
level and configuration of database at station level. The PCMS design and
performance shall include all the necessary provisions for signal allocation,
display mimic, etc. for possible future extensions. Hardware supply shall be
limited to the specified feeders, but wired point (s) shall be provided for
extension bays: the facilities shall include all common equipment, wiring and
space, but not plug-in hardware modules. Numbers of extension bays required
at this facility are shown on the Single Line Diagrams.
3.1.19 Workstation, monitors, printers and other peripheral devices shall remain
operational in the event of Station AC supply failure, drawing auxiliary power
from a sine wave UPS connected to a dual input supply from both the 220 /
110 V station battery and an incoming AC supply.
3.1.20 Both for the PCMS and the interfacing to the NPCC, all required hardware and
software shall be provided, including all wiring, panels and necessary
auxiliaries, even though not every item may be specified in detail. Further,
facilities should also be included in the design to place redundant data
communicating equipment for sending and receiving information over two
independent data transmission routes / media, for instance over two separate
OPGW‟s.

209
3.1.21 The future availability of equipment spares for at least fifteen years from the
date of commissioning shall be guaranteed and the offer shall include stating
the escalation formula to be applied to prices.
3.1.22 The Data Points / Tele Information Points for exchange of information
between NPCC and PCMS station, should be sent in the form of Application
Service Data Units with Information Object Address (IOA) should be prepared
for each bay to enable the NPCC to extend his database for networking the
PCMS. All engineering, including NPCC specific implementation, FAT and
SAT shall be carried out by the manufacturer of the PCMS. The SAT shall
include end-to-end test with the NPCC for all information points (signal, tele-
measurement, command etc). The Data Points / Tele Information Points list
and grouping shall be prepared according to NTDC Standards and the
Contractor shall obtain explicit approval of these documents.
3.1.23 Only those suppliers having adequate references of proven PCMS systems
based on microprocessor technology, shall be considered. Proof of experience
in HV to EHV AIS / GIS substations shall be submitted. PCMS hardware shall
have at least three years of site operating experience.
3.1.24 All microprocessors within main PCMS elements shall be a minimum of
32 bits.
3.1.25 Bidders shall list the exact characteristics of the devices used in their
equipment. Equipment of any type using older technology such as those based
on 8/16 bit microprocessor designs shall not be proposed.
3.1.26 Bidders shall provide a design evolution history over time. This shall clearly
demonstrate the future direction of development of the design and how such
future enhancements will be guaranteed as compatible with systems currently
being proposed. Bidders shall justify their choice of technology based on the
age of the design.
3.1.27 No batteries shall be used in the storage of configurations within electronic
devices, as this would necessitate changing of batteries within the equipment
over its useful service life. All memory storage shall be based on flash memory
or non-volatile storage, which is not battery dependent.
3.1.28 All the central and the common units, input / output / analogue modules shall
be provided with a 20% spare capacity after completing the Scope of Work in
accordance with this specification. However, for main computers (database
servers), the equipment shall be supplied with adequate memory if the required
task with 25 percent spare capacity for future use. The hard disk capacity
should be adequate to satisfy the requirements of the operating system support
and diagnostic, and application software with 40 percent spare capacity.
3.1.29 Historical data shall be automatically archived / backed up and stored into hard
disks, at easily retrievable locations within the system at regular intervals so
that active areas are not filled up and lead to slowdown in the system speed.
3.1.30 The minimum availability of the system shall be stated with high MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failures) and low MTTR (Mean Time to Repair), the
values to be indicated by the Bidder.

210
3.1.31 The bulk of the centralized equipment of substation control, supervision /
monitoring system will be accommodated in the substation control building.
3.1.32 It shall be possible to carry-out all modification works off-line with appropriate
provisions to verify / validate the changes for correctness before
implementation. Such activities shall be bump-less.

3.2 ARCHITECTURE

The PCMS shall be made of

3.2.1 A series of standard bays panels shall be interconnected by an open protocol.
A standard bay panel contains all the IEDs needed for the local control and
protection of the bay. A bay is a feeder, a transformer, a coupler, a capacitor
bank, a diameter or a Common Services Bay. Each bay has a local / remote
switch enabling or disabling the local control.
3.2.2 A tele-control gateway (TG), providing the interface between the substation
and the National Power Control Centre/Regional Control Centre. It is active
when the substation is in remote mode. The protocol is IEC 60870-5-101 and
IEC 608760-5-104.
3.2.3 An operator interface (HMI), providing the local supervision and control of the
substation, sequence of events, archiving, printing, engineering, PCMS
maintenance and data analysis. It is active when the substation is in local.
This operator interface can be duplicated locally or remotely. Remotely, it
may be accessed from an Internet browser.
3.2.4 The communication protocol between the bays with the TG and HMI shall be
IEC 61850 in order to permit 100 Mbps peer-to-peer communications.
3.2.5 Within a bay it shall have IEC 61850 protocol.
The PCMS shall be bay oriented, i.e.:
i) Addition of a new feeder or transformer shall be an easy operation from a
configuration and manufacturing point of view. The system interlocking
shall be done by mean of a topological interlocking, using the topology
and expert rules to authorize or inhibit the switchgear operation.
ii) Each bay has an autonomous behaviour, i.e. local control and
interlocking, sequence of events, etc. It is connected to other bays by
logical means for system wide functions, such as interlocking or bus bar
protection, but can have a downgraded mode with complete protection
and control of the local bay.
iii) Each bay shall have its own Ethernet switch.

3.3 DEPENDABILITY.

3.3.1 A single failure of any component of the PCMS shall not prevent the control of
more than one bay. In case of a partial retrofit, a bay shall not contain more
than one circuit breaker.
211
 As a consequence:
- Any central automation, such as voltage regulation of parallel
transformers, sequences, etc. shall be redundant.
- There shall be no common point of failure between the HMI and TG,
except the bay itself.
The PCMS shall enable accurate fault localization within the system in order to
repair within 1 hour (excluding travel time).
The PCMS shall permit to make local maintenance of one bay while
controlling the substation remotely. In this case, the bay can only be accessed
from the substation HMI and the indications are not retrieved in the control
centre.
The PCMS shall be able to identify the version of the configuration database of
each component (HMI, TG, Bays). It shall inhibit the operational
communication between components having non compatible database.

3.4 KEY PERFORMANCES.

3.4.1 Sequence of events shall have 1ms resolution at a device level.

3.4.2 Retrieval of status or measurement to the OI or TG shall be less than 2 s for
EHV / HV part and less than 3 s for MV part.
3.4.3 Manual control shall be executed within 1 s from the HMI or TG to the process
for the EHV part and less than 1.5 s for the MV part.
3.4.4 Peer-to peer data-exchange through IEC 61850 protocol shall be less than 30
ms, i.e. between the changing input on one bay and an output execution on any
other bay.
3.4.5 Measurement accuracy for EHV / HV bays shall be 0.2% for RMS current and
voltage values up to 15% & 0.5% harmonic for active and reactive powers.
For MV feeder the accuracy of the RMS current shall be 1%.
3.4.6 Ethernet redundancy latency shall be less than 1 ms.
3.4.7 Central automation redundancy latency shall be less than I s.
3.4.8 Sequence of event storage at bay level in case of a failure of the
communication to the central point shall be 1000 events during one week
without power supply of the bay.

3.5 PCMS INTERFACES.

3.5.1. Process Interfaces

3.5.1.1 The PCMS shall be directly interfaced with the primary equipment with no
interposing relays nor transducers (type 4-20mA) for CT / VT interface.

212
3.5.1.2 Interface with digital measurement such as transformer tap position shall be
done. After every setting command, the event of error, a switch is made
automatically to manual operation and corresponding binary information is
disputative.
3.5.1.3 Interface for energy measurement shall be done by pulses that need to be
accumulated in the PCMS or by transducers (type 4-20mA).
3.5.1.4 Interface with binary control such as CB shall be done through a double pole
switching with the following features:
- A make and carry of 5A continuous, 30A for 500 ms, 250A for 30 ms.
- A break D.C. of 50 W resistive, 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) and AC of
1250 V.A resistive, 1250 VA inductive (Cos φ = 0.7).

3.5.2 Communication Interfaces.

3.5.2.1 The communication with the remote control centre is using a duplicated
IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 link.
3.5.2.2 The communication with the remote HMI is using a standard telecom line with
a call back modem or an Ethernet connection.
3.5.2.3 The PCMS must be able to interface third party IEDs and integrate them into
the standard bay. The communication is done through IEC 60870-5-103.
3.5.2.4 The time synchronization is acquired from GPS receiver.
3.5.2.5 The tele-protection interfaces are project specific.

3.5.3 Operator Interfaces.

The operator interfaces are located:
3.5.3.1 At bay level. This must be a detachable LCD with a sufficient resolution to
display the single line diagram of the bay with associated alarm and
measurements, make control and display local sequence of events. It must be
possible to plug portable PC on Ethernet with the full substation representation
and sequence of events in order to help during the commissioning and
maintenance tests.
3.5.3.2 At station level. This is an industrial PC using Windows look and feed on a
21” screen. This is used for the PCMS configuration, IED setting, PCMS
management, single line representation, local control, alarm management, data
storage, disturbance record analysis, etc.
3.5.3.3 At a remote level. This is an industrial PC with similar representations than
the station level industrial PC.
3.5.3.4 Display selection, parameter setting, alarm acknowledgement, selected
printouts of reports and command outputs are to be performed from the
operator‟s keyboard.

213
3.5.3.5 The system to be offered has to distinguish between alarm lists and event lists
selectable on the monitor by the operator. Beside of these lists on the screen,
there shall be a chronological print out of any alarm or event in an event log.
3.5.3.6 An audible alarm shall indicate abnormalities and all unacknowledged alarms
shall be presented on any screen selected by the operator.
As a minimum, the following items shall be presented by the PCMS.
Station diagram showing the switching status of the entire substation.
Substation overall alarm list.
Section alarm list.
PCMS internal alarm list.
System status list.
Substation overall event list.
Section event list.
Event and alarm log.
All alarms including component failure should be communicated to SCADA.

3.6 EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES.

Following equipment and services shall be provided:

3.6.1 Real Time Station Computers.

Two real time station computers (database servers), rugged industrial type,
identically designed and equipped to perform all functions specified including
self monitoring and fail-safe switch over from the faulty to the healthy unit in
Main and Hot Standby configuration complete with adequately sized data
storage devices and peripherals such as CDROM and DVD Read & write
drive.

3.6.2 Work Stations.

- Two operator Work Stations, rugged industrial type, with controller, twin
colour monitors, keyboard and mouse complete with adequately sized
data storage devices and peripherals such as DVD Writer drive.
- One PCMS Engineering work station, rugged industrial type, including
Colour Monitor, Keyboard with Mouse, DAT Drive complete with
adequately sized data storage devices and peripherals such as DVD write
drive.
- One Protection System Administrator Engineering Work Station, rugged
industrial type including colour monitor, keyboard and mouse complete
with adequately sized data storage devices and peripherals such as DVD
Writer drive.

214
3.6.3 Common Interface (s).
For the data communication with the PCMS via the NPCC all required
communication interfaces shall be provided. The IEC 60870-5-101 standard
protocol shall apply, with all interoperable features fully identified and
addressable for load dispatch integration.
Additionally, a password coded dial-in facility from remote via the public
switched telephone network (PSTN) shall be provided to allow the PCMS
supplier to acquire information on-line for technical support, whenever
required.

3.6.4 GPS Clock Radio Receiver.

One GPS Radio Receiver as specified elsewhere in this specification complete
with digital display clocks, cables and antenna with serial interfaces for the two
real time station computers, disturbance recorder, tariff meter.

3.6.5 Common Bay Unit.

One lot of common Bay Units for 500 KV System. One Lot of Common Bays
Units for the 220 KV System. One lot of Common Bay Units for the 132 KV
system for miscellaneous I/O, common station services, etc.

3.6.6 Redundant Data Exchange System.

The Redundant Data Exchange System shall be fully supervised the failure of
any one LAN / LON, gateway and or switch shall be adequately announced.
The redundant data exchange system shall connect all hardware components of
the PCMS system in such a way that all specified requirements for redundancy
and availability are guaranteed, e.g. outage of any central component will be
managed by failsafe bump-less taking-over by the redundant component and
outage of any common data link (bus) will be managed by utilization of a
second (parallel) common data link, all equipment connected to the dual-bus
system must be dual-ported.
The redundant data exchange system and any other control component
concerned shall be pre wired and fully equipped to accommodate for all future
feeders / facilities indicted in the substation single line diagram.

3.6.7 Printers.
Each workstation shall have access to a hardcopy LaserJet colour printer with
A3 size paper handling capabilities, a standard Log Book Printer (to be
approved by Engineer / NTDC upon the receipt of Bidder‟s proposal) and to a
black and white dot matrix Event Log Printer. The Event Log Printer should be
designed with tractor / pin-feed drive mechanism and fan-fold paper.

215
Where printers are required they shall meet the following requirements:
a. Printers shall be supplied with stand; paper feed and catching trays shall
be incorporated.
b. Printers shall be turned on and off under processor control and run only
when required for printing. They shall be capable of continuous operation
in the powered up state, with a minimum MTBF of 8,000 hours
(20% duty cycle).
The specification drawing PCMS System Configuration shows the preferred
arrangement of printers. Alternative arrangements may be considered, where
limitations of dual network connection apply.
c. Adjustable tractor feed sprockets shall be included, capable of accepting a
variety of paper widths and cut paper feed trays. A self-test facility and
status indication (including paper supply status) locally and to the
relevant processor shall also be provided.
d. The event log printer shall comply with the following minimum
requirements:
Print Speed: 240 characters per second.
Paper feed / width: Adjustable width tractor / 18 to 38cm
(fan fold).
Print pitch / width: 10 or 12 characters per inch / 132
characters at 10 characters per inch.
Character set / graphics: Full 96 character ASCII
Max. Noise Level 50 dB (A)
Alternative proposals may be considered during the implementation phase of
the project.
e. The hard copy colour laser printer shall comply with the following
minimum requirements.
Print Speed (graphics): Not less than two pages per minute.
Colours: Black & colours compatible with
VDU images.
Resolution: 600 dots per inch.
Paper feed: Adjustable width tractor for fan fold
paper and automatic single sheet
feeder with 50 sheet feed tray.
Character set: Full 96 character ASCII and graphics.
Paper type / size: Plain paper A3 size.
Character set: Full 96 character ASCII.

216
3.6.8 Temperature & Humidity Acquisition.
One set of hardware for acquisition of the substation inside / outside
temperature and humidity at minimum three locations.

3.6.9 U.P.S
One substation sine wave UPS for AC powered devices of the PCMS.

3.6.10 Digital Annunciation System.

One digital annunciation system equipped for a minimum of 128 station alarms
including panel housing, wiring and related equipment.

3.7 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY.

3.7.1 The protection control and monitoring system (PCMS) shall be a digital
control and monitoring system to supervise and operate the Station.
3.7.2 The design of the system shall be such that personnel without any computer
background shall be able to operate the system with ease and shall incorporate
user-friendly features without causing undue operational delay. The design of
the hardware and software shall be suitable for all voltage levels used by the
NTDC to enable a standardized technical concept.
3.7.3 The PCMS shall be designed for easy modification of hardware and software
and for easy extension of the substations. Maintenance, modification or
extension of components should not force a shut-down of the whole PCMS.
Self monitoring of single components, modules and data transfer channels shall
increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize
maintenance. Failure of any component of the system should not force a total
system failure. Bay level unit (bay computer) shall be equipped with controls
only land not protection.
3.7.4 The entire substation shall be controlled and supervised from the SCADA
while individual bays are supervised and controlled from the local and remote
level equipment. It shall not be possible to control and the same time from the
station and bay level.
3.7.5 The bay units shall be independent of each other and the operation shall not be
affected by any fault occurring at the station level or in other bay units of the
substation.
3.7.6 Each substation control system shall consist of the following main parts:
● Human Machine Interface (HMI) based on standard software packages
conforming to NTDC approved XP / VISTA Windows or equivalent
recognized specifications.
● Substation Control Computer.

217
 ● Serial high speed bus for data transmission between the different system
components via fiber optical links.
● Bay Units (BU) for local control.
● Feeder related local control panels with mimic diagram pushbuttons and
selector switches.

3.8 SUBSTATION CONTROL AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS.

All control and monitoring functions have to be provided for a secure and
reliable operation of the substation. The following are the minimum functions
required:
● Input of digital and analogue values.
● Control, interlocking and supervision of the bays and the entire
substation.
● Alarm handling in the bay computers and in the station computer.
● Analogue value processing.
● Indication of the bay and substation status.
● Indication of measured and processed analogue values.
● Station control via video display system.
● Automatic chronological control of standard switching routines.
● All hardware, software and telecommunication facilities for remote
control and supervision of the substations from the National Power
Control Centre.
● Emergency control of each bay from the related local control panels.
● Synchro-check function for all breakers.
● Display of trend values.
● Fault indication.
● Event recording.
● Evaluation and archiving of historical data.
● Condition Monitoring.
● Automatic Load Shedding and Restoration.

3.9 EXCHANGE OF SIGNALS BETWEEN NPCC AND SUBSTATION

SHALL FOLLOW THE RULES AS GIVEN BELOW:

- The transmission should be based on Send / No Reply, Send / Confirm

and Request / Respond procedures.

218
- The Send / No Reply procedure shall be used for global messages and
cyclic set points in control loops.
- The Send / Confirm procedure should be used for control commands and
set point commands. The link layer in the receiving station should check
the message and confirm with a positive or negative acknowledgement to
the sender.
- The Request / Respond procedure should be used for polling with
different levels of priority (Class 1 and Class 2 data).
- Class 1 data are status changes, events and alarms.
- Class 2 data are analogue measurements, which are to be polled cyclically
during normal scan. The PCMS station should alert the NPCC and
substation master by setting the ACD bit in the control field of the
previous message in the event of availability of sudden Class1 data in the
buffer memory. The NPCC and substation should then respond to the
ACD bit by sending a request for Class 1 data.
- The PCMS should allow transmission of control command even by
suppressing a polling cycle.
The volume of data exchange with the NPCC and substation shall include
completely all data as per NTDC requirements. The following requirements
shall also be taken into account:
● ON / OFF supervised control with run time supervision for all the
EHV / HV circuit breakers, bus bar isolators and line isolators.
Control (ON/OFF) command shall be configured to be a Double
Command signal i.e. two independent channels / criteria shall be required
to simultaneously operate for command execution.
● ON / OFF status with plausibility checks for all the EHV / HV circuit
breakers, bus bar isolators, line isolators and earth switches.
● Status acquisition shall be configured as a Double Signal
(i.e. complementary contract pair shall be used for each status).
● Synchro-check facility shall be included wherever specified.
● Full pay interlocking and switch gear interlocking to be provided.
This feature shall take into account security during state of service such as
inhibiting connection of live parts to ground or operation of isolators
under load, and safeguard against incorrect sequential switching. The
interlocking shall be available in the event of a single Feeder Unit failure,
at least in a simulation mode as describe above.
● Acquisition of three phase measured values without transducers, such as
voltage (V), current (I), power (P), reactive power (Q), frequency (f), and
power factor (COS PHI) for the EHV / HV feeders.
Typically, all bus bar V and f, with V, I, P, Q for the EHV / HV feeders,
shall be transmitted to the NPCC and sub station as specified.
● Automatic and manual transformers tap regulation through the numerical
AVR relay with tap position acquisition for all the transformer feeders.
219
 ● Active and reactive energy metering for all EHV / HV feeder bays
through pulse metering technique.
● Acquisition of numerical relay data and other substation equipment
alarms.
● Acquisition of station inside / outside ambient temperature & humidity.
● CPU loading and response times.

3.10 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS INSIDE THE SUBSTATION.

3.10.1 IEC 61850

3.10.1.1 IEC 61850 protocols are mandatory for the communications between the
EHV / HV bays, TG and HMI. It is the recommended protocol for MV bay
and within EHV / HV bay. Within an EHV / HV bay this permits to suppress
wiring between IEDs such as start of the disturbance recorder, initiation of the
circuit breaker failure protection, recloser coordination, etc.
3.10.1.2 IEC 61850 shall be used for the time synchronization, control reports, peer-to-
peer exchanges and disturbance records file transfers. No private protocol is
allowed for such exchanges. IED setting may used a private tunneling
mechanism since this part is not standard. The supplier shall state the exact
profile intended to be used.
3.10.1.3 IEC 61850 is based on Ethernet 100 Mbps. The communication between
EHV / HV bays shall use fiber optic. The architecture shall be a redundant loop
so that the damage on one fiber will not affect the PCMs. The switching time
from one loop to the other shall be less than 1 m.sec in order to keep the peer-
to-peer exchanges performances in case of a network failure. There shall be
one switch per bay so that the failure of one switch will not affect more than
one bay. The switch shall preferably be a board integrated within the protection
and control devices. The switch must have at least one spare port reserve for
future enhancement at the bay level and temporary HMI connection.

3.10.2 IEC 60870-5-103

3.10.2.1 The IEC 60870-5-103 can be used for MV feeder bay interconnection or
within a EHV / HV bay. This is a master-slave protocol, speed is 19.2 kbps.

In order to keep sufficient performances the master shall not be connected to

more than eight devices on the same physical link.
In addition the IED setting shall be supported on the same physical link.

220
3.11 PANEL INTEGRATION.

3.11.1 As a general principal, all bays shall:

- Have a local / remote switch to provide control interlocking with the
substation and remote SCADA.
- Have LCD able to display at least the bay topology, the RMS current and
voltage, the active and reactive power, local alarm, the transformer tap
position (when applicable). It shall enable the control of the bay (circuit
breaker, motorized switches, tap changer) including use of the
synchro-check and by pass of the interlock.
- Have a redundant communication link in addition to the busbar protection
(when applicable).
MV bay IEDs shall be directly integrated into the MV switchgear panel.
3.11.2 The panels shall:
- Be a 19” rack design.
- Conform to IEC 529, protection class for indoor IP51 and for out door
IP55 or better.
- Have at least 20% free space for future expansion.
- Have a front Plexiglas door closed by key and a swing frame.
- Enable direct access to my component.
- Enable status input, control output and AC voltage input insulation using
individual terminal blocks.
- Remain rigid and retain their structural integrity under all operating and
services conditions with and without the doors closed.
- Be grounded with a 16mm² conductor.
- Prevent excessive heating and prevent moisture.
These panels location depends on the submission layout: they are ideally
installed close to the circuit breaker, if field kiosks do exist. If not they are in a
central building.

3.12 PCMS EXPANSION AND ENHANCEMENT.

3.12.1 The PCMS must be able to have a 30% expansion in term of bays and 20%
configurable I/Os within the bays.
3.12.2 The PCMS components (HMI, TG, Bays) must have the capability to manage
at least two configuration databases, in order to enable fast and secure system
extension. At a given instant only one database shall be active on each
component. The dual database shall be activate from the HMI when changing
the system configuration.

221
3.12.3 The PCMS must be able to integrate in the future new IEDs either on
IEC 61850.

3.13 CENTRAL FUNCTIONS.

These functions are supported by the HMI, TG or Common Services Bay.

3.13.1 Substation Mode Management.

3.13.1.1 The substation is either in local or remote mode. This is done either by a
physical switch or through the protocol: this is defined on a project basis.
3.13.1.2 Local mode will inhibit all control made by the Operator interface. The HMI
will keep all supervision and archive functions. Remote mode will normally
inhibit all control from the control centers.
3.13.1.3 In order to improve the substation availability when doing maintenance work
on one or several bays, it shall be possible to have in this remote mode a local
control from the HMI of a bay that is put in a maintenance mode. In this case
the information retrieved by the remote control points will be frozen.

3.13.2 Operator Interface.

The HMI shall be an Industrial PC on Windows XP / VISTA or better.
- General look and feel.
3.13.2.1 The screen shall always, display:
- The last 5 alarms.
- The date and time, operator name, substation name.
- A tool banner to start hardcopy, logoff operator, stop klaxon-tool launch
(such as setting or analysis tools).
- A navigation banner to go directly in the main alarm view, main system
view, reports and curves.
3.13.2.2 In all views with single line diagrams, busbar or line sections between all
switching devices could be coloured.
3.13.2.3 To distinguish the different states of a busbar or line section the following
characteristic are used:
- energized section - Background and edge in primary colour.
- de-energized section - Background empty, edge in primary colour.
- undefined section - Background cross hatched, edge in primary
colour.
- earthen section - Background yellow, edge green.

222
3.14 MAIN FUNCTIONS.

The HMI shall provide supervision, archive and maintenance formations. The
most important functions are further detailed in Specification.

3.14.1 Supervision.
3.14.1.1 Display of the topological view of single line diagrams: general overview,
voltage level view, detailed bay view. This shall include the position of the
switchgear, the measurement values, operation counters, graphical alarm
representation, etc. Spontaneous changes of a state, typically opening of a
circuit breaker from a protection, shall have a specific colour code.
3.14.1.2 Display the alarm list and enable acknowledgement and clearance.
3.14.1.3 Display the sequence of event list.
3.14.1.4 Display curves, either real time or based on archived. Invalid information shall
be clearly marked. Curves shall manage the time shifts.
3.14.1.5 Display disturbance file and power quality files.
3.14.1.6 Printing of sequence of event list, hardcopy and reports. The reports shall be
freely configurable using Crystal Report.

3.14.2 FUNCTIONAL CONTROL.

3.14.2.1 PCMS Functional Description.

The protection control and monitoring system (PCMS) shall be used for the
safe and reliable control and monitoring of the substation equipment with
alarm handling and even recording functions.
3.14.2.2 The design shall ensure high availability and facilitate ease of operation with
basic training requirements. Communication bus multiple signal lines shall
guarantee high system response quality.
3.14.2.3 The entire substation shall have three levels of electrical control i.e. „Local‟
from the local control cubicle LCC, „Remote‟ from PCMS and „Supervisor‟
from the system control centre SCC or NPCC, in order of hierarchy. So, the
Local control shall have the highest priority followed by the Remote and then
by SCC / NPCC. There shall be a secure transfer switch at each level to
transfer the control from that level to the next higher level. These transfer
switches shall be hardware / software switches as per NTDC (WAPDA)
requirements. The selection / transfer of control between SCC and ECC shall
follow the existing arrangement. At any point in time control shall be from
only one unambiguous point. Hardwired logics shall be concatenated with
software logics for fail safe, fool-proof operation as per NTDC (WAPDA)
standards and practices, bypass facilities being provided for hardwired and or
software logics as per NTDC (WAPDA) standards and practices.

223
3.14.2.4 The PCMS shall communicate with the SCC and / or ECC and shall be
interfaced with the SCADA to enable remote operation of the switchgear,
supervision of the position / status of the switches and other equipment and
telemetry of instantaneous values of electrical quantities V, I, MW, MVAR,
frequency and transformer tap position. Appropriate suffixes according to
NTDC (WAPDA) Conventions shall be used to indicate power flow
directions.
3.14.2.5 The PCMS shall operate independently and continuously for the entire
substation SCADA functions. However, control functions can be inhibited by
deselecting of the Supervisory mode from the appropriate
Remote / Supervisory hardware switches.
3.14.2.6 Further, the PCMS as a whole can be taken out of service by means of a
PCMS ON / OFF switch, without affecting the safe operation and control of
the substation.
3.14.2.7 Local control of switchgear in the substation shall be provided in case of
PCMS being out of service. In no case shall the operation of the PCMS be
hindered in the event of breakdown of a single Feeder Unit. Bay and
switchgear interlocking shall remain available, at least in a simulation mode,
where the status of the HV equipment (circuit breaker, isolators, earth
switches) will be entered manually.
3.14.2.8 The PCMS when installed shall substitute and thereby replace some of the
specified conventional control, supervision, measuring and data logging
equipment. The substitution shall take into account the functional aspects of
that substation equipment.
3.14.2.9 The PCMS hardware and functionality shall substitute the conventional
specified equipment listed below:
- Remote control and station mimic panels, and related equipment.
- Conventional alarm panel.
- Sequence of event recorders.
- Reactive power compensation control (if required).
- SCC and / or ECC interface cubicles and related wiring.
- RTU replacement.

3.14.3 Archive.
3.14.3.1 Storage of events, measurements, disturbance and power quality events.
3.14.3.2 Storage of all the system databases and component documentation.

3.14.4 Maintenance.
- System database design and modification.
- IED setting.
- IED database download.
224
 - Display of the system status, including the state of each high level
component (HMI, TG, Bay) and detail of it (bay content, IED content).

3.15 CONTROL PROCEDURE.

3.15.1 A control shall be executed in “Select Before Operate” (SBO) or “Direct

Execute”. A control acknowledgement pop-up is used to display negative
control acknowledgement and to allow users with appropriate rights to by-pass
the interlocking or manual lock control verification. In this case, the user can
visualize the interlocking equation and get the reason of the control rejection.
3.15.2 Several parameters, defined during the configuration process of the substation,
shall filter the control:
● Inter-control delay (time between two sequence in the same device).
● Substation and bay; modes.
● Topological interlocking.
● Automation running for the device.
● Synchro-check.
● Device locked.
● Uniqueness control: only one control at a time for the device.

3.16 ALARM MANAGEMENT.

3.16.1 Alarms shall be generated by a change of state of a digital point, a

measurement threshold violation or a system internal fault (e.g.: loss of
communication, IED faulty).
3.16.2 Alarms shall be defined as immediate or differed (with an associated user-
selectable delay) and can have an associated audible alarm. The audible alarm
can also being immediate or differed.
3.16.3 Alarms shall be associated to each state of even (open, close, jammed…) or to
each a measurement threshold (in case of violation) and may have a different
gravity level 0.5.
3.16.4 Four types of alarm management shall be available and are user-selectable
during configuration process:
● “State basis” alarm management: one alarm for each state is displayed.
● “Gravity level basis” alarm management: only one alarm for each gravity
level is displayed. The previous one is replaced by the current one with
same gravity level.
● “Data basis” alarm management: only the last alarm is displayed: the
previous one is replaced by the current one.

225
 ● “Spurious alarms” management: are defined for events, which appear but
never disappear (control acknowledgement for example).
3.16.5 The alarms shall be displayed via the HMI at substation control level, using:
● Dedicated windows displaying:
- The chronogically sorted list of the alarms (with additional sorting
criteria as geographic or functional).
- The last N alarms (N being user-selectable during configuration phase)
with different colours for each line of the previous lists, depending on
the alarm state.
● graphic pictures defined during configuration phase, displayed in the
different views, which can be associated to the presence and the states of
alarms for a device, for a bay, for a voltage area, for the whole substation,
etc.
3.16.6 An alarm shall be acknowledged by an operator; the audible annunciation
shall be an operator or automatically alter a user selectable delay.
An alarm shall be cleared only if the reason of its apparition disappear
(becomes inactive) and was acknowledged by an operator. An alarm shall also
be configured as “to be cleared automatically” when it becomes inactive and is
acknowledged.

3.17 USER RIGHTS.

3.17.1 The following user rights shall be available:

● General rights :
- Administrator.
- Audible alarm general stop.
- Hardcopy.
3.17.2 View rights: up to 64 levels for access to a specific mimic. These rights are
defined on a per mimic basis.
3.17.3 Control rights: up to 64 levels for controlling, locking, bypass and
force / suppress / substitute purpose. These rights are defined at the bay level,
so all modules attached to a bay will have the same control rights.
3.17.4 Acknowledgement rights: up to 64 levels for individual alarm
acknowledgement and clearing. These rights are defined on a per point basis.
3.17.5 Group Acknowledgement rights: up to 64 levels for graphical alarm groups
acknowledgement and clearing. These rights are defined on a per graphical
alarm group basis.
3.17.6 These user rights shall lb assigned to user profiles. Up to 20 user profiles shall
be defined during the configuration phase.

226
3.17.7 The user names and the associated password shall create / delete on-line on the
HMI by a user with the administrator. One or several user profiles shall then
be attached to a user name. Up to 10 user names shall be defined. After a
database switch, if some profiles have been deleted / updated from the
configuration, the users shall be automatically updated with these new
profiles.

3.18 TELECONTROL GATEWAY.

The telecontrol gateway shall interface to up to 3 telecontrol, each with a

possible link redundancy. It maintains a database per control centre.
The gateway shall be able to send to the remote control centre:
- Single point indication with time.
- Double point indication with time.
- Transformer tap position with time.
- Measurement value with time.
- Integrated total (counters).
- Disturbance record files.
The gateway shall be able to receive from the control centre:
- Single control, either direct or as a select / execute sequence.
- Double control, either direct or as a select / execute sequence.
- Interrogation command on a group of data.
- Clock synchronization.
- Counter freeze.
- Taking control. This facility allows a remote control point to force the
mode of the substation from LOCAL to REMOTE and to define on which
port the SCADA controls must be accepted.

3.19 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS.

3.19.1 The PCMS sequence of events shall be pointed and archived on the PC hard
disk. It shall contain the following information:
- Time Stamp and synchronization status.
(The synchronized / not synchronized).
- Origin – substation name, voltage level name, bay name, module name.
- Object Name – Information name.
- Object Message – Information resulting state.

227
3.20 ARCHIVES.

3.20.1 The measures and associated mean values shall be archived in the central
server database in the following tables:
- Daily table for the mean values of the day. These tables shall be stored
during 40 days.
- Monthly table for the minimum, mean land sum values, computed at a
reference time (configurable) of a day. Monthly tables shall be stored
during 24-months.
- Yearly table for the minimum, maximum, mean and sum values, computed
at a reference time (configurable) of a month. Yearly tables shall be stored
during 5-years.
3.20.2 Storage of disturbance files shall be done using COMTRADE 97 format. At
least 10 files per bays shall be kept.
- On operator request.
- At a configured date / time.

3.21 AUTOMATION.

3.21.1 System Interlocking.

3.21.1.1 The function may be centralized or fully decentralized in the bay. The
interlocking function apply for the following types of switching devices.
- Circuit breaker.
- Disconnector.
- Earthing switch.
- Quick break switch.
3.21.1.2 Interlocking is defined for operating and closing switchgear separately.
3.21.1.3 Interlocking can be overridden for operator having the right permission.

3.21.2 Automatic Voltage Regulation.

3.21.2.1 The Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) function is used to automatically
maintain the correct voltage at the lower voltage of transformers. Secondary
voltage is changed by controlling the tap changer of transformers.
3.21.2.2 AVR is able to manage one transformer or several transformers in parallel.
Transformers are in parallel if their secondary poles are interconnected.

228
3.22 ALARM FUNCTIONS

3.22.1 500 KV CIRCUIT.

The 500 KV Circuit Specific Functions are:

i). Distance protection Set-I.

ii). Distance protection Set-II.
iii). Line over current and earth fault protection.
iv). Over voltage protection.

3.22.2 500 KV SHUNT REACTOR.

The 500 KV Shunt Reactor Specific Functions are:

i). Differential Protection.
ii). Restricted earth fault protection.
iii). Over current and earth fault protection.

3.22.3 500/220/23 KV AUTO TRANSFORMER.

The 500/220/23 Auto Transformer Specific Functions are:

i). Differential Protection.
ii). Restricted earth fault protection.
iii). HV side over current protection.
iv). LV side over current protection.
v). Tertiary over current protection.
vi). Neutral over current protection.
vii). HV connection protection.
viii). LV connection protection.
ix). Rough balance protection.
x). Over excitation protection.
xi). Over voltage protection.
xii). Over load protection.
xiii). Guard protections.

229
3.22.4 220 KV CIRCUIT.

The 220 Circuit Specific. Functions are:

i). Distance protection Set-I.
ii). Distance Protection Set-II.
iii). Line over current and earth fault protection.

3.22.5 220 / 132 / 11 KV AUTO TRANSFORMER.

The 220 / 132 / 11 KV Auto Transformer Specific Functions are:

i). Differential Protection.
ii). Restricted earth fault protection.
iii). HV side over current protection.
iv). LV side over current protection.
v). Tertiary over current protection.
vi). Neutral over current protection.
vii). HV connection protection.
viii). LV connection protection.
ix). Rough balance protection.
x). Over excitation protection.
xi). Over load protection.
xii). Guard protection.

3.22.6 132 KV CIRCUIT.

132 KV Circuit Specific Functions are:

i). Distance protection.
ii). Line over current and earth fault protection.

3.22.7 132/11 KV POWER TRANSFORMER.

The 132/11 KV Power Transformer Specific Functions are:

i). Differential protection.
ii). HV over current protection.
iii). LV over current protection.

230
3.22.8 COMMON PROTECTION.

The Common Protection Functions are:

i). Busbar protection.
ii). Breaker failure functions.

3.23 ENGINEERING TOOLS.

3.23.1 Configuration.
3.23.1.1 The PCMS shall be provided with a configuration tool able to generate
consistent databases for the different components (HMI, Bays) of the system.
3.23.1.2 The configuration tool shall be unique for the system, i.e. it shall be able to
define in the same screen:
- the graphical part, such as circuit breaker display within the single line
diagram representation,
- the electrical part, such as alarm label of the circuit breaker,
- the system part, such as the board to which the circuit breaker is
connected,
- the automation part, such as the sequence that is using the circuit breaker
position.
- the IEC-61850 addressing,
3.23.1.3 The configuration tool shall be able to create object oriented templates, and use
instance of them to define the real configuration. There shall be one template
per bay containing all information (graphical, electrical, system, automation
and communication) of the bay.
3.23.1.4 Different levels of operators shall be available :
● Level-1 shall allow the modification of an existing configuration by
adjustment of parameters, settings or graphical representations. The users
of level 1 can also add or remove elements derived from the user
templates libraries.
● Level-2 shall allow the modification of an existing configuration by
adding or removing elements derived from the user templates libraries.
They can break the links between the templates and the instantiated
objects.
● Level-3 users shall have the capability to modify the create new templates
from scratch.
● Level-4 users shall be experts. They can modify and create the templates
from scratch.
3.23.1.5 The configuration tool shall be able to maintain track of the version of the
databases, and compare different versions of the databases.

231
 The configuration tool shall be able to have an open XML interface in order to
import data from third party tools. It shall generate reports on the content of the
database.

3.24 SIMULATION.

3.24.1 Simulation tools shall be provided with the system to emulate missing
equipment on IEC-61850.
3.24.2 The simulation tools shall be set up by the system configuration tool and be
able to execute scenario defined by the user.

3.25 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.

3.25.1 DOCUMENTATION.

3.25.1.1 Technical Project Documentation.

3.25.1.2 The supplier is requested to confirm for the following documentation to be
supplied during contract:
- Detailed system specification (for approval).
- Configuration specification (for approval).
- Operation Guide and Technical Guide of the control system (for
information).
- Schematic drawings (for approval).
- Factory Acceptance Test Procedures (for approval).
- Factory Validation Plan.
- Validation File (for information).
3.25.1.3 A part of the technical documentation is submitted for information, comment or
approval by the user. In particular the system specification and the
configuration specification will be approved prior to the beginning of the
manufacturing phase.
3.25.1.4 During contract phase, expected time between sending of documents for
approval and reception of approval will be 1.5 solar days.

3.26 PROJECT MANAGEMENT DOCUMENTATION.

3.26.1 The supplier is requested to confirm for the following documentation to be

supplied during contract:
- Order acknowledgement (contractual).
- Quality Plan (for information).

232
 - Progress Report (for information (monthly).
- Minute of meetings (after each meeting).

3.27 TESTS.

3.27.1 Generic System Tests.

The manufacturer shall, on demand, be able to show the tests plan and tests
result executed on the system architecture similar to the one needed in the
project.

3.27.2 Equipment Tests.

3.27.2.1 Each equipment will be submitted to appropriate routine tests during the
manufacturing process before being integrated in the PCMS.
3.27.2.2 Test certificates related to each main component of the PCMS will be supplied
at the time of the Factory Acceptance Test.

3.27.3 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT).

3.27.3.1 The inspection test of the PCMS at the factory will be performed by the
supplier in presence of the user on the base of a platform acceptance.
3.27.3.2 The purpose of the platform acceptance will be to check the conformity of the
PCMS to the functions described into the functional specifications previously
defined between the user and the supplier and to test them in compliance with
the test document. Main objective being to minimize the time of
commissioning.
3.27.3.3 Inspection test will be realized in accordance with the test document submitted
by the supplier land approved by the user.
3.27.3.4 Acceptance will take place in the supplier factory in the presence of user or his
duly authorized representative.

3.28 COMMISSIONING.

3.28.1 The commissioning of the PCMS will be carried out by supplier staff on
equipment ready to work on site. It includes:
- Local test of the various sub-assemblies.
- List of the network equipment.
- Functional tests of network PCMS.
3.28.2 These tests will have to be performed in the presence of the user representative:
Commissioning will apply on the whole scope of supply.

233
3.29 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT).

3.29.1 The purpose of the Site Acceptance Test of the substation shall be the
inspection of the general operation of the PCMS following its site
commissioning.
3.29.2 Tests and inspection shall be provided in accordance with the test documents
submitted by supplier and approved by the user.
3.29.3 Site Acceptance Test will take place in the presence of the user or his duly
authorized representative.

3.30 TRAINING.

3.30.1 Training to be provided shall include:

- PCMS overview.
- Local/Remote users training.
- PCMS software maintenance.
- PCMS hardware maintenance.
- All documentation in separate manuals.
The Provider shall include a description of the proposed course content,
duration, and technical level of the instruction. The Provider is to include a
quote for the training on a per student basis.

3.31 EXPERIENCE.

3.31.1 Suppliers must have at least ten years of experience in developing and
manufacturing of microprocessor based substation control systems. The
supplier will provide his reference list putting kin evidence: end user, end
country destination, network level, year of the contract.

3.32 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.

3.32.1 Only Suppliers whose qualify system fulfils the ISO 9001 standard will be
qualified to supply. Supplier offer will include a document issued by an
independent institute to certify the compliance.

3.33 SPARE PARTS.

3.33.1 Supplier shall include all recommended spare parts for a five years operation. A
list of those spare parts shall be included in the offer.

234
3.34 DOCUMENTATION.

3.34.1 The following documentation shall be included in the offer:

● Technical bulletin of each piece of hardware to be used.
● Technical bulletin of software to be used.
● List of references for NPCC installation using the offered type of
equipment and software.
● The design intent (Scope of hardware and software supply, and function
set-up of the PCMS) covering all central, common and feeder type of
PCMS units.
● List of applicable equality assurance, environmental, EM1, SWC and
electrical standards.
● Typical scheme drawings.
● Space requirements for PCMS hardware.
● Schedule of proposed Factory and Site Tests (FAT / SAT).
● Time schedule for design, manufacture, testing, installation and
commissioning.
● Operational and Maintenance Manuals.
● All documentation shall be in English. Translated portions shall conform
to international standard usage and practices in vogue.

235
3.35 Applicable standards
All these standards are applicable to any PCMS events (HMI, Ethernet network).

Type Test Name. Standards. Parameters. Range / Value.

Environmental IEC60068-2-1 Minimum air - 10 Cº

Conditions. temperature.
Maximum air + 55 Cº
temperature.
Temperature < 30 Cº
gradient.
Relative air 5 - 95 %
humidity.
Absolute air <29 g/m³
humidity.
Air Pressure. 70 - 106 KPa
Storage & Transport - 30 ….. + 85 Cº
Temperature.
Insulation IEC60255-5 Common Mode. 100 MΩ at 500 vdc
Resistance Normal Mode. 100 MΩ at 500 vdc
Dielectric IEC60255-5 Common Mode. 50 Hz, 1 mn 25 KV
withstand. Normal Mode. 50 Hz, 1 mn 1 KV
High voltage IEC60255-5 Common Mode. 1.2/50 µs, 5 KV
impulse voltage test. Normal Mode. 1.2/50 µs, 5 KV
Electrostatic IEC60255-22-2 Class-4 8 KV – Contact
discharge. IEC61000-4-2 15 KV – Air
Immunity against IEC60255-22-3 Class-3 10 V/m
Electro magnetic IEC61000-4-3 80T 1000 MHZ &
fields. Spat Tests.
Fast transient. Class-4 4 KV, 2.5 KHZ.
Common & Normal
Modes.
Clsss-3 2 KV, 2.5 KHZ.
Common Mode.
Class-3 2 KV, 5 KHZ.
Common Mode.

236
Surge immunity. IEC-61004-5 Class-4 4 KV
Normal 2 KV
Clsss-3 2 KV on shield.
Common Mode.
High Frequency IEC-61000-1-6 Class-3 10 V
conducted immunity 0.15 – 80 MHZ.
Harmonics IEC 61000-4-7 5% & 10%.
Immunity.
Power frequency IEC-61000-4-8 Class-4 50 Hz – 30 A/m
Magnetic Field permanent, 300 A/m
Immunity. shut time.
Class-5 100 A/m for / min
1000 A/m for 35.
Power Frequency IEC-61000-4-16 CM 500 V, 0.1 MF
DM 250 V
Conducted Emission EN55022 Gr-I 0.15 to 30 MHz.
Class-A & Class-B
Radiated Emission EN55022 Gr-I 30 to 1000 MHz
Class-A & Class-B 10 m.
High Frequency IEC-60255-72-1 Class-3 DM 2.5 KV, 1 KV
Disturbance IEC-61000-4-12 Class-2 CM 1 KV
Shocks IEC-60255-21-2 Class-1 15 gm, 11 set
Not powered on Class-2 10 g, I 1m.
Shocks power on
Vibration IEC-800-68-2-6 Class-2 1 g, from 10 to 150
Not powered on Hz
1 g from 10 (1) to
500 Hz
Seismic IEC-60255-21-2 Class-1 AXISH 3.5 mm –
Powered on 2g, AxisV – 3.5
mm – 1g.
Acceleration 2 g,
Class-2
Displacement 7.5
mm sclox axe H
Acceleration 1 g,
Displacement 3.5
mm sc / on axev.
Bump test IEC-60255-21-2 Class-1 10 g, 16 MS, 2000 /
Not powered on axis.

237
Vibration Response IEC-60255-21-1 Class-2 1g from 2 to 150
– Powered on Hz.
Vibration Response IEC-60255-21-1 Class-2 2g from 2 to 500 Hz
Not Powered on
Damp Heat Test – IEC-60068-2-3 Test Ca:
Operation.
+ 40 Cº / days /
93% RH
Cold Test – IEC-60068-2-1 Test Ab:
Operating.
- 10 Cº / 96h
Test Ab: 25 Cº / 96
H
Cold Test – Storage. IEC-60068-2-1 Test Ab:
- 40 Cº / 96h
Powered on at – 25
Cº (for information)
Powered on at 40 Cº
Dry Heat Test IEC-60088-2-2 Test Bd:
Operating. 55 Cº / 96 h
70 Cº / 2h
7 Cº / 24 h.
Dry Heat Test – IEC-60068-2-1 Test Bd:
Storage.
- 70 Cº / 96h
Powered on at + 70
Cº
Enclosure IEC-69529 Front : IP = 52
Protection. Reat : IP = 30
Inrush current T< 1.5 ms/I <20 A
(Start-up) T< 150 ms/I <10 A
T< 500 ms/I <1.2 In
Supply variation IEC-60255-6 Vn ± 20%
Vn + 30% & Vn –
25%.
Over voltage IEC-60255-6 1.32 Vn max.
(Peak withstand) 2 Vn during 10 ms.
Supply interruption. IEC-60255-11 From 2.5 ms to 1 s
at 0.8 Vn
50 ms at Vn, no
malfunction

238
Ripple (frequency IEC-60255-11 12% Vn at f = 100
fluctuations) Hz or 120 Hz.
12% Vn at f = 200
Hz..
Supply variations. IEC-60255-6 Vn ± 20%.
AC voltage dips & EN 61000-4-11 2 ms to 20 ms & 50
short interruptions. ms to Is
50 ms at Vn, no
malfunction.
Frequency IEC-60255-6 50 Hz: from 47 to
fluctuations. 54 Hz.
60 Hz: from 57 to
63 Hz
Voltage withstand. 2 Vn during 10 ms.

239
 SERIAL COMMUNICATION / LAN
COMMUNICATION
Type Test Name. Standards. Parameters. Range / Value.

Dielectric withstand IEC-60255-5 1.5 KV

test.
Impulse Voltage IEC-60255-5 Common Mode. 2.5 KV
withstand test.
Fast Transients. IEC-61000-4-4 Common Mode. 2 KV.

DIGITAL / ANALOGUE STANDARD I/O’S

Type Test Name. Standards. Parameters. Range / Value.

Dielectric test. IEC-60255-5 1.5 KV

Impulse Voltage IEC-60255-5 1.2 / 50 µs Common 2.5 KV.
withstand test. 1.2 / 50 µs Normal. 2.5 KV.
High Frequency IEC-61000-4-12 Common 1 KV
Test. Normal. 1 KV
Fast Transient burst IEC-61000-4-4 Common 2.0 KV

POWER SUPPLIES
Type Test Name. Standards. Parameters. Range / Value.

Voltage Tolerance IEC-60870-2-1 + 30% - 25%

DC.
Voltage ripple DC IEC-60870-2-1 15%.
Voltage Tolerance IEC-60870-2-1 + 10% - 15%.
AC.
Frequency tolerance IEC-60870-2-1 ± 5%.
AC.
Harmonic Content. IEC-60870-2-1 < 20%.
Harmonic Current IEC-61000-4-11 < 50
Interruption time.
Dielectric test. 60255-5 2.5 KV rms.

240
Impulse relay IEC-60255-5 1.2 / 50 s 5 KV.
withstand test Common.
1.2 / 50 s 5 KV
Normal.
High Frequency IEC-61000-4-12 Common. 2.5 KV
Test. Normal. 2.5 KV.
Fast Transient. IEC-61000-4-4 4 KV.

241
3.36 Table – 1: Technical Schedule for the
Control and Monitoring System.

Minimum Requirements
DESCRIPTION
Unit Data

● Manufacturer
● Country of Manufacture.
● Type.
● Manufacturing ordering code.
PANELS:
● Pre-wired.
● Floor-mounted.
● Steel sheet thickness. mm
● Protection class.
● Maximum height. m
● Door material.
Paint thickness.
Final Colour.
IP degree of protection.
Anti condensation heater with Adjustable
hygrostat thermostat provided.
Power supply for heater and cubicle light.
BAY UNITS:
● Spare units for additional bays. Pcs.
● Power supply from station battery. VDC
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNITS(CPU):
● Microprocessor bus architecture. bit
● Memory for system software. type
● Application software in battery-buffered RAM
or EPROM / Flash – PROM.
● Automatic time synchronization at all modes of
the network.
● Fault indication LEDs on modules and alarm
messages on monitors.
242
● Basic functions: logic, sequence control, data
processing, including code conversion, text and
alarm signal editing, and function units for
binary processes.
● Cycle times, selectable (for each control ms
module)
● Programming language: Elements for logic,
control loops, arithmetic.
● Minimum number of I/O channels per computer
(analogue in / digital in / digital out.
● Spare. %
VIDEO DISPLAY AND CONTROL SYSTEM:
● Power supply from station batteries. V DC
● Number of monitors for each control system. Pcs.
● Number of function keyboards:
Liquid-Proof Keyboard. Pcs.
Exchangeable Extended Keyboard. Pcs.
● Hardcopy printer. Pcs.
● Event and record printer. Pcs.
● Bus data channels. Pcs.
● Event list. Events.
● Alarm list. Alarms.
● Resolution:
Within Computer ms
Between Computers. ms
● External alarm outputs. Pcs.
● Diagram change speed. Sec.
● Diagram updating:
Event-Driven. Sec.
Cyclic, Adjustable. Sec.
● Transfer of manual command inputs. Sec.
COMMUNICATION LINKS:
● Data transmission rate. Mbit/sec.
● Data transmission mode as serial bus to IEEE
802.3 and CSMA / CD (Ethernet type).
● Conductor as duplex fibre optic cable.

243
● Data transmission rate. Mbit/sec.
● Number of buses per processing unit. no.
● Nodes per buses. Pcs.
● Transmission range (with fibre optic cable). m
PROGRAMMING AND SERVICES UNIT
(personal computer or programming unit):
● Main processor type (or better).
● Main memory. Mbyte.
● Hard disc. Gbyte.
● CD R/W driver.
● Monitor type.
● Interfaces.
● Operating system.
● Weight. Kg
● Ambient temperature:
Operation. ◦C
Storage. ◦C
Transport. ◦C
Electromagnetic interference tests:
● Insulation test, voltage test, individual test.
Application standards.
Test voltage AC KV/Hz
Or DC (1 minute). KV
External circuits against internal circuits.
External circuits against earth and against earth
other.
Internal circuits against earth.
● Impulse voltage test, type test:
APPLICABLE STANDARDS.
Test level. Level
Test voltage. KV
External circuits against internal circuits. µs
EXTERNAL CIRCUITS AGAINST EARTH.
HF INTERFERENCE TEST, TYPE TEST.
● Applicable standard.
244
● Test level.
● Test voltage (1 MHz attenuated, repeat rate
400/sec.):
Common mode voltage. KV
Differential voltage. KV
Transient Disturbance Value / Burst, Type Test.
● Applicable standard.
● Test voltage. KV/ns
● Burst duration. ms
● Repetition time. ms
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS, TYPE TEST.
● Applicable standards.
ELECTROMAGNETIC DISCHARGES, TYPE TEST.

● Applicable standard.
● Test conditions.
● Sharpness.
● Test voltage. KV
ELECTRIC METER.
● Basic current Io A
● Load capacity in % of Ib
METERING.
THERMAL.
SHORT CIRCUIT.
● Rated voltage Un V
● Rated frequency. Hz
● Accuracy class.
● No creep on voltage variation. V
● Starting load max. A

245
 DESCRIPTION. Unit Date

STATION COMPUTER.
● Manufacturer/Model.
● Type.
● Real Time Industrial strength equipment.
● AC Voltage Working Range. Volts.
● Service Conditions (Temperature & RH).
● Power Consumption. Watts:
● Architecture.
● Individual processors for each function.
● Operating system software.
● Method of Processor Expansion (e.g. number of
free slots when supplied).
● Main (semiconductor) memory:
a. Type.
b. Supplied Size.
c. Maximum size.
● Hard Driver.
a. Type.
b. Supplied Size.
c. Maximum size.
● Clock
● Type.
a. Unit per day (when not synchronized in
master clock).
b. Method of synchronization with master
clock.
c. Battery back up.
● Details of mass storage devices and data
archiving devices.
PERIPHERAL SERVER.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type
● AC voltage working range. Volts.
● Service conditions (Temperature and RH).
246
● Power consumption. Watts.
● Number of LAN connections.
● Number of peripheral ports.
● Number of communications speeds.
● Protocols supported.
OPERATOR / ENGINEER WORK STATIONS.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● AC Voltage Working Range. Volts.
● Service Conditions (Temperature & RH).
● Power Consumption. Watts.
● Architecture.
● Operating system software.
● Method of Processor Expansion (e.g. number of
free slots when supplied).
MAIN (SEMI CONDUCTOR) MEMORY.
a. Type.
b. Supplied Size.
c. Maximum size.
d. Battery back up system.
● Hard Disc Storage.
a. Type.
b. Supplied Size.
c. Maximum size.
● Clock.
a. Type.
b. Drift per day (when not synchronized to
master clock).
c. Method of synchronization with master
clock.
● Processing system Intercommunications
Interface.
a. Number supported.
b. Type (e.g. LAN etc.)
c. Speed.

247
● VDU
a. Type.
b. Number to be supplied at a workstation.
c. Screen size.
d. Screen pixel resolution.
e. Compliance with recognized EMC and
safety standards.
f. Type of Interface.
● Keyboard.
a. Type.
b. Number to be supplied.
c. Total number of keys.
d. Alphanumeric character key set.
e. Control keys provided.
f. Number of special function keys.
g. Type of Interface.
● Cursor Control Device.
a. Number to be supplied.
b. Number of buttons.
c. Type (e.g. optical).
d. Mat
e. Type of interface.
Event Log Printer
● Manufacturer / Model
● Type.
● AC Voltage Working Range. Volts.
● Power Consumption. Watts.
● Service Conditions (Temperature & RH).
● Print Speed. PPm
● Print Pitch / Width.
● No. of print pins / jets or resolution.
● No. of fonts / character sets.
● Paper feed proposed / width.
● Self test facility.

248
● No. of colours.
● Type of interface.
● Stand / Trays.
● Acoustic noise at one meter.
● Alarms local and Remote.
● Configuration / dual network connection.
HARD COPY COLOUR LASER PRINTER.
● Manufacturer / Model
● Type.
● AC Voltage Working Range. Volts.
● Power Consumption. Watts.
● Service Conditions (Temperature & RH).
● Print Speed for Colour Graphics Printing PPm
(PPM).
● No. of colours / toners.
● Resolution.
● Paper Handling.
● Paper Size.
● Type of Interface.
● Stand / Trays.
● Acoustic noise at one meter. dB
● Alarms local and remote.
● Configuration / dual network connection.
MASTER CLOCK.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● AC / DC Voltage Working Range.
● Power Consumption.
● Service conditions (temperature & RH).
● Battery Standby capacity.
● Type, speed and No: of output interfaces.
● Time and date facility.
● Seasonal changeover / automatic.

249
● Local display.
a. Day – Date: Month: Year
b. HH: MM: SS:
● Drift per day (when not synchronized to radio
signal)
● Receiver for UT from NAVSTAR satellites.
● Loss of radio synch alarm.
● Other alarms.
● Local alarms and contacts for alarms to SCMS.
FURNITURE.
● Workstation desk.
● Material of desk.
● Durable desk top surface.
● Writing area.
● Drawers / shelves.
● Support for VDUs.
● Size.
● Height.
● Workstation Chair.
a. Material.
b. Swivel and castor action.
c. High backed design.
d. Arm rests.
● Desk lighting.
● Window blinds.
WORKSTATION LAN.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● Coaxial / Optical Fiber Cable.
● Operating Speed. Hz
● Protocols / Compliance with OSI 7498.
● Media connection.
● Network functionality.
● Network management software.

250
● Software Packages.
● Dual redundant configuration.
REAL TIME LAN.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● Coaxial / Optical Fiber Cable.
● Operating Speed. Hz
● Protocols / Compliance with OSI 7498.
● Media connection.
● Network functionality.
●
Network management software.
● Software packages.
● Dual redundant configuration.
● Deterministic operational behaviour.
● Pier to Pier communications.
COMMUNICATIONS.
● Protocol between station computer and BCU:
a. Manufacture / Model.
b. Complaint with IEC60870-5-101
c. Info. Transfer efficiency (data bits / total
bits).
d. Hamming distance.
e. Security of control messages.
f. Interface.
g. Transmission rate.
● Type and No. of communication cables to
BCU.
● Type & No. of communications cables to
protection relay and disturbance recorder.
● The time between selecting display of analog Sec.
measurements and the actual display on the
monitors.
● The time between successive updates of the
main database servers with analog
measurements shall not exceed.

251
● MW measurements. Sec.
● Other analog measurements. Sec.
● The time between successive updates of the Min.
main database servers with pulse meter values
shall not exceed.
● Station computer fail-over time.
Normal. Sec.
Maximum. Sec.
● Control System restarting time to full real-time Sec.
operation after a power failure.
SYSTEM CAPACITY.
● CPU loading under %

Moderate Land. %
Worst case Load. %

● Redundant remote control interface based on Yes / No

IEC 101 protocol.
Sequence control of bays. Yes / No
Automatic voltage regulation and transformer Yes / No
parallel operation.
Calculation of station internal and external Yes / No
temp. Measurements.
Downloading of settings into, and integration Yes / No
of standalone intelligent relay.
Load shedding and Load management. Yes / No
On-line monitoring and diagnostic facilities. Yes / No
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
● The time between selection and display of Sec.
VDU diagram fully updated from the database
shall not exceed.
● The time between selection of a control Sec.
function and check back from field equipment.
● The time between execution of a control
function and successful completion displayed
at workstation monitors for:
- Circuit breaker (operation time less than Sec.
100 msc.
- Isolator (operating time less than 10 Sec.
sec.
252
 - Tap changer (operating time about 10 Sec.
sec.
● The time between the occurrence of the first
change of state / alarm in the process and
display on the monitor.
IEC 60870-5-T101 Protocol Profile.
● Functions Supported.
- Station initialization. Yes / No
- Command transmission. Yes / No
- Cyclic data transmission. Yes / No
- Data acquisition by polling. Yes / No
- Acquisition of events and alarms. Yes / No
- General interrogation scan. Yes / No
- Clock synchronization. Yes / No
- Parameter loading. Yes / No
- Parameter activation. Yes / No
- File transfer. Yes / No
- Transmission of integrated totals. Yes / No
- Test procedure. Yes / No
● Physical Interface.
Compliance to Standard.
Yes / No
V.24/V.28 of ITU-T for unbalance mode.
Yes / No
X.24/X.27 of ITU-T for balance mode.
Modern type used.
2 wire in half-duplex circuit. Yes / No
4 wire in half-duplex. Yes / No
4 wire in full-diplex. Yes / No
Transmission mode:
- Unbalanced mode. Yes / No
- Balanced mode. Yes / No
- Modern speed for Unbalanced mode. bps
- Modern speed for Balanced mode. bps
Transmission Procedures Sported in Control
Field:
- FCB activated. Yes / No
- FCV activated. Yes / No
253
 - ACD activated. Yes / No
- DFC activated. Yes / No
- List the function codes selected in Yes / No
separate sheets.

Performance / Availability.
● Compliance with performance requirements
(start and restart).
a. Time for redundant station computer to
assume online duties.
b. Time for full updating of information.
c. Confirmation the redundant station
computer database is in step with the on
line computer.
● Availability (99.98%).
● Availability calculations included.
Sine Wave.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● Input DC voltage and range. Volts.
● Service Conditions (temperature and RH).
● Output ac voltage range. Volts.
● Output ac voltage dynamic response.
● Output ac voltage and static regulation. %
● Output frequency regulation (unsynchronized). %
● Output ac voltage harmonic distortion.
● Output Rating.
● Output current overload. Amps.
● Output frequency tracking range.
● Thermal trip. Amps.
● Output load power factor.
● Efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100% outputs.
Static Switch
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type.
● Input voltage range. Volts.

254
● Input frequency range: Hz
● Output voltage regulation. %
● Service conditions (temperature and RH).
● Rating. Amps.
● Output current overload. Amps.
● Thermal trip. Amps.
Inverter Distribution.
● Manufacturer / Model.
● Type of switch.
● Type of MCB.
● Distribution circuits (numbers and ratings).
Power Supply Housing.
● No. of cubicles.
● Forced cooling / alarming.
● Noise limits at one meter.
● Instrumentation.
● Alarms.
● Efficiency & power factor at 25, 50, 75 &
100% outputs.
● Modular design / system extension facilities.
● Provision of maintenance switch.
● Radio frequency interference (production).
AC Mains Power Transient Protector.
● Manufacturer / model.
● Type.
● Nominal ac voltage and range. Volts.
● Input ac frequency and range. Hz
● Service conditions (temperature and RH).
● Power factor.
● Peak discharge current. Amps.
● Leakage current.
● Connection details.
● Dimensions / Housing.

255
 CONTENTS

4.1 General

4.2 Erection Equipment and Tools for transformer and shunt

Reactors.

4.3 Special Maintenance Equipment for SF6 for circuit breaker.

4.4 Erection and Maintenance Equipment and Tools for

Disconnectors.

4.5 Testing Instruments.

4.6 Erection, Testing and Maintenance Equipment Complete for the

Diesel, Generating Set.

4.7 Testing and Maintenance Equipment for Communication systems.

4.8 Spare Parts.

256
SECTION-4: ERECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT AND
SPARE PARTS

4.1 GENERAL

These Specifications cover the requirements of testing, maintenance & erection

equipment and spare parts.
All test, maintenance and erection equipment shall be new & unused and shall
conform to test, maintenance and erection (including assembly and
disassembly) requirements of the various equipment offered during its useful
life.
Erection equipment shall be manufactured especially for use with the equipment
offered.
The testing equipment shall be lightweight, portable, compact, rugged and shall
provide operating convenience and reliability for field testing. The testing
equipment shall include meters, operating controls, safety devices, cables, tool-
kit all accessories and spare parts. Contractor shall submit instruction, operation
and maintenance manuals for all the testing equipment. The Bidder shall list in
the Bid optional features available in the testing equipment offered.

4.2 ERECTION EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS FOR TRANSFORMERS AND

SHUNT REACTORS

The erection equipment and tools shall include, but not necessarily be limited to
the following:
1) Erection equipment and tools for auto-transformers and shunt reactors.

2) Lifting device consisting of a lifting beam and pin with steel cable
slings and devices or other secure fastenings for lifting the cores and
windings from case.
3) Complete set of case-hardened wrenches and special wrenches, tools,
slings and other equipment that may be required or are necessary for the
most expeditious erection, assembly, dismantling and maintenance of
any part of the transformers and shunt reactors.

4.3 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT FOR SF6 CIRCUIT

BREAKER CONSISTING OF:

1) Pipe clamping and grooving tool to obtain a good seal in the fittings of
control circuit.
2) Pipe crimping block
3) SF6 refilling device with provisions for checking the setting of pressure
switches.

257
 4) Module head lifting device.
5) Oil pressure check device.
6) SF6 leak detector with complete accessories.
7) Sets of single-end torque wrenches to fit every type of nut and bolt
head, used for the circuit breakers and erection equipment.
8) Sets of screw drivers, pliers and other normal tools.
9) Sets of any other special tools required in the operation of the circuit
breakers.

4.4 ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT, AND TOOLS FOR

DISCONNECTORS

The Bidder shall provide erection and maintenance equipment and tools
required for erection and maintenance of disconnectors.

4.5 TESTING INSTRUMENTS:

These shall be robust, state of art numerical instruments conforming to IEC

standards.
1) Universal Relay Test Set Omicron CMC 256, Fareja-300 or Doble
F6150 with complete accessories including dedicated laptop computer,
laser jet coloured printer or any other compatible approved set, suitable
to test distance and other relays.
2) Laptop Computer with laser jet coloured printer and complete
accessories as specified for uploading and down loading the setting for
testing.
3) Primary Current Injection Test Set (0-2000A).
4) Three phase secondary injection test set with input voltage 400V, 3Ø,
50 Hz output range 0-50A, 110-120V.
5) Single Phase Secondary injection test set Programma Type SVERKER
750 or approved equivalent.
6) Phase sequence indicator 3ø, voltage range 80 to 500V, 50 Hz.
7) Digital phase angle meter type Multiamp Model 175A or approved
Equivalent.
8) High voltage insulation resistance tester as per WAPDA specification
P-158:81 or latest version.
9) Digital type Standard Multi-range, Multimeter with DC/AC current,
voltage and ohm Scales, Fluke or approved equivalent.
10) Single phase Variac input 230V, Output 0-270V, 8A/2KVA as per
WAPDA Spec. PD-136.
11) Three phase variac input 400V, 50HZ, Output 0-476V, 2A/500VA.
258
 12) Digital standard multi-range clip-on meter.
13) Clip-on current transformer, 1000/1A ratio.
14) Contact resistance measurement set Programma type Micro Ohmmeter
MOM200A or approved equivalent.
15) Dielectric Test Set for Insulating Oil 90KV as per WAPDA
Specification P-156:81.
16) Capacitance and Dissipation Factor (C & DF) Test Set 12 KV.
17) Battery Ground Test Set Multiamp BGL or equivalent.
18) Battery test system TORKEL 840 complete with Extra Load TXL870
and software and printer or equivalent.
19) Test equipment for verification of magnetization characteristics of
current transformers etc.
20) Battery cell terminal voltage measurement and recording test set.
21) Resistance bridge for accurate measurement of low resistance such as of
CT & VT windings and cables.
22) Instrument transformers polarity tester for verifying winding polarity of
current and voltage transformers.
23) Earth resistance tester for measurement of the earth resistance, soil
resistivity and ohmic resistances WAPDA Spec. PD-82.
24) Digital Low Resistance Ohm meter for measuring transformer
resistance.
25) Portable Circuit Breaker Analyzer/Chronograph system Programme
Type TM1600 complete.
26) Hipot test set 0-80 KV DC as per WAPDA Spec. P-157:81.
Specification
27) Specification P-157-81 (UDC 621.317.73) DC Dielectric Test Set for
Cables.
28) AC Hi-Pot Test Set 130 KV.
29) Single Phase T.T.R Test Set.
30) Transformer Gas Analyzer System.
31) Power Stat Variable Transformer.
32) Portable Phase Shifter.
33) Sweep Frequency Response Analyzer.

SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ABOVE ITEMS ARE AS UNDER.

(1) Micro Processor Based Universal relay testing set

Micro Processor Based Universal relay testing set suitable for six voltages and
three currents, OMICRON, CMC-256, FREJA-300 latest model at the time of
supply along with accessories for complete testing and calibration of all type of
259
 protective relays, suitable for input voltage of 230V, 50 Hz and voltage
transformers secondary voltage 110-120V.
The test set shall be suitable for testing of distance relays of all manufacturer as
well as frequency, synchrocheck, power, over-current, differential,
over-voltage, over fluxing, and directional etc. relays.

Test set shall be supplied with at least the following accessories:

a) Test connectors and cables for interfacing with different type of
electromechanical and solid state distance relays being used in WAPDA
system.
b) Connectors and cables to interface with the peripheral units such as
printers, VDUs and PC etc.
c) Software for manual and automatic testing and plotting of the
theoretical and actual characteristics of distance relays.
d) Hand held terminal, memory unit, at least 8(eight) EEPROMS etc (for
FREJA, XS92b).
e) Operation and maintenance manuals for the test set and brochure for
each software programme.

(2) Laptop PC with complete accessories

The latest version of laptop PC with complete accessories shall be supplied
having the following specifications:
Hardware
Processor Intel Core-2 Quad (3.0 GHz or better)
Cache : 12 MB
System Bus 667 MHz
Memory Slots: 2
Type: 533 MHz PC2-4200 DDR2 SO-DIMM
Installed: 2 GB (2x1 GB)
Capacity: 2 GB
Configuration: 256 MB, 512 MB or 1 GB SO-DIMMs
Chipset 965PM (for external graphics)
Graphics Dedicated: NVIDIA GeForce Go 7400 with 335 MB
Display Card Total Available Graphics Memory On-Board: Intel Graphics
Media Accelerator 950 with 224 MB Total Available Graphics
Memory
Display 15.4"12 WXGA (1280x800)
Hard Drive Installed: 200 GB, 5400 rpm Type: SATA
Optical Drive Installed: Dual Layer DVD Burner

260
 Write Speeds:
DVD-R: 8x
DVD-RW: 6x
DVD-R DL: 4x
DVD+R: 8x
DVD+RW: 8x
DVD+R DL: 4x
CD-R: 24x
CD-R: 24x
CD-RW: 16x
Read Speeds:
DVD: 8x
DVD-RAM: 2x
CD: 24x
PCMCIA Expansion 1x Type II/Type I Card Slot with CardBus Support
1x ExpressCard/34 Slot (Occupied)
Ports 2x USB 2.0
1x 4-Pin FireWire-400
1x Port Replicator Connector
Communications Network: 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Connector (RJ-45)
Modem: V.92/V.90 56k Modem (RJ-11)
Wi-Fi: Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG - 802.11a/b/g
Bluetooth: Yes
Operating System Licensed Microsoft Windows Vista Business Edition

Softwares
Microsoft Office Small Business 2007 for Windows (licensed)
Symantec Norton Internet Security 2007 Software for Windows
Security Biometric Fingerprint Sensor,Trusted Platform Module

Battery Lithium-Ion
DC: 11.1V DC, 7800 mAh

261
 Accessories 4G Micro Vault Classic USB Flash Drive
Wireless Optical Mouse
Travel Surge Protector
Carrying Case Carrying case with tool kit
Services and Support 3 Year International Warranty for Computers

(3) Primary current injection test set

Primary current injection test set for injecting currents in the range of 0-6000A
with time, voltage current measurement displays complete with at least six(6)
current injection leads each lead of twenty (20) meter length, clamps for
attaching leads to the tubular conductor/standards conductor/equipment
terminals, tool kit, accessories and spare parts.
Primary current injection test set shall be designed to provide variable current
output for checking ratio of the current transformers and operation of the overall
protective gear of the substation.
The test set may preferably consist of a control unit and a high current unit
housed in sturdy metal carrying cases suitable for field use and supplied
complete with associated accessories & devices and supply & test leads.
The accuracy of ammeter and volt meter shall not be less than ±1% of full scale.
The test set shall have built-in overload and short circuit protection.
Rating:
The test set shall be designed to give following continuously adjustable outputs
by means of course and fine controls. The minimum duty cycle be 5 min. ON,
15 min. OFF.
a) Current
2000A at 0-3V.
1000A at 0-6V.
b) Voltage
0-270V at 15A
Leads:
Besides input supply leads of about 6m long, the test set shall be supplied with
pair of test leads 8m long and consisting of 2x 120 mm² or equivalent flexible
copper cables.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales service
and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

262
(4) Portable self contained three phase secondary injection test set
Portable self contained three phase secondary injection test set for testing over
current, over/under voltage, current balance, thermal directional, over current
percentage differential relays, timers AC and DC auxiliary relays; three phase
with phase shifting facilities, with input voltage 400V, 3ø, 50 Hz output range
0-50A, ISA model 3-TREF-C or approved equipment.

a) Output ranger.
- Selectable ranges of currents 3x1/5/10/50A. (with 150VA per phase at
50A) voltage 3x125-250 volts (50VA per phase) continuous duty and
continuously adjustable.
- DC voltage range 10-250V continuously adjustable.
- Voltage current phase shifting continuous between 0-360º.
- Frequency range 0-180 Hz continuously adjustable.
b) Output metering.
Digital current and voltage (AC/DC) meters, phase and frequency
meters of Class-1 with LED display.
c) Input voltage.
400V, 3 phase, 50Hz.

(5) Single phase secondary injection test set

Single phase secondary injection test set portable /lightweight for secondary
testing of protective relay equipment, plotting excitation characteristics, current
and voltage transformer ratio tests, impedance measurement, efficiency tests,
polarity verifications, AC/DC outputs 0-250V, 3A/0-300V, 2A suitable for
single phase mains input 230V +10% -15% complete with tests leads, transport
case, tool kit and all necessary accessories ; Programme Type SVERKER 750
relay test unit or approved equivalent as specified below
Secondary current injection set designed to provide continuous variable current
and voltage outputs for setting and checking operation of the protective relays,
overload coils and other tripping devices.
The test set shall be housed in robust steel carrying case suitable for field use
and supplied complete with accessories and devices and necessary supply and
test leads of sufficient length. The accuracy of ammeter and voltmeter shall not
be less than ±1% of full scale.
The test set shall have built-in overload and short circuit protection. The output
current waveform distortion shall be not more than 1% while testing saturating
core type relays.

263
 Rating:
The test shall be designed to give following minimum continuously rated
outputs for the intended application. Short time rating, if any, assigned to the
test shall also be indicated.

a ). Current
i) 200A at 0-2.5V.
ii) 50A at 0-10V.
iii) 25A at 0-20V.
iv) 12.5A at 0-40V.
b) Voltage.
i) 0-270 V at 2A

Counter
The test set shall be provided with a 6-digit counter having a resolution of 0.01s
or better and suitable to measure in conjunction with primary or secondary
injection set, operation time of relays and other tripping devices having “NO”
and “NC” contacts.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales service
and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

(6) Phase Sequence Indicator

Phase Sequence indicator shall indicate phase sequence through mechanical
rotation of dial on three phase 80 to 500 volts system, 50Hz.

(7) Portable digital phase angle meter

Portable digital phase angle meter for 50Hz, accuracy +1-0.5 degree, resolution
0.1 degree suitable for measuring angle between voltages, between currents and
between voltage & current.
Input potential ranges 1-40V, 15-600V.
Input current ranges 0.05-2A, 1.5-60A.
Input frequency range 48-52Hz.
Type Multiamp Model 175A or approved Equivalent

264
(8) High voltage insulation resistance tester as per WAPDA spec. P-158:81
Rugged, portable 500/1000/2500/500V DC insulation resistance tester powered
by rechargeable battery including built-in charging unit (input 230V, 50Hz)
with an additional facility of measuring AC/DC voltage upto 1000V, THORN
EMI model or approved equivalent WAPDA SEPC. P-158:81.

WAPDA SPECIFICATION P-158:1981 (UDC 621.317.73)

0 FOREWORD

0.1 This specification has been prepared by design department (Power Wing) of
WAPDA
0.2 This specification is intended for the procurement of material and does not
include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
0.3 This specification replaces Product Description PD-49.
0.4 This Specification is subject to revision as and when required.

1. SCOPE.

This specification applies to a portable, mains–operated, high range type

instrument for laboratory and field testing of insulation resistance of all type of
high voltage electrical equipment including cables.

2. SERVICE CONDITION.

2.1 The instrument shall be designed to render satisfactory service at temperature

between -10 deg.C and 55 deg.C. The relative humidity may range upto 100
percent over long periods. The maximum values of temperature and humidity,
however, do not occur simultaneously.
2.2 It shall be designed for connection to 240V, 50Hz, AC supply mains.

3. RATING

3.1 Test Voltage

The nominal test voltage supplied by the instrument shall be 5,000 or 10,000
volts DC as required to cover the insulation resistance range given in Clause
3.2. Besides the nominal test voltage, the instrument shall supply one or more
selectable lower test voltages, preferably 500 or 1000 volts.

265
 3.2 Insulation Resistance
The instrument shall be capable of measuring insulation resistance upto
minimum 100,000 mega ohms.

4. ACCURACY
The measurement error of the instrument shall not exceed ±1% of full scale
length. The accuracy shall not be affected by variations in the applied test
voltage.

5. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
5.1 The instrument shall be a heavy duty, motor driven type tester consisting of test
voltage generator, direct reading ohmmeter, necessary switches and terminals
assembled in a sturdy case suitable for field use. The instrument wiring shall
incorporate a guard system of electrical connections so as to avoid error in
measurements caused by unwanted surface leakage currents.

5.2 GENERATOR
5.2.1 The test voltage shall be supplied by an AC generator driven by means of a
built-in mains operated motor. It shall be equipped with means to maintain
constant speed of the armature to ensure a steady output voltage.
5.2.2 Provision shall be made to drive the generator by means of a hand crank in the
absence of AC supply. Necessary interlocking between the motor and the hand
crank shall be provided so that the latter is automatically disengaged when the
instrument is operated from the AC mains.
5.2.3 The output from the generator shall be rectified and stabilized so as to give the
required steady DC test voltage. The stability of the output voltage shall not be
less than 0.1% with ±10% variation in the AC supply voltage.

5.3 OHMMETER
5.3.1 It shall be a permanent magnet, moving coil type true ohmmeter designed for
long term accuracy. The movement shall be light and frictionless and able to
withstand a considerable amount of vibration and shock without injury.
5.3.2 Two or more resistance measuring scales shall be provided on the ohmmeter,
selection of which shall be by means of a scale selector switch. The length of
the scales shall be not less than 110 mm and the lowest scale reading not more
than 0.1 mega ohm.
5.3.3 An index adjuster shall be provided for setting the ohmmeter pointer over the
infinity mark on the scales.

266
 5.4 TERMINALS
The instrument shall be provided with three terminals i.e. for line, earth and
guard connections. The terminals shall be insulated binding post type with non
detachable screw heads.

5.5 PROTECTION
5.5.1 The instrument shall be fully protected against overloads and transient over
voltages.
5.5.2 A suitable circuit breaker or fuse shall be provided at the input to the
instrument. The instrument shall not be damaged even when the output
terminals are shorted while its most sensitive range is in use.

5.6 SAFETY
5.6.1 Necessary measures shall be taken to provide maximum safety for the operator
while the instrument is energized.
5.6.2 A discharge switch shall be provided to discharge the capacitive circuits at the
end of a test.

5.7 CASE
The instrument shall be housed together with the drive motor and all other
devices, controls, terminals and wiring in a shockproof weather resistant solid
hard-wood or insulated metal case of good finish. The construction shall be
such as to prevent the ingress of moisture and dust. It shall be equipped with
hinged removable cover, carrying handle and leveling screws.

6. ACCESSORIES
6.1 Following accessories shall be supplied with each instrument:
i) Traveling case made of strong leather or hardwood with suitable strap or
handles for carrying. It shall be fitted inside with shock absorbing
material. Space shall be provided in the case to accommodate the test
leads.
ii) One shielded test lead, 3 meters long, for line terminals connection.
iii) Two insulted leads 3 meters long each, for earth and guard terminal
connections.
iv) One main supply lead, 2 meters long with 3-pin grounding plug.
v) Operating and service instructions, manual.
6.2 The leads shall be rubber or PVC insulated with oil resistance outer jacket and
fitted with lugs for attaching to the instrument terminal and spring clips with
rubber boots for connecting to the apparatus or circuit under test.

267
 7. TESTS
7.1 The manufacturer shall carry out all necessary tests on components separately
and finally on the assembly, instrument. These shall include calibration test,
voltage withstand test at double the rated DC voltage, and insulation resistance
test.
7.2 The test results shall be supplied with the bid.

8. MARKING
8.1 Each instrument shall be marked with the following:
i) Manufacturer‟s name or trade.
ii) Manufacturer‟s type or model number
iii) Serial number and year of manufacture.
iv) Designation of the quantity measured.
v) Rated DC voltage.
vi) Supply voltage for the motor.
8.2 An instruction plate carrying principal operating instructions in English shall be
fixed to inside of the case cover.

9. PACKING
Each instrument shall be packed in a separate carton. A suitable number of
cartons shall then be packed in a crate strong enough to withstand rigours of
transportation by rail, road or sea.

10. DATA TO BE SUPPLIED

Each bid shall be accompanied by manufacturer‟s instruction manual and
technical data containing at least the following information:
i) Principle of operation and technical description including details of
protection and safety features.
ii) Measuring voltages.
iii) Test voltage stability.
iv) Ripple in the output.
v) Curves showing terminal voltage characteristics for each measuring
scale.
vi) Rated speed of the generator.
vii) Measuring ranges of ohm meter along with scale length and resolutions
etc.
viii) Accuracy.

268
 ix) Additional errors due to temperature variation, inclination and external
magnetic fields.
x) Insulation resistance.
xi) Short circuit current at the terminals.
xii) Dimensioned outline drawing.
xiii) List of accessories supplied with the instrument.
xiv) Test results as per Clause 7.2.

NOTE
After Sale Service
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales and the
availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

WAPDA Specification P-158:1981 (UDC 621.317.73) Points are ended here:

(9) Digital type standard multi range meter.

Digital type standard multi range, multi-meter with DC and AC current, voltage
and ohm scales, with selectable current ranges of 2/20/200 mAmp. and
2/10Amp AC/DC and selectable voltage range of 0.2/2/20/200/1000V AC/Dc.
Also suitable for measuring capacitance, frequency, temperature.

(10) Single phase variac Input 230V.

Output 0-270V, 8A/2V. Wapda Spec. PD-136. Single phase Variac input 230V,
Output 0-270V, 8A/2V. Wapda Spec. PD-136.

(11) Three phase variac Input 400V, 50HZ, Output 0-476V, 2A/500VA.
Specification for Three phase Variac
1. Construction Bench type
2. Input Voltage 415V +10% VAC (Line to Line)

3. Output voltage 0-476V (over voltage connection)

0-415V (line – line)
4. Output current 2Amp + 10%
5. KVA rating 500VA approx.
6. Regulation 2%

269
 7. Temperature withstand -10 C° to 50 C°
range. (Operation) -20 C° to 70 C° (Storage)
8. Humidity range 100% relative
9. Warranty 2 years
10. Features:
a). Lossless grain oriented silicon steel core.
b). High quality copper single layer winding.
c). Replaceable carbon brush unit.
d). Rugged and robust frame construction
e). Over voltage and over load protection
f). Insulation level: 2KV rms at power freq.
g). Small and compact size.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales service
and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan

(12) Digital standard multi-range Clip-on Ammeter/Voltmeter

Digital standard multi-range clip-on ammeter/voltmeter suitable for AC/DC
circuits, ampere range 0-1/5/30/300A voltage range 0-150/300/750V

(13) Clip-on Current Transformer

Clip-on current transformer; 1000/1A ratio, small sized, suitable for measuring
in conjunction with multi-meters currents in the panel and back of the relay
wiring associated with CT circuits.

(14) Contact resistance Measurement set

Contact resistance measurement set to check and measure contact resistance in
high voltage circuit breakers, disconnecting switches, equipment terminations
and joints in the high voltage bus work; 0-200A DC, measurement range 0-1999
microhms and 0-19.99 milliohms; suitable for main voltage 230V +10% -15%,
complete with current and sensing cables (each cable with length of at least 11
meters to reach 500KV equipment terminals), ground cable, calibration shunt,
transport case, tools kit and all necessary accessories, Programme type
MICROOHMETER MOM200A or approved equivalent

270
(15) Dielectric Test set for insulating oils 90KV WAPDA Specification P-156:81.
Dielectric test set for insulating oil semi-automatic with maximum test voltage
not less than 90KV, suitable for mains supply 230V =10%/-15% ; complete
with printer, calibration instruments, cables, twenty paper roles, spare parts,
accessories and carrying cases
Dielectric Test Set for Insulating Oils 90KV as per Wapda Spec.P-156:81

SPECIFICATION P-156:81 (UDC 621.317.73)

DIELECTRIC TEST SET FOR INSULATING OIL

0 FOREWORD

0.1 This specification has been prepared by Design Department (Power, Wing).
WAPDA.
0.2 This specification is intended only for the procurement of material and does
not include all the provisions of a contract.
0.3 This specification has been prepared in line with the relevant requirements
contained in IEC publication 156.
0.4 This specification Supersedes PD-l02.
0.5 This specification is subject to revision as and when required.

1 SCOPE
This specification applies to a portable, self-contained, semi-automatic type
dielectric test set for laboratory and field testing of the dielectric strength of
new, treated or used insulating oils for transformers, circuit breakers,
bushings, cables, capacitors and switchgears etc.

2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
2.1 The test sets shall be designed to render satisfactory service, at any
temperature between -10 deg. C and + 50 deg.C. The relative humidity may
range upto 100 percent over long periods. The maximum values of
temperature and humidity however, do not occur simultaneously.
2.2 They shall be designed for connection to 240V single phase 50Hz, AC supply
mains

3. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

3.1 The test set shall basically consist of a step-up transformer, voltage control
and measuring devices, circuit interrupting equipment, oil test cell and
electrodes, . control switches and indicating lights, and shall incorporate
necessary features for safety of the operator

271
 3.2 Transformer
3.2.1 The transformer shall provide sinusoidal test voltage of upto 75KV (rms)
between electrodes, with a minimum of harmonics (peak factor of the
sinusoidal waveform being with limits of 1.34 and 1.48).
3.2.2 It shall be designed, to produce a minimum- short circuit current of 20mA
for voltages' higher than 15 KV.

3.3 Voltage control & measurement

3.3.1 Voltage control

The test .voltage sha11 be increased 1inearly , starting from zero upto the
breakdown voltage of the oil sample by means of an automatic control
device (motor- drive), which will give a regular rate-of-:rise of the test
voltage equal to 2 KV/second.

3.3.2 Voltage measurement

3.3.2.1 The test voltage shall be measured by a suitable rms, indicating voltmeter
mounted on the test set and connected to the input or output side of the
transformer.
3.3.2.2 The measuring accuracy of the voltmeter shall be at least 1.5 percent of full
scale value.
3.3.2.3 The voltmeter shall be of the design in which the pointer stops automatically
at the instant the breakdown occurs and stays there until reset switch is
pressed thus permitting to read the breakdown voltage conveniently.

3.4 Circuit interrupting equipment

3.4.1 The transformer primary circuit shall be protected by a circuit breaker
operated by the current flowing following the breakdown of the sample. The
delay time shall not be more than 0.02 second regardless of the voltage at
breakdown.
3.4.2 Circuit breaker shall be well coordinated with the characteristics of the test
set and oil under test, and its operation shall be positive indication of
breakdown.
3.4.3 The test set shall also be equipped with a fuse which shall blow if the circuit
breaker is not operated.

3.5 Electrodes & Test cells

3.5.1 Electrodes
3.5.1.1 The copper, brass, bronze or stainless steel polished electrodes shall be used.
The electrodes shall be removable for cleaning purposes.

272
3.5.1.2 They shall be spherical (12.5mm to 13.0mm dia), or spherical surfaced as
shown in Figures 1 and 2 of IEC 156 respectively. They shall be mounted on
a horizontal axis, and 2.5mm apart. A thickness guage shall be provided for
setting the gap between them to an accuracy of + 0.1mm. The axis of the
electrodes shall be immersed to a depth of approximately 40mm.

3.5.2 Test Cell

3.5.2.1 The test cell shall be made of transparent material, plastic or glass and shall
be easily removable for filling and cleaning. The effective volume shall be
between 300 to 500ml. A suitable glass rod shall be provided for stirring the
oil in the test cell.

3.6 Cover or Hood

In order to prevent accidental contact during test, high voltage output shall
be totally enclosed by means of a hinged protective cover. It shall be made
of transparent plastic material to permit observation of the sample during
test.
Control Switches & Indicating Lamps
Besides the volt meter the following control switches and indicating lamps
shall be mounted on the test set:
1. Main switch with green lamp to indicate “Supply ON”
2. High voltage switch with red lamp to indicate “HV ON”. This
switch shall be interlocked with the reset switch mentioned below so
as to prevent starting except from zero voltage.
3. A switch to hold the test voltage at any value during voltage rises for
as long as it is pressed.
4. Reset switch to bring the test voltage quickly back to zero.

3.7 Housing
The test set shall. be housed in a suitable heavy duty portable case of good
finish and having sturdy carrying, handles at each end.

3.8 Safety Features

3.8.1 The test set shall be fitted with safety interlock such that the high voltage is
automatically disconnected if the hood is accidentally lifted during the test.
3.8.2 Both the HV bushings shall be insulated from ground at the base of the
recessed test chamber on top of the case.
3.8.3 The equipment shall meet all the other requirements for safe operation under
the conditions of its use.

273
 4 TESTS
4.1 The manufacturer shall carry out all necessary tests separately and finally on
the assembled test set. They shall include at least following operational tests.
1. Output test to verify compliance with Clause 3.2. The peak factor
may be checked by means of oscilloscope, a sphere gap or a peak
reading voltmeter in conjunctions with an rms voltmeter.
2. Test to check operation of the automatic voltage control device and
the resulting rate-of-rise of the test voltage. The rate-of-rise may be
calculated from the measurements of the time required to raise the
voltage between two selected values.
3. Checking properties of voltmeter to verify compliance with Clause
3.3.2.2 & 3.3.2.3.
4. Test on circuit interrupting equipment to check its characteristics
including delay time.
5. Tests to check performance of safety interlocks.
4.2 Test results and calibration data shall be supplied with the Bid.

5. ACCESSORIES
5.1 The test set shall be provided with a 3-conductor rubber or PVC insulated
input lead, about 2 meters in length and fitted with a 3 grounding plug.
5.2 A detailed instructions Manual containing complete operation and services
instructions shall be supplied with each test set.

6. MARKING
Each test set shall be marked with the following information:
i). Manufacturer‟s name and/or trade mark.
ii). Manufacturer‟s type designation or model No. along with Serial
Number.
iii). Designation of the quantity to be measured.
iv). Marking on the control switches and indicating lamps.

7. PACKING
Each test set shall be packed in a separate carton. A suitable number of
cartons may then be packed in a strong crate. The packing shall be capable
of withstanding rigours of rail/road transportation and ocean shipment.

274
 8. BID DATA
Each Bid shall be accompanied by manufacturer‟s instructions manual and
technical data containing at least the following information:
i). Principle of operation and complete technical description of the test
set.
ii). Transformer ratings (continuous and short-time).
iii). Details about the volt meter as to the type and design, voltage range,
accuracy class and how connected.
iv). High voltage sine curve deviation (peak factor).
v). Time of operation of the circuit breaker following the breakdown
and the minimum value of current necessary to operate the breaker.
vi). Details of the control, indicating and protective devices.
vii). Details of the interlocking and other safety features incorporated in
the test sets.
viii). Drawings showing shape and dimensions of the electrodes and test
cell.
ix). Overall dimensions and weight.
x). List of recommended spare parts indicating item wise prices.
xi). Test results and calibration data as per Clause 4.2

Specification P-156:81 (UDC 621.317.73) Dielectric test set for insulating oil points
are ended here.

(16) Capacitance and Dissipation factor (C&DF) test set.

Capacitance and Dissipation Factor (C&DF) test set for high voltage
equipment, capable of measurements under selectable models. Operated
from the specified mains voltage, complete with test leads, calibration
equipment, printer, tool kit, spare parts and all necessary accessories: Tettex
Instruments make comprising but not limited to control unit type 2818/5283
MU, bridge unit type 2818 HQ, Hv supply unit type 5283 MU etc, or
approved equivalent.

SPECIFICATION FOR C&DF TEST SET (0-12KV)

1). Power Input 110 & 240V AC ± 10 %
5Amp. 48-52Hz
2). Output voltage 0-12KV, 50Hz

275
 3). Output current
i). Capacitance and dissipation
factor measurement at 0 to
12KV, 0 to 100mA continuous,
200mA for 15 minute
ii). Transformer exciting current
measurement at 1 to 2.4KVA,
0 to 500mA continuous,
100mA for 15 minutes.
4). Display for Voltmeter/ Multimeter. Digital LCD/LED (3 digits)

5). Temperature withstand range -10 deg.C to 50 deg.C

(in operation)
-20 deg.C to 70 deg.C (Storage)
6). Humidity range 100% relative
7). Accuracy Class ±1%
8). Capacitance measurement range 0 to 12 micro farad in more than 10
ranges.
9). Dissipation Factor Range 0 to 120% in more than 3 ranges.
10). Features:
i). Capable of measuring capacitance and dissipation factor of electrical
insulation on high voltage power equipment, cables, bushing,
switchgears, transformers and capacitors etc.
ii). Capable of measuring change of capacitance and dielectric loss of
electrical insulation due to change in voltage level and other ambient
conditions.
iii). Capable of measuring dielectric constant.
iv). Capable of measuring transformer exciting current.

(17) DC Ground Fault Detector (Battery Ground Test Set Multiamp BGL or equivalent).
DC ground fault detector for detecting, tracking and locating multiple faults
in live floating or resistance grounding DC auxiliary power supply systems
without resorting to disconnection or sectionalizing and without affecting the
sensitive protection and control equipment; lightweight and portable, battery
operated with built-in charger, direct reading resistance range 0-100 kilo
ohms, with facility for capacitance measurement, complete with test leads,
calibration instruments. Too kit, spare parts and all necessary accessories;
MULTI-AMP model BGL or approved equivalent.

276
 Specification for Battery Ground Test Set
1. Application Detection, tracking and location of ground
faults of 110V & 220V live battery
ungrounded or grounded through a resistor.
2. Input Supply 230V 50Hz or battery operated.
3. Resistance Range 1 ohm to 100 kilo-ohm.
4. Capacitance Range 1 to 100µF.
5. Accuracy: ± 20%.
6. Operating Temperature -10 C° to 50 C°
7. Construction. Light, rugged and compact suitable for field
service.
8. Accessories:
i). Clamp- on current sensor.
ii). Fault simulator.
iii). Output Leads.
iv). Power Cord.
v). Mini clamp on current sensor.
vi). Bus bar clamp on sensor
vii). Carry Case.
viii). Operation and maintenance manual.
Multi-Amp model or equivalent.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales
service and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

(18) Battery Ground Test Set Multiamp BGL or equivalent.

Battery test system for verification of DC battery capacity, minimum
continuous current rating 150A at voltage upto 250, suitable for use indoors
for discharge test of batteries with rated voltage 24V to 250V, current
continuously adjustable between 0-150A, current maintainable at any value
upto 150A during battery discharge down to the level of minimum cell
voltage, complete with built-in ammeter, volt-meter, course and fine current
control, shunt for external ammeter, heavy duty terminals, discharge test
cables of minimum 50m length and all necessary accessories. Programma
Type TORKEL 840 with exact Load TXL and Torkel min software.

277
(19) Test Equipment For Verification of Magnetization Characteristics of
Current Transformer.
Test equipment for verification of magnetization characteristics of current
transformer, control unit operated from 230V +10%/-15% mains supply and
output voltage variation range 0-250V complete with step-up transformer to
cater for CT knee-point voltage upto 3000V and 5A current in the saturation
region, minimum 5 meter long test leads, tool-kit, necessary accessories,
carrying and transportation cases and spare parts.

(20) Battery Cell Terminal Voltage Measurement and Recording Set

Battery cell terminal voltage measurement and recording set, battery
operated with built-in battery charger, voltage reading to three decimal
points, LCD display, built-in printer, test leads, tool-kit, carrying case,
necessary accessories and spare parts.

(21) Resistance Bridge.

Resistance bridge for accurate measurement of low resistance such as of CT
and VT windings and cables, battery operated, built-in battery charger,
micro-ohm, milli-ohm and kilo-ohm ranges, complete with calibration
equipment, test leads, tool-kit, accessories and spare parts

(22) Instrument Transformers Polarity Tester.

Instrument transformers polarity tester for verifying winding polarity of the
current and voltage transformers, battery operated with built-in battery
charger, complete with test leads, tool-kit, accessories and spare parts

(23) Earth Resistance Tester for Measurement

Earth resistance tester for measurement of the earth resistance, soil
resistivity and ohmic resistances WAPDA Spec. PD-82.

1.0 General Description.

1.1 This description applies to a portable, light weight, self-contained
instrument for the measurement of earth electrode resistance, soil
resistivity, earth continuity, neutral earth tests and various other
direct resistance measurements within the instrument range.

2.0 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

2.1 The instrument shall consist of a permanent magnet moving coil,
megger type hand driven A.C generator to provide variable AC
output.
2.2 The instrument shall have a zero centre, moving coil type indicator.
2.3 Scale Ranges.

278
2.3.1 The instrument shall be provided with a four-range selector switch
and three separate digital indicators.
2.3.2 Four over-lapping ranges shall be available as follows:
0.01 to 9.99 ohms
0.10 to 99.9 ohms
1 to 999 ohms
10 to 9990 ohms
2.4 The instrument shall be provided with five binding post type
terminals, including a guard terminal to ensure the accuracy of the
instrument when spike resistances are high or unbalanced.

3. Construction Requirements.
3.1 The instrument shall be housed in a strong metal case fitted with
sling type carrying strap and a collapsible crank handle. It shall be
adequately sealed to prevent entrance of fine dust and moisture.

4. Rated Accuracy.
4.1 The rated accuracy of the instrument shall be within +1% of range in
use, including the lowest range with spike resistance upto 1500
ohms.

5. Tests Requirements.
5.1 The manufacturer shall carry out all necessary tests separately and
finally on the assembled instrument.
5.2 The test results shall be supplied with the Bid.

6. Carrying Case and Accessories

6.1 A fine leather carrying case equipped with carrying handle shall be
furnished with each instrument.
6.2 Accessory kit shall consist of:
i). One canvas bag to accommodate reels, leads, spikes etc.
ii). 4 test leads, one each 5 meters, 7 meters, 15 meters and 30
meters long.
iii). 4 reels for the above test leads.
iv). 4 steel spikes each 450 mm long, with hardened points and
loops for easy removal.
v). 1 kg hammer.
6.3 Test leads shall be rubber insulated, fitted with lugs for connecting
the instrument terminals and clips for attaching to equipment under
test.
279
 7. Marketing and Packing.
7.1 Each instrument shall be marked with following information:-
i). Manufacturer‟s name or trade mark.
ii). Manufacturer‟s type or model number.
iii). Designation of the quantity to be measured.
iv). Marking on current, potential and guard terminals.
7.2 Each instrument shall be packed in a separate carton. A suitable
number of cartons shall then be packed in a crate strong enough to
withstand rail/road transportation and ocean shipment.

8. Information to be supplied:
Each instrument shall be accompanied by manufacturer‟s
instructions manual and technical data containing at least the
following information:
i). Principles of operation and technical description.
ii). Dimensioned outline drawing.
iii). Rated accuracy
iv). Test voltage
v). Reference position of use.

(24) Digital Low Resistance Ohm meter.

Digital Low Resistance Ohm meter for measuring transformer resistance
specified as under.
Specification for Digital low Resistance OHM meter
i). Scope. General purpose, portable for
laboratory & field testing.
ii). Read Out. Digital read out
iii). Standard. According to DD-PD-36:87 (Wapda)
iv). Testing Current. Upto 10 amp
v). Input Voltage. 220/240V, single phase, 50 Hz, Ac
power mains
vi). Operation Power. Self contained re-chargeable batteries,
with
vii). Source Charger.
viii). Accessories. Standard accessories, with operation
and service manual.
ix). General Specifications. Multiamp model 83280 or equivalent.

280
 NOTE:
After Sale Service.
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales
service and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

(25) Portable Circuit Breaker Analyzer/Chronograph.

Portable Circuit Breaker Analyzer/Chronograph system for easuring the
opening and closing time of the circuit breaker. Minimum 16 channels
Programme type TM1600 complete with motion analyzer and software or
equivalent as specified.
Specification for Portable Circuit Breaker Analyzer
(Chronograph for Breakers)
1. State. Solid state or Microprocessors
2. Power Inputs. 110V & 240 V AC + 10%, 120 &
240V DC
3. Temperature Withstand Range. -10 deg.C to 50 deg.C (in operation)
-20 deg. C to 70 deg.C (Storage)
4. Humidity. 100%
5. Accuracy Class. +5%
6. Measurement Range Measurement of opening closing time
of breaker 0 to 10 sec.
7. Features: Displaying, registering and printing out
for various events of circuit breaker in
digital mode etc. in at least 16
channels.
8. Protection. Overload, over voltage, short circuit
9. Dielectric According to IEC255-5 and IEC 348.
Strength
10. Casing. Portable metallic or synthetic
leatherite.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales
service and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

281
(26) HI-POT Test Set 0-80 KV DC to WAPDA Spec. P-157:81.
Specification for High Pot Set (0-80KV DC)
1. Input. 240 V AC, + 10% Hz
2. Operating Frequency Range. 48-52 Hz
3. Output. 0-80 KV (-Ve to ground)
4. Temperature withstand Range -10deg.C to 50deg.C(in operation)
(storage). -20deg.C to 70deg.C
5. Humidity condition. 00% relative
6. Display. LED digital for:
(a) Input voltage.
(b) Output voltage.
(c) Leakage current
7. Test cables Standard
8. Accessories:
i). Strip chart recorder.
ii). High voltage discharge and grounding stick.
9. Protection Short circuit over-load.
10. Features:
i). Should have built in voltmeters for input & output and Ammeter for
leakage current.
ii). Should be capable of checking the quality of electrical insulation of
power cable, switchgear, motors insulators, transformer and
capacitors.
iii). Should have internal voltage regulator and should be capable of
giving stabilize output.
iv). Should be capable of measuring the leakage current as low as 0.1
micro amps.
v). Measurements should not be affected due to filed condition.
11. Warranty 2 Years.
12. Casing. Portable metallic along-with carrying
case.
13. Documents.
i). Operation manual
ii). Internal schematic diagram.
iii). Internal circuit diagram
iv). Maintenance and trouble shooting manual.

282
 NOTE:
After Sale Service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after
sales service and the availability of spares and consumables in
Pakistan.

(27) Specification P-157:81 (UDC 621.317.73 )DC Dielectric Test Set for Cables.

0. FOREWORD.
0.1 This specification has been prepared by .the Design Department (Power Wing),
of WAPDA.
0.2 This specification is intended .for the procurement of material and does not
include the necessary provision of a contract.
0.3 This specification includes and supersedes PD-141.
0.4 This specification is subject to revision as and when required.

1. SCOPE.
This specification applies to a potable self-contained DC dielectric test set
designed to supply adjustable direct voltage for field testing of .high voltage
power cables.

2. SERVICE CONDITIONS.
2.1 The test-set shal1 be designed to give satisfactory service at temperatures of
between -10 deg. and 50 deg.C. The relative humidity may range upto 100
percent. The maximal of the temperature and humidity, however, do not occur
simultaneously.
2.2 It shall be designed for connection to 240V, 50 Hz, single phase AC supply
mains and shall provide rated output voltage and current when the input voltage
varies by +10 percent.

3. RATING.
The test set shall be capable of supplying following minimum DC output:
a. Voltage 0-80 KV, continuously variable
b. Current 3mA, continuous at rated voltage.

4.0 DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION.

4.1 The test set shall basically consist of a step-up transformer, rectifier voltage
control equipment. (variac) voltage and current measuring instruments and other
necessary devices such as terminals, ON/OFF and other control switches,
indication lamps and protection and safety devices.
283
 4.2 It shall be constructed as portable equipment housed in robust steel or wooden,
case equipped with carrying handles suitable for field use and shall be supplied
complete with all associated accessories normally required for the intended
application.
4.3 All the components shall be sturdy and liberally rated for the duty involved. The
components as well as the housing shall have specially treated finish suitable for
operation in the tropical climate.
4.4 The control switches, measuring instruments, and indication lamps etc. shall be
mounted on an insulated panel of good finish provided on the front or top of the
control case, which may either be built in the test set or supplied as a separate
unit for ease of portability. These components shall be well insulated, protected
and located to suit their particular function. Measures shall be taken to ensure
protection of all the components during transportation.
4.5 Ample storage space shall be provided in the housing to accommodate the test
and connection leads during transportation and while the equipment is not in
use.

4.6 Transformer and Voltage Control Equipment.

The high voltage transformer shall be completely enclosed and shielded for
maximum safety in operation. The input to the transformer shall be through a
manually operated voltage control device (variac} giving smooth variation of
the output voltage from zero to the maximum rated voltage.

4.7 Rectifier
The rectifier shall be housed in a hermetically sealed chamber, well insulated
for the high voltage which it is intended to supply.
It shall be designed to give fairly regulated output with +10% variation in AC
supply voltage. The ripple content shall not exceed 2.0 percent at rated output.

4.8 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

4.8.1 Voltmeter
A moving coil type large scale voltmeter shall be provided in the HV circuit to
measure the test voltage directly across the output with reasonably good
resolution. The overall accuracy of the measurement shall be within +2.0 % of
full –scale length.

4.8.2 Ammeter
4.8.2.1 A moving coil large scale ammeter shall be provided to measure the current
drawn by the test specimen. The over all accuracy of the measurement shall be
within +2.0% of full scale length. A. range selector switch shall be provided to
allow reading of leakage current of the order of 0.1 microampere upto the
maximum milli ampere rating of the test set.
284
4.8.2.2 The ammeter shall be protected against damage by overload even when the
break down of the test specimen occurs at full voltage while the lowest range of
the ammeter is being used.

4.9 Protection and Safety Requirements

All the necessary protective and safety features prescribed by Standards for a
high voltage test equipment for the safety of the operator and protection of the
equipment shall be incorporated. They shall essentially include the following;
a). Protection of equipment and all the associated devices and instruments
against damage by mal-operation, voltage 'and current surges, and prolonged
overloads.
b). Zero start interlock for the high voltage output.
c). Safety interlock (key switch) to prevent inadvertent energization of the HV
side of the equipment.
d). Indication lamps to show energization of L.V & H.V. circuits 'and overload
or fault condition.
e). Suitable circuit interrupting devices in the LV and HV circuits to render the
equipment safe from damage in the events of overloads including the case when
the output terminals are shorted at full output voltage.
f). Built-in discharge switch to ensure complete discharge of the equipment and
test load when the test set has been turned off.

5. ACCESSORIES
5.1 Following test and connection cables shall be supplied for use with test set.
They shall be of adequate size, strength and flexibility:
a). Input cable about 6 meters long and fitted with 3-pin grounding plug for
connection the supply mains.
b). Shielded output cable about 10 meters long to connect the equipment to the
cable under test. The end of the cable shall be connected to suitable terminals
plugs.
c). Ground cable about 4 meters in length to connect the equipment to earth.
5.2 A discharge rod shall be furnished with the test set to discharge the cable after
testing.
5.3 Each test shall be provided with a complete service, and operating instructions
manual giving details of operating procedure, routine maintenance, the faults
that can possibly occur in the equipment and the method to rectify them.
5.4 Any other accessory normally furnished as a part of the of the test set or
required, for the intended application shall also be supplied.

285
 6. TESTS.
6.1 The manufacture shall carry out all the necessary tests separately and finally on
the assembled equipment.
6.2 The test results shall be supplied with the offer.

7. MARKING
7.1 The test set shall have at least the following information indelibly printed on it
or marked on a suitable nameplate permanently attached to it.
a). Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
b). Manufacturer‟s type or model number.
c). Serial number and year of manufacture.
d). Name of the test set and/or designation of the quantity to measured.
e). Rated input power, supply voltage and current.
f). Rated output voltage and current.
g).Necessary markings for the identification of various: devices,
terminals/control and range selector switches, arid indication lamps.
7.2 All the markings shall be legible and in English.

8. PACKING
The test set along with all associated accessories shall be packed in a separate
carton. A suitable number of cartons may then be packed. In a crate strong
enough to withstand rigours of handling and transportation by road rail or sea.

8.1 Data to be Supplied

Following minimum information shall be supplied with the offer failing which
the offer is liable to rejection:
i). Manufacturer's catalogue and literature giving complete
technica1description including operating principle and performance
data.
ii). Detailed circuit diagram showing position of various terminals, devices
and measuring instruments.
iii). Pictures or sketches showing details and location of instruments,
control switches and indication lamps.
iv). Rated supply voltage required to operate the test set.
v). Output voltage range, and polarity.
vi). Voltage regulation from no-load to full load, voltage stability against
input voltage variation of +10% and ripple content at rated output.
vii). Output current at rated voltage on continuous and short-time basis.

286
 viii). Short-circuit current withstand along with duration.
ix). Details of measuring circuits and accuracy, scale length, measuring
ranges and resolution of the measuring instruments.
x). Full details of protective and safety devices and interlocks provided for
safety of the operator and protection of equipment.
xi). Complete list and details of accessories.
xii). Details of design, length, cross-section and terminations of the input,
output and ground connection cables.
xiii). Discharge capacity of the discharge rod in joules.
xiv). Outline drawing showing of dimension and weight of the equipment.
xv). List of spare parts.
xvi). Operation and service instructions manual.

NOTE:
After sale service:
The supplier must ensure and provide information regarding after sales service
and the availability of spares and consumables in Pakistan.

(28) AC Hi-pot test set 130 KV.

AC Hi-pot test set 130 KV Phoenix USA Type BK130 or equivalent

(29) Single phase T.T.R Test Set.

Single phase T.T.R Test Set. Megger Type 55005 or equivalent

(30) Transformer Gas Analyzer System.

Transformer Gas Analyzer system 230V 50 Hz, Varian USA Type CP3800GC
or equivalent

(31) Power Stat Variable Transformer.

Power stat variable transformer, single phase, input 0-220 volts, output 7.5 A.

(32) Portable Phase Shifter.

Portable phase shifter unit for use in testing and calibration of single-phase and
three phase electromechanical and solid-state protective relays, transducers,
energy meters etc.; input three phase mains supply 400/230V +10%/-15%,
output single and three phase, with solid state digital phase angle meter and
control circuitry; multi-amp model CS-7B or approved equivalent.

287
 (33) Sweep Frequency Response Analyzer.
Portable sweep frequency response analyzer to detect mechanical effects on or
movement of different component shall be provided. The equipment shall have
built in PC of appropriate capacity. All the software and other accessories for
proper utilization of the test set shall also be provided. The sweep frequency
range shall be 10 Hz to 25 MHz. The test equipment shall be of double type
M5300 or approved equivalent.

4.6 ERECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT COMPLETE

FOR THE DIESEL GENERATING SET:

The Bidder shall provide erection, testing and maintenance equipment and tools
required for erection, testing and maintenance of diesel generator.

4.7 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT FOR COMMUNICATION

SYSTEMS CONSISTING OF:

i) Selective level meter, including battery set, adaptor.

ii) Level generator including battery set.
iii) Laptop PC with software for PLC and telephone equipment
maintenance.
iv) Tele-protection test box for measurement of trip signals.
v) Coaxial cable adaptor, 75 ohm.
vi) Service Engineer's Tool Kit.

If in the opinion of the Bidder certain special additional erection test and
maintenance equipment are necessary for the testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the equipment offered, the Bidder should submit supplementary
list of such recommended equipment giving full technical details. The testing
equipment shall be capable of performing commissioning tests recommended by
the relevant IEC Publications.
The test, maintenance and erection equipment, in so far as practicable, shall be
treated and packed for regular use and storage for a long time in the climatic
conditions specified. The wrenches and tools for maintenance, in so far as
practicable, shall be mounted on suitable hardwood or steel boards arranged for
wall mounting and provided with means for ready identification. For each
separate piece of equipment the Contractor shall provide a testing, maintenance,
operation and instruction manual recommended.

288
4.8 SPARE PARTS

(1) All spare parts shall be new, strictly interchangeable with the parts by which
they are intended to be replaced and shall conform to the relevant
Specifications. In case the Bidder‟s estimates differ from the specified
quantities, the Bidder shall furnish his own supplementary list of additional
recommended spare parts for maintenance for five years under specified
environments.

(2) Spare Parts Books: For each separate piece of equipment the Contractor shall
provide a spare parts book. This spare parts book shall contain an assembly
drawing of the equipment which shall show all parts of the equipment marked
and designated.

(3) Packing: The spare parts shall be treated and packed for storage for a long time
in the climatic conditions specified in Volume 2 of these Bidding Documents.
Each spare part shall be clearly marked or labeled on the outside of its packing
with its description and purpose. When more than one spare part is packed in a
single case or container, a general description of its contents shall be shown on
the outside of such case or container and detailed list enclosed.

(4) Paint: For field touch up work, 25 liters of paint lacquer as used on various
equipment under these Contract Documents shall be provided.

289